Agroplus 60-70-80

WORKSHOP MANUAL
introduction
This publication is intended for the trained technician who must operate on our tractors. It contains all general information relating to our tractor range, and in particular it highlights the inspection, overhauling and adjustment procedures as well as the main instructions for dismantling and reassembling operations. The workshop manual is a natural summary for the mechanic who has attended the vocational training and specialization courses, which are held every year at our Service School, to permit him to perform a precise and qualified work on tractor. Its contents are therefore an exhaustive reference book for the experienced mechanic who desires to refresh his memory on the sequence of the operations to be done. It is then good practice for every authorized dealer mechanic to have at his disposal this publication, so that it may be consulted quickly when necessary. We wish to thank in advance for the cooperation all thos people, who will let us have their suggestions in order to make this publication more complete.
List of contents
Tractor configurations AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80 ......................................................................................................6 Dimensions and weights...........................................................................................................................................7 Prescribed lubricants and capacities ........................................................................................................................8 Conversion tables .....................................................................................................................................................9 Parts .......................................................................................................................................................................10
1 - ENGINE
................................................................................................................................................................................11
2 - CLUTCH
Gearshift clutch.......................................................................................................................................................12 General specifications ............................................................................................................................................12 Cecking clutch ........................................................................................................................................................16 Adjusting clutch control pedal .................................................................................................................................16 Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit.....................................................................................................................16 Stripping the slave cylinder.....................................................................................................................................17 Stripping the master cylinder ..................................................................................................................................18 Diagnosing malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................20 POWERSHIFT unit, general specifications ............................................................................................................21 POWERSHIFT unit detach from the gear box ........................................................................................................24 Assembly of POWERSHIFT unit ...........................................................................................................................35 Re-assembly of the POWERSHIFT unit. ...............................................................................................................37 Fitting the oil manifolds of the POWERSHIFT unit ................................................................................................39 Diagnosing malfunctions ........................................................................................................................................44
3 - TRANSMISSION
General specifications ............................................................................................................................................45 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................................................45 Speed change configurations .................................................................................................................................47 Section through transmission .................................................................................................................................51 Section through transmission with POWERSHIFT unit ..........................................................................................52 Separating the front gearbox from the engine ........................................................................................................61 Dismantling the gearbox .........................................................................................................................................62 Removal of the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts ....................................................................................................62 Separating the POWERSHIFT unit from the gearbox ...........................................................................................62 Removal of the gear train positioned in the front gearbox ......................................................................................63 Disassembly of the inversor control rods and forks ................................................................................................64 Dismantling of the gearchange rod and fork assembly ..........................................................................................65 Dismantling of the gearchange selector rods and forks assembly .........................................................................66 Removal of the shaft with the actuator for engagement/disengagement of the front-wheel drive ..........................67 Removal of the range gear shaft ........................................................................................................................... 67 Examining parts removed .......................................................................................................................................68 Adjusting play of the gearbox shafts by means of the thrust plates on the mini/inversor shaft and the secondary shaft ...............................................................................................................................69 Warnigns related to assembly of the gears of the P.T.O. unit, the range reduction unit and synchronised P.T.O. shaft ............................................................................................................................................................73 Assembly of the P.T.O. ..........................................................................................................................................73 Installation of the range reduction unit, the gear for the front-wheel drive shaft and the parking brake discs...................................................................................................................................73 Points where sealant is to be used .........................................................................................................................75 Tightening torques ..................................................................................................................................................78 Bevel drive adjustment ...........................................................................................................................................81 Servicing operations ...............................................................................................................................................82 Rear power take-off ................................................................................................................................................83 P.T.O. clutch ...........................................................................................................................................................88 Technical specifications ..........................................................................................................................................89 Correct positions of P.T.O. sensors and cables .....................................................................................................89 Clutch inspection ....................................................................................................................................................91 Checking clutch hydraulic pressures ......................................................................................................................92 Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch .................................................................................93 Renewal of the rear P.T.O. clutch ..........................................................................................................................94 Main operations for removal of the rear P.T.O. unit ...............................................................................................95 Diagnosing malfunctions ......................................................................................................................................100
4 - AXLES
Rear axle ..............................................................................................................................................................101 Installing the rear half-shafts ...............................................................................................................................102 Removal and disassembly of the epicyclic reduction unit.........................................................................................104 Fitting lateral stub axles of the wheel ...................................................................................................................105 2WD extendible axle.............................................................................................................................................106 Removing the axle from the front support ............................................................................................................108 Centre steering lever ............................................................................................................................................111 Wheel hub ............................................................................................................................................................112 End float adjustment .............................................................................................................................................114 Front-wheel drive..................................................................................................................................................115 Specifications .......................................................................................................................................................115 Epicyclic reduction unit .........................................................................................................................................119 Side hubs..............................................................................................................................................................121 Tightening torques................................................................................................................................................122 Adjusting bevel gears ...........................................................................................................................................124 Adjustment of the internal control of the mechanical differential lock...................................................................125 Installing the differential assembly into the drive axle ..........................................................................................125 Diagnosing malfunctions ......................................................................................................................................126
5 - VEHICLE
Brakes - General information................................................................................................................................127 Hydraulic pump.....................................................................................................................................................128 Assembly of brake master cylinder ......................................................................................................................130 Checking the front brake disks on 2WD and 4WD front axles and the rear brake disks...................................... 131 Adjusting service brake pedals .............................................................................................................................131 Correct installation of inspection cover for parking brake discs............................................................................132 Checking parking brake pads ...............................................................................................................................134 Bleeding air from the brake hydraulic system.......................................................................................................135 Separate Brakes valve .......................................................................................................................................136 Diagnosing malfunctions ......................................................................................................................................140 Hydraulic lift with load sensing ...........................................................................................................................141 Installing the lift and front cover plate of the gearbox ...........................................................................................142 Lift mechanism .....................................................................................................................................................142 Checking the safety valves ...................................................................................................................................142 Checking the protrusion of the non-return valve...................................................................................................143 Adjusting the lift ....................................................................................................................................................145 Lift hydraulic circuit ...............................................................................................................................................147 Sensing arm assemblyMontaggio dell'organo sensibile .......................................................................................154 Power-lift distributor valve spring setting specifications .......................................................................................155 Electronic lift .........................................................................................................................................................156 Control panel ........................................................................................................................................................157 Control level or depth control knob .......................................................................................................................157 Mix position/draft control.......................................................................................................................................157 Lowering speed control knob................................................................................................................................158 Maximum lift height control knob ..........................................................................................................................158 Up/Down control switch ........................................................................................................................................158 Up control .............................................................................................................................................................158 Control/Float mode ...............................................................................................................................................158 Lift status indicator light ........................................................................................................................................158 Remote pushbuttons for lift operation from ground ..............................................................................................159 Lift operation .........................................................................................................................................................160 List of electronic lift tests ......................................................................................................................................164 Precautions for electronic equipment ...................................................................................................................173 Checking the electronics system ..........................................................................................................................173 Checking mechanical components .......................................................................................................................173 Front hydraulic liftSollevatore idraulico anteriore..................................................................................................174 Hydraulic accumulator and antishock valve for front lift .......................................................................................176 Front power take-off - General information...........................................................................................................177 Section of the P.T.O. ............................................................................................................................................178 Fitting the "RING-FEEDER" rings.........................................................................................................................182 Checking the clutch ..............................................................................................................................................183 Diagnosing malfuntions ........................................................................................................................................184 Spring specifications.............................................................................................................................................184
6 - CONTROLS
Hydrostatic steering ..............................................................................................................................................185 Inspections and checks ........................................................................................................................................186 Steering pump ......................................................................................................................................................186 Directional control valve .......................................................................................................................................186 Check the setting of the pressure relief valve.......................................................................................................186 Bleeding the hydraulic circuit ................................................................................................................................186 Assembly of orbital pump unit ..............................................................................................................................186 Teering wheel shaft and steering cylinders .........................................................................................................187 Instructions for the hydrostatic steering distributor assembly ...............................................................................189 Diagnosing malfuntions ........................................................................................................................................192 Mechanical controls ..............................................................................................................................................196 Electro-hydraulic controls .....................................................................................................................................197 Front P.T.O. clutch engagement control...............................................................................................................202 Rear P.T.O. clutch engagement control ...............................................................................................................202 Differential lock engagement control ....................................................................................................................202 Front-wheel drive engagement control .................................................................................................................202 Rear P.T.O. engagement control ..........................................................................................................................202 Gearbox ................................................................................................................................................................202 Front and rear lift ..................................................................................................................................................202 Hydraulic circuit diagram ......................................................................................................................................202 Solenoid valve - Specifications .............................................................................................................................207 Adjustment of front and rear differential lock control ............................................................................................214
7 - BODYWORK
Platform ................................................................................................................................................................215 Cab - General information ....................................................................................................................................216 Cab air filter ..........................................................................................................................................................218 Screen wash .........................................................................................................................................................218 Screen wipers (front and rear) ..............................................................................................................................218 Removing the driving platform complete with cab ................................................................................................219 Breakage of the top hood release cable ...............................................................................................................220 High visibility cab roof ...........................................................................................................................................222
8 - SYSTEMS
Ventilation .............................................................................................................................................................223 Heating System ....................................................................................................................................................223 Air conditioning unit for cabs ................................................................................................................................227 Operation and maintenance of the air-conditioning system .................................................................................228 Water dripping from the points at which condensate drain lines are connected to the conditioning unit ............229 Checking system ..................................................................................................................................................231 System safety elements .......................................................................................................................................231 Temperature regulation ........................................................................................................................................231 Charging the system.............................................................................................................................................232 Filling the metering unit ........................................................................................................................................232 Refilling the system with oil ..................................................................................................................................232 Verifying operation of the system after recharging ...............................................................................................234 Directions for tightening air conditioning system pipeline fittings .........................................................................234 Diagnosing malfuntions ........................................................................................................................................241 Hydraulic system ..................................................................................................................................................242 Oil filters ................................................................................................................................................................243 Hydraulic pumps ...................................................................................................................................................243 Checking the relief valves of the hydraulic lift system ..........................................................................................243 Stripping the hydraulic pump ................................................................................................................................244 Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves ............................................................................................................................247 Checking the pressure relief valve setting ............................................................................................................250 Checking the operating pressure ..........................................................................................................................250 Conversion of auxiliary spool valves from double acting to single acting operation.............................................250 Checking the surface of the valve spools .............................................................................................................250 Trailer hydraulic braking system ...........................................................................................................................251 Use of the tractor with CUNA 341/01 hydraulic trailer braking .............................................................................253 Installing the hydraulic braking valve for trailers equipped with safety brake ( ITALIAN version) ................................................................................................................................................258 Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (up serial number1017) - 70 (up serial number 2773) - 80.............................261 Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) - 70 (under serial number 2772) ........................445
General safety directions......................................................................................................................................446 Jump start utilizing another battery.......................................................................................................................447 Recharge system..................................................................................................................................................449 Heating system .....................................................................................................................................................450 Starting system .....................................................................................................................................................450 Ignition key ...........................................................................................................................................................452 Ventilation control .................................................................................................................................................452 Push button control...............................................................................................................................................452 Beacon push button..............................................................................................................................................454 Work ligths............................................................................................................................................................454 2-Speed windscreen wiper switch ........................................................................................................................454 Relay ....................................................................................................................................................................455 Electronic flasher unit ...........................................................................................................................................455 Switch controlling..................................................................................................................................................456 Switch controlling: differential lock - P.T.O. clutch - 4RM - 540 1000 rpm/min P.T.O. speed selector Economy P.T.O. - Live P.t.o. - electric starter system.........................................................................................456 Switch for emergency brake .................................................................................................................................456 Fuse box ...............................................................................................................................................................457 Instrument panel with digital display .....................................................................................................................458 Operation of the broken belts alarm control unit...................................................................................................460 Engine stop operation with a type 2MH engine control unit .................................................................................462 Electrical wiring.....................................................................................................................................................465
9 - APPENDIX
Power lift tester version 1.24a ...................................................................................................................................I
TRACTOR CONFIGURATIONS:
AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80
2RM 2RM 4RM 4RM
WITH PLATFORM WITH CAB WITH PLATFORM WITH CAB
CAB
- ventilation - ventilation + heating - ventilation + heating + air conditioning
GEARBOX
Fully synchronised: 20 Forward + 10 Reverse: 5 speeds x 2 ranges (Hair-Tortoise) + SYNCHROSPLIT (H/fast-L/slow-R/rearward)
30 Forward + 15 Reverse: 5 speeds x 3 ranges (Hair-Tortoise-Snail) + SYNCHROSPLIT (H/fast-L/slow-R/rearward) 45 Forward + 45 Reverse: 5 speeds x 3 ranges (Hair-Tortoise-Snail) + shuttle + version POWERSHIFT -
CONTROLS
- rear P.T.O. clutch with electro-hydraulic control - 4WD with mechanical control or optional electro-hydraulic control - electronic engine throttle
MECHANICALLY OPERATED REAR POWER-LIFT

- with supplementary rams - without supplementary rams
MAIN EQUIPMENT
- front P.T.O. - front lift - hydraulic pump capacities increased by 27 l/min (for hydrostatic steering, electro-hydraulic control unit and gearbox lubrication) and by 47 l/min (for trailer braking, auxiliary control valves and lift). - hydraulic trailer braking - 4-way or 6-way control valves with Flow Divider - etc.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

AGROPLUS 60
2 WD Length max: - without linkage - with front and rear linkage Width min./max. Height: - al telai di sicurezza - at cab (standard) - at cab (with air conditioning) Ground clearance Wheel base Front track base min./max. Rear track base min./max. Min. turning radius without brakes Operating weight (without front lift) - with plataform - with cab Max. permissible load - front - rear - block Tyres - front - rear (A) mm (A) mm (B) mm (C) mm (C) mm (D) mm (E) mm (F) mm (G) mm 3800 1920 -2320
AGROPLUS 70 -80
2 WD 3930 1920-2320
4 WD 3835 4350
1920-2320
4 WD 3985 4480
1920-2320
2420 2430 2595 345 2162
2420 2430 2595 345 2112
1490 1700 2360 365 2292 365 2242
1400 1440 1300-1600 1340-1740 1500 1500 1400-1900 1400-1900 3500 4050
1400 1440 1300-1600 1340-1740 1500 1500 1400-1900 1400-1900 3700 4300
(H) mm
(mm)
kg kg kg kg kg
2355 2550 240 200 7.50-16 14.9R30
2705 2900 240 200 250 12.4R 20 14.9R30
2555 2750 240 200 7.50-16 16.9R30
2905 3100 240 200 250 11.2R 24 16.9R30
PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS AGROPLUS 60/70/80

Litres (US gal) Produc t Specificati ons SDFG change hours
Part to be suppl ied
Engine AGROPLUS 60 AKROS TURBO 15W40
9.5** (2.5) 11** (2.9)
500*
Engine AGROPLUS 70/80
Sae 15w40 ACEA E3-96 API CF SDFG OM-1991 MIL-L-2104 E level MB 228.3 level
Gearbox and rear axle
41 (10.8) AKROS MULTI s AKROS MULTI
Sae 10w30 Sae 20w30 UTTO API GL4 SDFG OT-1891
1200
Central axle
Side reductions
PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS
Front PTO MAX
6 (6.3) 1.5x2 (1.6x2) 2.5 (2.6)
Sae 10w30 Sae 20w30 UTTO API GL4 SDFG OT-1891
1200
Brakes and clutch control
AKROS MATIC AKROS GREASE T2
Lubrification points
ATF DEXRON II D SDFG OF-1691 NLGI 2 - LITIO SDFG GR-1202 L
50
(*)1 replace after 50 hours (**) With filter + 1.5 litre
CONVERSION TABLE FROM
FROM inch cm foot m yard m Eng. miles km Sq.in. cm2 Sq.ft. m2 Sq.yard m2 Cu.in. cm3 Cu.ft. Liter Cu.yard m3 Imp.gall. Liter US gall. Liter pint Liter quart Liter oz. kg lb. kg lb.ft. kgm lb/in. kg/m lb./sq.in. kg/cm2 lb./Imp.gall. kg/l lb./US gall. kg/l lb./cu.ft. kg/m3 cu.ft./lb. m3/kg Nm kgm kW PS bar kg/cm2 dm3 l
TO cm inch m foot m yard km Eng. miles cm2 Sq.ft. m2 Sq.ft. m2 Sq.yard cm3 Cu.in. Liter Cu.ft. m3 Cu.yard Liter Imp.gall. Liter US gall. Liter pint Liter quart kg oz. kg lb. kgm lb.ft. kg/m lb/in. kg/cm2 lb/sq.in. kg/l lb./Imp.gall. kg/l lb./US gall. kg/m3 lb./cu.ft. m3/kg cu.ft./lb. kgm Nm PS kW kg/cm2 bar l dm3
multiply by: 2.540 0.394 0.305 3.281 0.914 1.094 1.609 0.622 6.452 0.155 0.093 10.77 0.835 1.197 16.39 0.061 28.36 0.035 0.763 1.311 4.547 0.220 3.785 0.264 0.568 1.762 1.137 0.880 0.028 35.25 0.454 2.203 0.139 7.233 17.87 0.056 0.070 14.22 0.100 10.00 0.120 8.333 16.21 0.062 0.062 16.21 0.102 9.81 1.36 0.736 1.014 0.981 1 1
HOW TO ORDER SPARE PARTS
To ensure perfect tractor efficiency thus avoiding serious drawbacks, and to optimize your investment and the operational expenses, the use of ORIGINAL SPARE PARTS is recommended. Spare parts orders must specify the following: Tractor serial number and engine serial number (if the engine is concerned). Spare part name and reference code.
ENGINE TYPE AND SERIAL NUMBER
TRACTOR FRAME TYPE AND SERIAL NUMBER
10
ENGINE
AGROPLUS 60 and AGROPLUS 70 are powered by F3L 913 / F4L 913 engines. The workshop manual for these engines cuold be ordered to the following addresse: DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLANDGmbH Abt. LT-ZE Deutz-Fahr-Strae 1 89415 Lauingen Telefax-Nr.: 09072/997-360 or -353 Using the following code: 0297 7293
11
2
23
Earshift clutch
General specifications
Clutch and transmission

Clutch
The clutch, a single stage type, comprises a friction disc, a pressure plate and a diaphragm spring. The hydrostatic control is self-adjusting: a master cylinder operated by the pedal directs oil to the slave cylinder mounted to the left hand side of the intermediate housing, which in turn operates the clutch release lever. Technical specifications Type of clutch Type of operation Disc p/n Disc diameter Minimum permissible thickness of disc Thickness of friction disc Type of facing material on friction disc Type of master cylinder Type of oil mm mm mm Agroplus 60 Agroplus 70-80 Agroplus 60-70-80 (USA) 6 blades
single disc dry single disc dry single disc dry organic facing organic facing cerametallik facing hydrostatic with automatic take-up of free travel 009.6913.3 279,4 6 8,5 TEXTAR T385
+0, 3 -0, 3
009.6924.3/20 310 6 8,5 TEXTAR T385 Benditalia 3/4" AKROS MATIC

+0, 3 -0, 3
009.9770.3 310 9,7

0. 2 10 + -0. 2 UA 330 DX
Spring specifications to Belleville washer for the clutch engagement

Load on the pressure plate Nm 11000
CAUTION: In the event the transmission being split to gain access to the clutch assembly, the pickup (A, fig. 1) must be removed to avoid its being damaged by the teeth of the engine flywheel.
Fig. 1 - Engine rpm pickup.
IIMPORTANT: In the event of the friction disc being removed, care must be taken during refitment to position the components correctly, as indicated, since the disc is not symmetrical.
12

Clutch
2
23
Fig. 2 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60
Fig. 3 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 70-80
13
2
23

Clutch
Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60-70-80 (USA) 6 blades
14

Clutch
2
23
Fig. 4 - Components of clutch assembly
15
2
23

Clutch
Fig. 5 - Checking clutch disk thickness.
Fig. 9 - Installing clutch assembly through n. 5.9030.256.4/10 equipment.
Cecking clutch
Check the disk lining for signs of chipping and the disk friction face for scoring which may prevent the clutch from operating properly. Check that the sliding surface of the engine flywheel is not scored; if signs of scoring are evident, machine the surface. Check the disk thrust plate for scoring or bluish areas caused by tempering and also ensure the diaphragm-type spring has not lost its efficiency; if so the whole clutch assembly shall be replaced. Be sure the clutch disk is free to move in its housing and the friction lining securing rivets are duly riveted. Should any wear be found on the thrust bearing or the diaphragm-type spring, an exhaustive check over the spring operating conditions installed in the disk thrust lever operating cylinder (see Fig. 6) shall be performed; replace if necessary. On reassembly ascertain dimension A (see Fig. 6) between the operating cylinder fixing face and the push rod contacting the en gagement lever is 195 mm. NOTE: To facilitate correct clutch disk assembly the use of no. 5.9030.256.4/10 centering tool is recommended. Warning: With engine running, never ride the clutch pedal with your foot to prevent the clutch disk from being damaged because of overheating. Important: The thrust bearing is prelubricated, and must never on any account be cleaned with fuel oil or other solvents as these will render the prelubrication treatment ineffective.
Fig. 7 - Checking operating cylinder inside spring efficiency.
Fig. 6 - Clutch assembly hydraulic operating cylinder.
Adjusting clutch control pedal

Make sure the distance between pump fixing surface and fork hole centre is 106 1 (Fig. 15) otherwise loosen nut A and operate adjusting stay rod B (Fig. 15).
Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit

Operate the clutch pedal several times, then keeping the clutch pedal in fully depressed position, slightly unscrew and soon after tighten the air bleeding screw valve again (this being located on thrust lever operating cylinder). This operation should be repeated as many times as the oil flows out of the bleeding screw valve without air bubbles.
Fig. 8 - Bleeding the air from the clutch hydraulic circuit.
16

Clutch
A B C Bleed screw Hydraulic pipe fitting Slave cylinder body D E F Spring Seal ring Piston G H Push rod Rubber boot
2
23
Fig. 10 - Clutch operating cylinder
Stripping the slave cylinder (Fig. 10)

Remove the boot H. Withdraw the piston F carefully from the cylinder C , blasting with compressed air at low pressure to assist removal. Remove the spring D from the cylinder and loosen the bleed screw A. Remove the seals E fom the piston F. CAUTION: When cleaning the components of the cylinder, use only specifically formulated brake and clutch fluids (see page 110). Do not use petrol, paraffin or other mineral oils as these will damage parts in rubber.
Inspections
Check both internal and external piston surfaces for scratching. Replace if required. Make sure the seal ring grooves are duly clean; blow the grooves with compressed air if necessary. Inspect seal ring, dust boot conditions as well as spring efficiency, worn-out parts should be replaced. Ensure the air bleeding hole is free from impurities.
Notes on refitment
When reconnecting the transmission housing, check that the clutch fork remains correctly positioned and free to rock on its fulcrum pivot. This can be ensured by removing the side plug from the flange of the intermediate housing and viewing the fork through the hole. In the event of the fork pivot being unseated, reposition correctly with the aid of a screwdriver inserted through the hole vacated by the plug. Before refitting the slave cylinder, fill with the recommended oil so as to facilitate the subsequent bleeding procedure. Once all components are correctly and securely in place, bleed the hydraulic circuit.
A - Control lever B - Dust boot C - Pushrod D - Union E - Piston F - Seal ring G - Cylinder casing H - Spring
Fig. 11 - Clutch operating cylinder cutaway view.
17
2
23

Clutch
A Hydraulic pump B - Delivery pipe union C - Delivery pipe D - Clamp E - Union Fig. 12 - Clutch hydraulic pump parts.
F G H I L
- Spring - Spring holder - Screw - Shoulder ring - Seal ring
M - Spacer ring N - Piston O - Seal ring P - Rod Q - Support disk
R S T U
- Snap ring - Guard boot - Nut - Yoke
Stripping the master cylinder

Referring to figure 14, remove the protective boot E , dislodge the circlip B and withdraw the rod D together with the disc C . Remove the piston together with the spacer, the seal, the backup washer and the spring beneath.
Fig. 13 - Clutch pump control positioning. A - Locknut B - Yoke
Fig. 14 - Pump control seal ring. A - Pump D - Rod B - Snap ring E - Guard boot C - Support disk
18

Clutch
Inspections and checks
2
23
WARNING: To clean and wash the hydraulic pump components use only the oil type recommended for brakes and clutch. Never use petrol, kerosene or other mineral oils to prevent damaging the rubber parts. Inspect both internal and external piston sliding surfaces for scratching. Replace if required. Make sure the seal ring grooves are duly clean; blow the grooves with compressed air if necessary. Inspect seal ring, dust boot conditions as well as spring efficiency, worn-out parts should be replaced. Inspect all pump internal compartments, apertures and passages and make sure these are properly clean and free from foreign matters. Check that the spring is neither lazy nor deformed; replace if necessary.
Reassembly
Reassemble the cylinder, repeating the disassembly steps in reverse order and observing the following directions: Lubricate surfaces engaged in relative sliding contact, using the recommended oil (see page 12). Verify correct operation of the cylinder, making certain that the piston is able to complete its full stroke unimpeded. In the event that the fork linking the master cylinder with the pedal has been removed, check that with the push rod fully extended, the distance between the reference surface of the cylinder and the centre of the hole in the fork is as indicated in figure 15. If not (referring to fig 13), remove the boot, loosen the lock nut A and screw or unscrew the fork B to obtain the prescribed clearance, then retighten the lock nut and reposition the boot.
Fig. 15 - Section view of clutch master cylinder
Clutch greasing points. Apply Molikote Gn-plus at all the points indicated in the figure with letter A. Fit part B with Loctite 270. Fit pin C with Loctite 601.
Fitting the P.T.O. shaft oil seal Before fitting the oil seal 2.1529.517.0 apply Loctite 222 to the outer face A indicated in the figure.
19

Diagnosing malfunctions
lubricant in clutch housing renew the front gearbox oil seal and the rear engine oil seal clean oil seal contact surfaces with petrol replace disk
clutch slips
clutch worn
check condition of clutch disk
check condition of the spring disk
fit new clutch as sembly
thrust bearing sticking
clean surfaces and apply grease
replace thrust bearing
clean or replace the disk
clutch disk surfaces dirty
clean the friction surfaces
clutch jerks
clutch disk warped
clutch disk surfaces dirty
replace clutch disk
clutch disk worn plate seals loose
replace clutch disk replace clutch disk
difficulty in enga ging gears when engine running
clutch disk warped
replace disk
clutch fails to disengage
hydraulic pump inefficient
check the stroke of the clutch control piston and replace any worn parts clean contact surfaces with a wire brush and petrol
clutch disk stuck to flywheel
clutch noisy when disengaged
worn parts in clutch engagement me chanism
replace parts
20

POWERSHIFT
POWERSHIFT unit
2
27
The POWERSHIFT unit is composed of an epicyclic speed reducer and three oil-immersed multiple disc clutches ( LOW - MED - HIGH). The unit is located between the clutch-coupled shaft and the gearbox. The speed reducer is engaged and disengaged selectively by way of the three clutches, which are a push button and mounted to the knob of the shift lever.
Selecting the control, the MED clutch releases as the force of the belleville discs is overcome by hydraulic pressu re; at the same time, the HIGH clutch engages, locking the planet carrier of the epicyclic train to the relative housing so that drive is transmitted to the range input shaft with no speed reduction whatever. Selecting the control, the MED clutch releases as the force of the belleville discs is overcome by hydraulic pressu re; at the same time, the LOW clutch engages, and the shaft carrying the sun wheel is locked to the structure of the transmission housing. As a result, the planet carrier is made to rotate as one with the epicyclic housing and drive is transmit ted to the layshaft at a speed reduction of 0.687 (the ratio between the annulus and the sun wheel gear teeth). Selecting the control, the POWERSHIFT unit is isolated from hydraulic pressure altogether and the belleville discs are able to engage the MED clutch, with the result that the shaft in mesh with the larger planet wheel is locked to the transmission housing. This gives a reduction of 0.825, by reason of the compound ratio between the planet wheels and the flange of the speed reducer in mesh with the range input shaft. Technical specifications Clutch maker number of friction discs diameter of friction discs overall thickness of assembled friction discs complete the intermediate discs number of intermediate discs disc lubrication pressure maximum pressure piston thrust Epicyclic speed reducer - LOW - MEDIUM - HIGH mm bar bar Kg Nm 7 129,5 25,2 25,4 3+1 5 16 1986 19463 SAME DEUTZ - FAHR 4 129,5 17,50 17,60 2+1 5 16 1986 19463 1 + (30/66) = 1,4545 1 + (21x18) : (66x27) = 1,2121 1 2 129,5 11,70 12,14 2+1 5 16 1986 19463
SLOW
MEAN
FAST
Fig. 2 - Plate indicating selection of electrohydraulic control.
Fig. 1 - Range selection indicators mounted to the instrument panel.
21
2
27

POWERSHIFT
Fig. 3 - Diagram illustrating operation of the POWERSHIFT system.
Parts in movement
Parts locked to transmission housing
In rotation (idling)
Fig. 4 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with MED range selected.
22

POWERSHIFT
2
27
Parts locked to transmission housing
Parts in movement
Oil circuit for operation of clutches
In rotation (idling)
Fig. 5 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with LOW range selected.
Parts locked to transmission housing Parts locked to epicyclic Oil circuit for operation of clutches In rotation (idling)
Fig. 6 - Diagram showing engagement of POWERSHIFT with HIGH range selected.
23
2
27

POWERSHIFT
POWERSHIFT UNIT DETACH FROM THE GEAR BOX
Fig. 7 - Detach the driving platform (or the cab, if fitted) from the tractor.
Fig. 8 - Detach the front part of the tractor complete with en gine from the gearbox.
Fig. 9 - Detach the front gearbox from the rear gearbox.
Fig. 10 - Remove the upper cover from the front gearbox.
Fig. 11 - Remove the internal clutch control from the front gearbox.
Fig. 12 - Remove the solenoid valve block from the front right-hand side.
24

POWERSHIFT
2
27
Fig. 13 - The POWERSHIFT solenoid valve block is removed by pulling it outwards after having disconnected the pipes and removed the retaining screws.
Fig. 14 - Remove the hydraulic lubrication pipe of the POWERSHIFT unit by first disconnecting the part on the outside of the gearbox.
Fig. 15 - Disconnect the delivery line from the POWERSHIFT unit by unscrewing the union.
Fig. 16 - Using a drift as shown in the figure, drive the POWERSHIFT unit out of the front of the gearbox.
Fig. 17 - Remove the POWERSHIFT unit from the front end of the gearbox.
Fig. 18 - After having removed the POWERSHIFT unit, proceed with its disassembly, if necessary. Then remove the epicyclic reduction unit.
25
2
27

POWERSHIFT
Fig. 19 - Remove the planet carrier flange from the epicyclic reduction unit.
Fig. 20 - Remove the circlip and the thrust washer. On re-assembly, the thrust washer must be fitted with the lubrica tion channels facing inwards towards the planet carrier flange
Fig. 21 - The play adjustment shim for the POWERSHIFT shafts is located between the housing and the epicyclic reduction unit.
Fig. 22 - To dismantle the POWERSHIFT unit, remove the circlip indicated in the figure.
Fig. 23 - Remove the circlip indicated in the figure using a pair of bent nose pliers.
Fig. 24 - Remove the thrust washer.
26

POWERSHIFT
2
27
Fig. 25 - Unscrew the screws securing the LOW clutch hous ing to the POWERSHIFT unit.
Fig. 26 - Remove the retaining screws.
Fig. 27 - It is advisable to mark the relative positions of the parts prior to disassembly.
Fig. 28 - Using a screwdriver, separate the housing from the unit.
Fig. 29 - Remove the LOW clutch disc pack (7+7).
Fig. 30 - Inspect the clutch discs for wear.
27
2
27

POWERSHIFT
Fig. 31 - Remove the circlip securing the hub of the LOW clutch.
Fig. 32 - Remove the hub of the LOW clutch.
Fig. 33 - Remove the circlip located behind the hub of the LOW clutch.
Fig. 34 - Proceed with the disassembly of the housing of the MEDIUM-LOW" clutches.
Fig. 35 - Using a drift, separate the MEDIUM-LOW housing from the rest of the unit.
Fig. 36 - Detach the MEDIUM-LOW housing from the unit.
28

POWERSHIFT
2
27
Fig. 37 - Remove the Belleville springs from the MEDIUM clutch.
Fig. 38 - Remove the discs from the MEDIUM clutch.
Fig. 39 - MEDIUM clutch discs (4 friction discs+3 counterdiscs+2 thrust plates).
Fig. 40 - The control piston of the LOW clutch may be removed from the MEDIUM-LOW bell-housing using a press of the type illustrated below.
Fig. 41 - This piston can be removed by removing the circlip of the piston return spring located on the opposite end of the housing.
Fig. 42 - Remove the LOW clutch shaft.
29
2
27

POWERSHIFT
Fig. 43 - Check that the oil ways in the shaft are not obstructed.
Fig. 44 - The LOW clutch control piston can be removed from the housing using a press of the type illustrated below.
Fig. 45 - This piston can be removed by removing the circlip of the piston return spring located on the opposite end of the housing.
Fig. 46 - Remove the circlip securing the HIGH clutch discs.
Fig. 47 - Remove the thrust washer of the HIGH clutch.
Fig. 48 - Remove the HIGH clutch disc pack (2 friction discs + 2 counterdiscs + 1 thrust plate).
30

POWERSHIFT
2
27
Fig. 49 - HIGH clutch discs.
Fig. 50 - HIGH clutch control piston.
Fig. 51 - Separate the HIGH clutch housing from the MEDIUM clutch housing using a press to compress the springs and remove the circlip.
Fig. 52 - Remove the MEDIUM clutch hub and then the relative housing.
Fig. 53 - VESPEL seals of the HIGH clutch housing.
Fig. 54 - Remove the HIGH clutch housing.
31
2
27

POWERSHIFT
Fig. 55 - Remove the Belleville return springs of the HIGH clutch control piston from the MEDIUM shaft.
Fig. 56 - Examine the condition of the VESPEL seals on the HIGH clutch housing.
Fig. 57 - If necessary, remove the circlip and remove the bearing from the MEDIUM clutch housing.
Fig. 58 - Remove the piston from the MEDIUM clutch hous ing.
Fig. 59 - Examine the condition of the seal ring of the piston from the MEDIUM clutch housing.
Fig. 60 - Proceed to dismantle the LOW clutch control piston with the aid of a press.
32

POWERSHIFT
2
27
Fig. 61 - Remove the circlip securing the springs.
Fig. 62 - Remove the assembly from the press and remove the Belleville springs.
Fig. 63 - Disassembly sequence for the 5 Belleville washers.
Fig. 64 - Remove the piston.
Fig. 65 - Groove for O-ring in the LOW clutch housing.
Fig. 66 - Examine the condition of seal ring of the piston from the LOW clutch housing.
33
2
27

POWERSHIFT
I - Seeger L - Clutch hub M - Thrust plate N - Bearing O - Thrust plate P - MEDIUM clutch control piston Q - HIGH clutch housing R - HIGH clutch control piston S - HIGH clutch T - LOW sun wheel U - Planet carrier V - Thrust washer Z - Ring gear X - Planet gears J - LOW shaft Y - MEDIUM shaft W - Secondary shaft K - Reduction unit shaft
A - Cover B - LOW clutch C - LOW clutch control piston D - Clutch housing MEDIUM - LOW E - LOW clutch belleville springs F - MEDIUM clutch belleville springs G - Actuator disc H - MEDIUM clutch
Fig. 67 - POWERSHIFT unit
34

POWERSHIFT
Assembly of POWERSHIFT unit
2
27
Fig. 68 - Components of POWERSHIFT unit
The POWERSHIFT unit requires that the basic gearbox, with respect top the standard version, is equipped with a secondary shaft A and a range input shaft B, of specific type. Warning: no special tools are required to re-assemble this unit, just an M8x1.25x30 screw to hold the central shaft C in position during POWERSHIFT play adjustment. Assemble the unit as follows: Fit the input ring gear D to the secondary shaft, securing it with circlip E ; Separately assemble LOW gear F with the planet carrier flange G . When fitting gear F, the planets must be positio ned so that their punch marks are aligned with the position reference marks on the carrier flange, (Fig. 69).
Timing reference countermark
Fig. 69 - Timing the epicyclic speed reducer of the POWERSHIFT unit.
35
2
27

POWERSHIFT
Timing marks on gear teeth of the epicyclic reduction of the POWERSHIFT unit.
Fig. 70 - Pre-assembly of parts on MEDIUM shaft.
Fig. Pre-assembly of MEDIUM-LOW clutches.
36

POWERSHIFT
RE-ASSEMBLY OF THE POWERSHIFT UNIT.
2
27
Fig. 72 - Assemble the HIGH clutch. Fit the bearing with the relative snap rings in the MEDIUM clutch housing; fit the hub securing it with the relative circlip and fit the three service circlips to the housing. Fit the O-ring seals to the piston , then fit the piston.
Fig. 73 - Fit the LOW shaft, the relative roller bearings, and position the snap ring.
Fig. 74 - Fit the MEDIUM clutch discs.
Fig. 75 - Apply Loctite 510 sealing compound to the housing contact surfaces as shown in the figure. WARNING: when applying sealing compound take care not to obstruct the oil ways.
Fig. 76 - Fit the circlip and check that the shaft has certain amount of play.
Fig. 77 - Fit the MEDIUM clutch thrust washer with outlets oriented towards the circlip.
37
2
27

POWERSHIFT
Fig. 78 - Join the two housings together; the studs will locate in the 3 holes to ensure the correct relative positions of the two housings. Rotate the shaft during this operation so as to centre the clutch discs.
Fig. 79 - Note that a small space will be left between the two housings; this is to allow preloading of the Belleville springs when the screws are tightened.
Fig. 80 - Fit the LOW clutch, first positioning the circlip on the shaft as indicated in the figure.
Fig. 81 - Then fit the clutch hub and position the second circlip.
Fig. 82 - Then install the discs of the LOW clutch.
Fig. 83 - The disc pack is completed with a final friction disc, the tabs of which do not engage the splines on the hub, and therefore, when refitting the cover, it is advisable not to rotate the shaft so as to allow the disc tabs to mesh correctly with the hub.
38

POWERSHIFT
ADJUSTMENT OF END FLOAT IN THE POWERSHIFT UNIT (fig. 84)
2
27
Screw one M8x1,25x30 bolt finger tight into the cover W (fig 84), so as to hold the centre shaft of the H-M-L unit in position during the adjustment. Measure dimensions X and Y with a gauge then calculate (X - Y - 1 mm) , which gives the thickness of the thrust washer K to fit. Example: values measured X = 191,88 Y = 188,24
(191,88 - 188,24 - 1) = 2,64 ~ 2,6 mm (2.1599.727.0/10 washer required) IMPORTANT: the thrust washer must be selected from those available to give either the exact thickness, or the next thickness down from the value calculated. washer p/n: 2.1599.725.0/10 thicknesst 2.2 mm 2.1599.726.0/10 thicknesst 2.4 mm 2.1599.727.0/10 thicknesst 2.6 mm 2.1599.728.0/10 thicknesst 2.8 mm 2.1599.729.0/10 thicknesst 3 mm 2.1599.730.0/10 thicknesst 3.2 mm 2.1599.731.0/10 thicknesst 3.4 mm 2.1599.732.0/10 thicknesst 3.6 mm 2.1599.733.0/10 thicknesst 3.8 mm 2.1599.734.0/10 thicknesst 4 mm Fit a shim of the predetermined thickness on the LOW shaft with the relative circlip Fit the epicyclic reduction unit in the gearbox and then fit the POWERSHIFT clutches unit, applying Silastic sealing compound to the contact surfaces.
Fig. 84 - Location of the preassembled POWERSHIFT unit in its housing.
39
2
27

POWERSHIFT
A - pressure regulator valve (operating pressure 16 bar) B - gearbox lubrication oil pressure setting valve (setting 5 bar) C - anticavitation valve for safety steering (30 l/min.) D - oil pump (capacity 10 to 27 l/min.) E - suction filter (25 micron)
Fig. 85 - Hydraulic diagram illustrating operation.
F - solenoid control valves G - electro-hydraulic control unit H - anticavitation valve for safety steering I - bistable valve L - safety steering valve M1 - pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar M2 - pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar M3 - pressure gauge with scale 0 - 10 bar T - lubrication
40

POWERSHIFT
1
27
Fig. 86 - Electrohydraulic control unit for POWERSHIFT system.
PROCEDURE FOR CHECKING THE H-M-L CONTROL UNIT INLET PRESSURE
Referring to Fig. 86: 1 - Connect pressure gauge 5.9030.514.0 (0 40 bar) at position M1. 2 - Connect pressure gauge 5.9030.515.0 (0 10 bar) at position M2. Start the engine and throttle up to the revolutions indicated in the table; now verify that the inlet pressures are as prescribed. NB: Pressure tests should be conducted using oil at a temperature of 80 C.
A - Test fitting for testing pressure of LOW clutch hydraulic circuit B - Bistable valve C - Valve body D - Non-return valve E - Non-return valve F - Oil pressure regulator valve G - Lubrication pressure control valve H - Delivery line to P.T.O. I - Delivery line to differential lock L - P.T.O. lubrication pipe M - P.T.O. disk lubrification manifold N - Manifold for P.T.O. clutch oil pipe O - Secondary shaft and POWERSHIFT lubrification pipe P - Pipe from radiator oil to the gearbox Q - Delivery line to front-wheel drive engagement piston M1 - Pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar M2 - Pressure gauge for P.T.O. lubrication pipe M3 - Pressure gauge with scale 0 - 40 bar for pressure at P.T.O. 41
2
27

POWERSHIFT
A - Gearbox lubrication oil pressure control valve (5 bar) B - Non-return valve 30 l/min C - Sequence valve (operating pressure 16 bar) D - Non-return valve T - Return L1- P.T.O. clutch line L2- Secondary shaft and POWERSHIFT lubrication
Fig. 87 - POWERSHIFT pressure control valves assembly
42

POWERSHIFT
2
27
Fig. 88 - Hydraulic control circuit.
43

replace the defective parts
check the clutch assembly hydraulic system
clutch slips
check piston free stroke for
examine piston and manifold seal rings remove any roughness preventing piston from sliding freely replace the clutch disks
replace defective parts
check the clutch plates for wear
inspect the control mechanism
replace parts
defective
replace the disks inspect the disks burnt disks jammed disks
clutch wont disengage
remove any roug hness preventing disks from sliding freely
piston jammed in seat
relpace the piston
44
Transmission
Gearbox
General specifications
The basic transmission utilizes 5 speed synchromesh gearbox with 2 or 3 speed ranges. A shuttle, fitted as standard, makes the tractor easy to handle and manoeuvre. Options include Creeper, and Underdrive (in place of or in addition), giving a total of: For tractors equipped with platform or cab 20 FWD + 10 REV: 5 gears x 2 ranges (L-V) + mini-reduction + reverser shuttle 30 FWD + 15 REV: 5 gears x 3 ranges (SR-L-V) + mini-reduction + reverser shuttle. 45 FWD + 45 REV: 5 gears x 3 ranges (SR-L-V) + reverser shuttle + POWERSHIFT Each version is also available with 30 or 40 km/h top speed.
3
31
Technical specifications
number of speeds gearbox ratios 1st gear 2nd gear 3rd gear 4th gear 5th gear forward reverse low high 30 km/h 40 km/h 20 AV + 10 RM 19/59 = 1/3,1053 23/50 = 1/2,1739 29/44 = 1/1,5172 35/38 = 1/1,0857 41/32 = 1/0,7805 29/37 = 1/0,7838 23/19 = 1/0,8261 (19/50)x(22/46)= 1/5,5024 1 8/39 = 1/4,8750 9/33 = 1/3,6667 (12/12+69) = 1/6,7500 30 km/h 40 kmIh mm 1/32,9063 1/24,7502 0,18 - 0,24 32/34 = 1/0,9412 (19/50)x(22/46)x(19/50)x(20/48) = 1/34,7520 mm mm rmm 0,09 0,15 0,30 2,5 0,1
shuttle range ratios rear axle ratios bevel gear pair epicyclic final drive overall ratio backlash between crownwheel and pinion teeth Mini-reduction Super-reduction axial play of the secondary shaft axial play of the gears of the change, of the reverser and mini-reduction reference distance for adjustment of bevel gear pai
45
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Speed change configurations Powershift control Gearshifting Control Synchrosplit control Speed range Control
NO. OF SPEED (forward + reverse)
20 + 10
30 +15
45 + 45
DURING TRANSPORT OPERATIONS ON PUBLIC ROADS BOTH BRAKE PEDALS MUST BE OBLIGATORILY COUPLED BY MEANS OF THE SPECIAL LOCKING LATCH. IN ANY CASE, ALWAYS OBSERVE LAWS AND REGULATIONS IN FORCE.
46
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
* see technical characteristics of gearbox on p. 45 ** see technical characteristics of 4wd front axle on p. 115
Fig. 2 - Ratios of 5-speed x 2 range transmission with mini-reduction (20 FWD + 10 REV).
47
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Ratios of 5-speed x 2 range transmission with mini-reduction and super-reduction (30 FWD + 15 REV).
48
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Fig. 3 - Ratios of transmission with 3 ranges (Super-reduction) + POWERSHIFT (45 FWD + 45 REV).
49
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Assemble the front and rear gearboxes and the rear hydraulic lift, after having applied PIANERMETIC 510 to surfaces A and LOCTITE 636 to bushes B.
Fig. 4 - Front and rear gearbox.
50
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Fig. 5 - Longitudinal section through transmission.
51
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fig. 6 - Longitudinal section through transmission with POWERSHIFT unit.
52
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Fig. 7 - Rear axle longitudinal section.
53
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fig. 8 - Inversor lever ( A -Side view and B -Front view) - C - Range reduction lever. X - Version with Mini-reduction Y - Version without Mini-reduction
54
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Fig. 9 - Gear lever.
Fig. 10 - Front view of gearbox with FULLDRIVE.
55
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fig. 11- Views of the gearbox.
56
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Asse ruota
97080.2
127
+0.2
M16x1.5
0.25-0.75
1.5
0.4
70.7
0.1
Fig. 12 - Electro - hydraulic control for front-wheel drive engagement/disengagement.
3.2
57
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fig. 13 - Gear selector rod. A - bolts securing hubs to rod.
Fig. 14 - Gear selector rod. B - C - bolts securing hubs to rod.
58
Transmission
Gearbox
Range selector rods and forks
3
31
Correct positioning of the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers. Fit the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers so that the grooves are oriented as shown in the figure.
Fig. 15 - Range selector rod. D - bolt securing hub to rod.
Fig. 16 - Correct positioning of the gearbox, shuttle and range control levers.
59
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Disconnect the bracket located in the central part of the cable/pipe duct positioned above the engine, and disconnect the oil delivery line to the oil cooler from the hydrostatic steering control valve (this pipe is to be disconnected at its middle part). Disconnect the front hydraulic lift delivery line from the cock located at the rear of the tractor above the lift. Position tool 5.9030.002.0 (mobile stands on tracks) to support the front and rear gearboxes, then remove all the screws connecting the two gearboxes together.
REMOVAL AND REFITTING OPERATIONS
Removal of the front gearbox without removing the platform
Place wedges under the front axle support and remove the rear wheels; Disconnect the 3 pipes (supply, return and breather) and disconnect the electrical lead of the fuel level sensor; Loosen the screws securing the fuel tank supports and remove the tank. Disconnect the rear brake pipes which pass over the two gearboxes, collecting the oil in a suitable container (all the oil in the brake oil reservoir will drain out). Remove the two screws securing the platform to the front silent-blocks, and raise the front of the platform a few centimetres using a hoist or a support with adjustment screw; this operation is necessary in order to access and loosen the two upper gearbox retaining screws. Remove the guard from the front-wheel drive transmission shaft, then release the sleeve coupling the transmission shaft to the gearbox, by removing the snap ring securing the lock pin and then removing the pin. Slide the sleeve towards the front of the tractor in order to disengage the transmission shaft from the gearbox output shaft. Using a pair of long-nose pliers, remove the circlip from the gearbox output shaft, thereby allowing the shaft to be withdrawn from the front gearbox. Disconnect the oil delivery and return lines from the oil cooler located under the platform and to the right of the rear gear box (relative to the driving position). The return line is connected to the POWERSHIFT solenoid control valves as the oil returning from the cooler in the front engine compartment supplies the electro-hydraulic POWERSHIFT control circuit. Disconnect the oil line between the POWERSHIFT control unit and the electro-hydraulic services control valve group, then remove the POWERSHIFTsolenoid control valve block, after having disconnected the electrical leads from the solenoid valves. Disconnect the lubrication line from the solenoid valve block for electro-hydraulic controls to the gearbox. Remove the tool box positioned on the right-hand side of the tractor under the driving platform. Unscrew the oil drain plug located under the rear gearbox (a container of at least 33 litres will be required to collect the oil). Disconnect all electrical leads from the starter motor and the lead connected to the engine oil pressure switch. Unplug the bulkhead connector for the wires to the group of dashboard warning lights. Detach the retaining strap of the brake/clutch oil reservoir, disconnect the level sensor lead and remove the reservoir (the reservoir will remain connected to its delivery lines). Detach the throttle and engine stop Bowden control cables from the governor. Disconnect the two oil delivery-return lines from the hydrostatic steering cylinder in the area above the engine and near the dashboard.
Put the gear lever in neutral and loosen the two screws securing the relay hub complete with the lower rod which enters the gearbox and then remove the hub. Put the inversor control lever in neutral and loosen the screw securing the lever in the control rod housing; remove the two relay hub retaining screws and remove the hub itself. Loosen the hex socket screw (or the two hex socket screws if the tractor is fitted with a minireduction unit) securing the gear control rod (see fig. 28 page 62). Holding the rear gearbox in position, move the front wheels to separate the two gearboxes (time required 3,5 to 4 hours)
WARNING: under no circumstances undo union B Fig 19 (hex head), located on the left-hand side of the gearbox. This union holds the oil manifold D Fig. 19 for engagement of the front-wheel drive transmission shaft. If this union is removed, the manifold would rotate downwards, thereby making it necessary to dismantle the gear hub in order to reposition it and refit the union. The delivery pipe C Fig. 19 of the front-wheel drive engagement actuator is connected at the opposite end, inside the gearbox, to the group of solenoid control valves for the hydraulic services E Fig. 19; if this group is to be removed, undo union A Fig. 19, to prevent deformation of the internal pipe.
Fig. 17 - Gearbox removal.
60
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Fig. 18 - Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox
Separating the front gearbox from the engine

(this operation is necessary in order to access the POWERSHIFT unit) Remove the engine pick-up from the top of the gearbox (in the area of the spacer housing). Place wedges under the front axle support. Disconnect the fuel delivery pipe in the area between the front gearbox and the engine. Disconnect the two front brake pipes and the differential lock control pipe. Support the front gearbox on a stand. Remove the 10 screws securing the front gearbox to the engine flange, then detach the gearbox.
61
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Dismantling the gearbox.

Remove the 8 screws securing the top cover and then remove the cover itself. Remove the gearbox clutch control located in the spacer housing as follows: Remove the thrust bearing. Remove the lock pin and withdraw the control lever. Undo the union and remove the oil delivery pipe to the POWERSHIFT unit. Unscrew the 2 screws and the 2 nuts securing the POWERSHIFT unit; Remove the 2 retaining screws of the POWERSHIFT control valve unit, (one of these screws also secures the fuel prefilter with the relative pipe). NOTE: one of the screws has an extension with a small plate to support the clutch control lever; these parts are to be re moved together with the screw.
Removal of the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts

Remove the circlip attaching the gearbox input shaft to the inversor shaft coupling sleeve. Withdraw the 2 shafts from the front of the spacer housing (the shafts should be withdrawn together to prevent damage to the seal ring positioned between them). NOTE: To replace the seal on the gearbox input shaft, it will be necessary to remove the cab or platform to gain access to the upper cover of the gearbox, from which the seal housing may be accessed.
Separating the POWERSHIFT unit from the gearbox
Using a copper drift, tap the housing of the POWERSHIFT unit in order to extract from the front part of the spacer housing; (if the purpose of this operation is solely to inspect or replace the hydraulic clutches, it will not be necessary to remove the epicyclic reduction unit from the gearbox or to remove the cab/platform). If instead the epicyclic reduction unit is to be removed, simply withdraw it from the front of the gearbox, then remove the calibrated thrust washer and the circlip, and then remove the housing complete with the ring gear. The POWERSHIFT clutch units are to dismantled on the bench.
NOTE: for instructions on dismantling the POWERSHIFT unit, see page 24.
62
Transmission
Gearbox
Removal of the gear train positioned in the front gearbox
3
31
WARNING: On tractors equipped with POWERSHIFT, first follow the instructions to remove the POWERSHIFT unit and the gearbox input and P.T.O. shafts. For the following operations the driving platform or cab must be removed in order to gain access to the upper gearbox cover.
Before proceeding with the removal of the gear train, it is necessary to remove the selector rods and forks. These operations are only possible after having separated the rear gearbox from the front; before separating the two gearboxes, remove D fig. 5 on page 51. Detach the front gearbox from the rear gearbox. To do this, it will be necessary to remove the 5 speed relay hub together with the intermediate support, located on the right-hand side of the rear gearbox. Remove screw A (fig. 14) screws B (fig. 15) and screw D (fig. 16).
NB: Remove the selector rod detent balls and springs by unscrewing the relative plugs located on the right-hand side of the gearbox. Then proceed with the separation of the two gearboxes. The 3 gearbox shafts (inversor, primary and secondary) and the gear selector and inversor control rods and forks will remain attached to the front gearbox. To remove these rods, it will first be necessary to remove the 3 shafts by removing the 3 circlips A - B - C fig. 5 on page 51 and then moving all 3 shafts simultaneously backwards to disengage them from their housings; the first shaft to be detached will be the primary shaft, followed by the secondary, and then the input shaft located at the uppermost part of the gearbox is to be withdrawn. Each selector rod will come away together with its shaft.
E
M16x1.5
Fig. 19 - Oil pipe from the solenoid control valve to the hydraulic actuator responsible for engaging/disengaging front-wheel drive. A Pipe union on solenoid valve end B Pipe union on actuator ende C Connection pipe. D Manifold E Solenoid valve assembly
63
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fig. 20 - Retaining screws of the gear rods to be removed prior to detaching the front gearbox from the rear gearbox. A retaining screw of the inversor control rod hub B retaining screws of the gear control rod hubs.
C Range gear control rod. D Gearchange control rod. E Inversor/minireduction control rod.
Disassembly of the inversor control rods and forks

Disengage the fork from the sleeve and rotate it so that the hole in the fork is aligned with the retaining pin; then, using a drift as shown in figure 23, tap the pin out of the hole. On tractor equipped with a minireduction unit, repeat the above operations to remove the second selector fork.
Fig. 21 - Components of inversor rod and fork assemblye for gearbox with minireduction.
Fig. 22 - Rod and fork for gearbox without minireduction.
Fig. 23 - Removal of the fork retaining pin.
Fig. 24 - Removal of fork from control rod.
64
Transmission
Gearbox
Dismantling of the gearchange rod and fork assembly.
3
31
Fig. 25 - Detach the rod with forks from the secondary shaft by moving it laterally
Fig. 26 - Remove the screw securing the rod hub and remove the hub from the rod.
Fig. 27 - Disengage the 1st gear selector fork from the sleeve and rotate it to align the hole on the fork with the retaining pin. Then, using a suitable drift, drive the pin out of the hole. Detach the 2nd and 3rd gear selector forks and sleeves in the same way.
Fig. 28 - Withdraw the gearchange control rod.
Fig. 29 - Remove the sleeve located on the rod between selector fork.
Fig. 30 - Rotate the 4th and 5th gear the two forks. so that the hole on the fork is aligned with the retaining pin, then using a drift and a hammer as shown in figure 23, drive the pin out of the hole (the figure shows the components of the selector rods and forks assembly).
65
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Dismantling of the gearchange selector rods and forks assembly
Fig. 31 - Unscrew the 6 retaining screws and remove the cover giving access to the gearchange selector rods and forks assembly. Then using a spanner, unscrew the guide bolt of the super-reduction control fork.
Fig. 32 - Unscrew the guide screw of the central sleeve lo cated between the 2 forks. (NB. Loctite has been applied to these screws; we recommend that they are heated using an oxyacetylene torch to facilitate removal).
Fig. 33 - Unscrew the guide screw of the L-V selector fork.
Fig. 34 - Access the front compartment of the gearbox extract the rod by pulling the hub.
Fig. 35 - Remove all the parts mounted on the rod, recovering them from the lateral access hole.
Fig. 36 - Parts comprising the selector rod and forks them from the lateral access hole assembly for the super-reduction unit and range gears.
66
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Removal of the shaft with the actuator for engagement/disengagement of the front-wheel drive Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox, (it is first necessary to remove circlip ( A fig 37). Unscrew union B ( fig 19 page 63) located on the left-hand side of the rear gearbox and remove the front shaft complete with the front-wheel drive actuator. IMPORTANT: Only unscrew union B fig. (19 page 63) located on the left-hand side of the rear gearbox when the two gearboxes are separated, as refitting is only possible in this condition. Disassemble the unit, removing the circlip securing the oil manifold and the circlip securing the thrust plate of the helical spring; then disassemble the unit into its component parts, inspecting for wear the two oil seals (on the shaft and in con tact with the control piston) and the areas in contact with the oil manifold. WARNING: the valve located inside the shaft must be positioned as shown on page 75.
A
Fig. 37 - Front-wheel drive output.
DE F
CB
Removal of the range gear shaft Separate the rear gearbox from the front gearbox, (it is first necessary to remove circlip A fig. 37) remove the right rear wheel support and the cover on which the electro-hydraulic control valves are mounted, detach the oil pipe for 4WD disengagement by undoing union B (fig. 19 on page 65) located on the solenoid valve mounting on the right-hand side of the gearbox. Remove the cover supporting the internal parking brake control. Then remove the synchronised P.T.O. shaft by removing the retaining flange mounted on the rear of the gearbox and remove the synchronised P.T.O. engagement sleeve mounted on the 4WD shaft, which can be accessed through the space left void by removal of the wheel support. Remove circlip B fig. 37 and thrust plate C fig. 37, which can be accessed through the space created by removal of the wheel support. Working through the aperture created by removal of the cover on which the electro-hydraulic control valves are moun ted, remove circlips D - E - F - G fig. 37 and pull shaft towards the front of the gearbox.
67
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Examining parts removed Gearbox case
Gearbox case should show no cracks, bearing seats must not be worn or damaged. If seriuos damage or excessive wear is occured replace the parts concerned. Whenever the gearbox is disassembled clean all sealing surfaces removing old adhesive and applying some new on all surfaces evenly when reassembling.
Fig. 38 - Equipment 5.9030.002.0 for the dismantling the gearbox.
Shafts
Examine shafts for excessive wear and shaft splines for pitting, these should allow the gears to slide freely.
Gears
Examine gear teeth for wear or damage and make sure these work on the whole contact surface. Check also the gear-mounted bushings for seizing: if so replace them.
Synchronizers
Fig. 39 - Visual control of the tooth of the gears.
Check the ring inside tapered portion for excessive wear or dama ge and be sure the gear part being frictioned by the synchronizer does not show signs of scoring which may prevent the gear from meshing correctly. To check the synchronizer ring for wear, measure the distance + 0, 3 from the friction cone; reading should be 125 , - 0,15 mm with a new synchronizer or drop to zero when the ring is maximally worn.
Bearings
Bearings should be in perfect conditions without showing excessive radial or end play. Holding the bearings pressed by hand and making them simultaneously turn in both directions of rotation a free sliding as well as no roughness at all should be felt. Examine the taper roller bearings for proper working conditions, these should be neither worn nor overheated, replace as soon as poor working efficiency is suspected, as an abnormal bearing operation may result in either gear tooth seizure or noisy gearbox. Warning: oil leakages from the clutch-disk-to-gearbox shaft or the engine-flywheel-to-P.T.O.-clutch shaft may be stopped when the assembly procedure is performed with the utmost care and operating in such a way that the splined parts are prevented from damaging the O-ring and also providing a thorough cleaning of the parts prior to being installed.
Fig. 41 - Checking slide of the bearing.
Fig. 40 - Unit synchronizer.
68
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
ADJUSTING PLAY OF THE GEARBOX SHAFTS BY MEANS OF THE THRUST PLATES ON THE MINI/INVERSOR SHAFT AND THE SECONDARY SHAFT
MINI/INVERSOR SHAFTS
Circlip position for measurement of distance X
Adjusting the play of the minireduction gear mounted on the inversor shaft. Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of minireduction gear (z=35) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate thickness from among those available: cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured by pushing the spacer B in the direction indicated by the arrow up to the point where the synchroniser is pushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the forward speed gear (z=37) in the direction indicated by the arrow up against circlip A.
Adjusting the play of the forward speed gear on the inversor shaft (version with minireduction). Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the forward speed gear (z=35) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate thickness from among those available: cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured by pushing the gear (z=23) in the direction indicated by the arrow so that the synchroniser is pushed up against point Y , while simultaneously pushing the minireduction gear (z=35) in the direction indicated by the arrow up against circlip A.
69
3
31
REVERSE SHAFT
Transmission
Gearbox
Adjusting the play of the reverse gearwheel mounted on the shuttle shaft. Obtain play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of reverse gearwheel (z = 23) by selecting and fitting a thrust washer R of suitable thickness from those available: cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0
Play X is measured by pushing the forward gearwheel (z=37) in the direction indicated by the arrow, thereby pushing the synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.
SECONDARY SHAFT 1st SPEED
Adjusting the play of the 1st speed gear (z=59) . Obtain an play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 1st speed gear (z=59) by selecting the thrust plate R of the appropriate thickness from among those available: cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured with a feeler gauge while pushing spacer B in the direction indicated by the arrow so that the synchroniser is pushed up against point Y, while simultaneously pushing the 2nd speed gear (z=50) in the direction indicated by the arrow up against circlip A. 70
Transmission
Gearbox
SECONDARY SHAFT 2nd/3th SPEED
3
31
Circlip position for measurement of distance X Adjusting play of 2nd speed gear cluster Obtain play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 2nd speed gear cluster by selecting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thickness from among those available: cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0
Play X is to be measured using a feeler gauge while pushing the 3rd speed gear in the direction of the arrow, thereby pushing the synchronizer up against point Y and pushing the circlip A as indicated in the detail.
Circlip position for measurement of distance X Adjusting play of 3rd speed gear Obtain a play X of 0.15 0.30 mm of the 3rd speed gear by selecting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thickness from among those available: cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0
71
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
SECONDARY SHAFT 4th/5th SPEED
Circlip position for measurement of distance "X" Adjusting the play of the 4th speed gear cluster. Obtain a play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of the 4th speed gear cluster by selecting and fitting a thrust washer R of the appropriate thickness from those available: cod. 008.0251.0 010.0629.0 010.0630.0 010.0631.0 010.0632.0
SECONDARY SHAFT
INPUT SHAFT AND INVERSOR SHAFT
Shimming the front bearing of the secondary shaft Fit shims of appropriate thickness to reduce end-float between the shaft and the bearing to the minimum possible amount. By fitting the correct shims you can obtain a maximum play of 0.09 mm.
Fitting the bush joining the input shaft to the inversor shaft Fit bush A oriented as shown in the figure to facilitate subsequent removal.
72
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Fitting the spacer determining the stroke of the valve for hydraulic disengagement of front-wheel drive. To allow correct disengagement of the front-wheel drive, bush A must be installed as shown in the figure above.
WARNINGS RELATED TO ASSEMBLY OF THE GEARS OF THE P.T.O. UNIT, THE RANGE REDUCTION UNIT AND THE SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. SHAFT Assembly of the P.T.O.
Install: The synchronised P.T.O. output shaft (to be installed after the range reduction unit); The P.T.O. output shaft and relative gears; The rear P.T.O. Shaft.
Installation of the range reduction unit, the gear for the front-wheel drive shaft and the parking brake discs
Position on the bottom of the gearbox the L-V range reduction unit (complete with bushes and roller cage) and the super-reduction gear (complete with roller cage). Slide the shaft, complete with circlip, through the front end of the gearbox, and fit the previously positioned gears onto the shaft. Fit the thrust washer and 2 circlips. Position the drive gear of the front-wheel drive complete with parking brake discs. Fit the ball bearing for the rear end of the shaft, inserting it in its housing in the gearbox. Insert the thrust washer and position the circlip. Position the bearing and the bearing circlip in the housing; Fit the thrust washer and the circlip; Install the synchronised P.T.O. shaft in the rear end of the gearbox, and fit the control sleeve to the shaft. Fit the bevel pinion and the gears of the range reduction unit with the relative synchroniser; Fit the differential housing complete with the crown wheel and the internal differential lock control. Warnings: The spacer installed on the rear output shaft is fitted with an O-ring on the outer surface and an internal oil seal. To remove this spacer requires the use of a puller to be attached to the spacer using the two holes provided. At each dismantling of the pins of the brake and clutch control levers, check the bushes for wear.
73
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fig. 42 - Range gearbox
Fig. 43 - Removal of the groundspeed P.T.O. sleeve.
Fig. 44 - Removal of the circlip securing the shaft.
Fig. 45 - Gears on range gearbox shaft.
Fig. 46 - Checking the oil seals on the 4WD shaft.
74
Transmission
Gearbox
3
31
Fig. 47 - Range gearbox synchronizer. Range gearbox synchronizer. Warning: the synchronizer hub must installed so that the indicated by the arrow is positioned as shown in the figure.
Fig. 48 - Secondary shaft cover plate Fitting the secondary shaft cover plate. Fit the cover A applying LOCTITE 601 around the hole of the front gearbox casing indicated X in the figure. B - secondary shaft
Fig. 49 - Fitting the transmission speed sensor pickup.
75
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fitting the baulk ring of the synchronizer for the 1 speed gear mounted on the secondary shaft. Should it be necessary to restore the correct play X of 0.15 to 0.30 mm of the 1 speed gear (z=59), it is possible to select a synchroniser baulk ring of suitable thickness from the two available, as shown in the figure.
st st
Fig. 50 - it the 50x90x20 ball bearing, indicated A in the figure, without the retaining ring.
Fig. 51 - Bearing for 4WD shaft.
Fig. 52 - Position the groundspeed P.T.O. cover plate as indicated in the figure.
76
Transmission
Gearbox
Points where sealant is to be used
3
31
Fig. 53 - Rear gearbox. Apply LOCTITE n 601 to the base of studs A (n 9) - B (n 1) - C (n 1), as shown in the figure, prior to assembly.
Fig. 54 - Fitting the wheel support. Apply PIANERMETIC 510 sealant to the surfaces indicated with the letter L in the figure; apply SILASTIK sealant to the surfaces indicated with the letter S.
77
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
11"
12"
Fig. 55 - Correct installation of the support tube for the clutch control sleeve. Position the gearbox vertically with side A facing upwards. Apply Loctite 601 to the seat of the tube and fit the tube. Wait about 1 hour before returning the gearbox to the horizontal position.
Tightening torques
Degrease and clean all bolts/screws before tightening. crown wheel retaining bolts differential flange retaining bolts bolts securing differential cage to half-shafts rear carrier retaining nuts (on assembly apply PIANERMETIC 510 sealant to threads) P.T.O. shaft retaining nut gearbox-engine flange bolts bevel gear retaining nut nuts securing gearbox to intermediate transmission casing hex socket screws for reduction unit ring gear (on assembly apply LOCTITE 242 to screws) Kgm 78 6 6 9,2 10,3 10 12 9 12 28 30 10 12 78 Nm 68 78 58 58 90 100 98 115 88 107 274 294 98 107 68 78
78
Transmission
Gearbox IMPORTANT INSTRUCTIONS
3
31
Fig. 56 - Positioning of the 4WD shaft complete with engage ment/disengagement system. After positioning the shaft, connect the oil manifold to solenoid control valve (located on the mounting on the right-hand side of the gearbox) using the specially shaped pipe.
Fig. 57 - After positioning the pipe, connect the oil manifold by inserting union A from the left-hand side of the gearbox. The PICK-UP speed sensor must be installed in hole B indicated by the arrow (see instructions on page 77).
Fig. 58 - The pipe connecting the hydraulic control of the front-wheel drive must be connected to the solenoid valve block at the external fitting indicated by the small arrow.
Fig. 59 - The POWERSHIFT unit is to be installed in the gearbox and the shaft end-float adjusted with the shaft engaged with the epicyclic reduction unit.
Fig. 60 - End-float is to be adjusted by fitting a shim of appro priate thickness following the instructions given on page 35.
Fig. 61 - Checking shim thickness using a micrometer.
79
3
31
Transmission
Gearbox
Fig. 62 - Fitting the shim to adjust end-float of the POWERSHIFT shaft.
Fig. 63 - Positioning the epicyclic reduction unit of the POWERSHIFT in the front gearbox.
Fig. 64 - Fitting the epicyclic reduction unit inside the housing previously attached to the gearbox output shaft.
Fig. 65 - POWERSHIFT unit installed in the gearbox.
Fig. 66 - Oil seal on shaft between clutch and gearbox. This seal can be renewed by accessing the inside of the front gearbox.
Fig. 67 - Positioning the P.T.O. clutch unit inside the ge arbox.
80
Transmission
Differential gear
Bevel drive adjustment (see figs. 1 and 3)
3
35
Install the pinion in the gearbox together with the bearings pack A (without interposing shims); position gear B and tighten ring nut to a torque of: 28 30 Kgm (275 294 Nm). Fit the differential housing without the crown wheel; shim up the tapered bearings D and E so that they rotate freely in the housings yet a slight preloading can be felt; then add a 0,1 mm. shim to the pack in order to preload the bearings. Adjust the distance F between the differential housing and the head of the pinion, interposing shims in the position G indicated in figure 1; the exact measurement for this adjustment is obtained by adding or subtracting the value stamped on one of the pinion teeth to/from the base value of 2.5 mm. Secure the bearings pack by inserting a circlip (select one from those supplied in thicknesses of 2.8 3.6 mm. (see figure 1) which fits perfectly in the seating preventing any bearing play. nstall the crown wheel in the differential housing and, with a dial gauge, measure the crown wheel/pinion backlash; the correct value range is 0,17 0,23 mm for tractor in the version 30 Km/h and 0,20 0,27 mm for tractor in the version 40 Km/h (see figure 4 on page 82). If the measured backlash does not come within this range, remove shims from pack D and add them to pack E , to move the crown wheel nearer to the pinion, or vice versa to move it further away. NB.: On completion of the bevel drive adjustment operations, loosen off the ring nut, apply Loctite 270, then tighten to a torque of 28 30 Kgm (275 294 Nm) and then stake the pinion retaining nut. Tighten the crown wheel retaining screws to a torque of 7 8 kgm (68 78Nm).
Fig. 2 - Value stamped on a tooth of the pinion.
C - SNAP RING 2.1419.056.0/10 2.1419.057.0/10 2.1419.058.0/10 2.1419.059.0/10 2.1419.060.0/10 2.1419.061.0/10 2.1419.062.0/10 2.1419.063.0/10 2.1419.064.0/10
99x2,8 99x2,9 99x3,0 99x3,1 99x3,2 99x3,3 99x3,4 99x3,5 99x3,6
Fig. 1 - Shimming the bevel pinion.
Fig. 3 - Shimming the crown wheel.
81
3
35
Transmission
Differential gear
Fig. 4 - Checking the backlash between the crown wheel and pinion.
Servicing operations
Installation of the bevel drive without renewing any parts. New adjustment is not required; make sure that the same shims packs are refitted in the same places, and check that the distance between the head of the pinion and the differential housing is as prescribed. Renewal of crown wheel bearings Shim the bearings to obtain a preloading of 0,1 mm; then adjust backlash between the crown wheel and pinion. Renewal of pinion bearings The bevel drive will require adjustment. Installing the rear differential lock The rear differential lock system does not require any adjustment.
Fig. 5 - Parts comprising the differential unit.
Fig. 6 - Rear differential lock control.
82
Transmission
Power take-off
Rear power take-off
Rear P.T.O. gears
3
36
The rear P.T.O. shaft, directly coupled to the engine, is equipped with a selector allowing selection of P.T.O. speeds of 540/1000 rpm or, on request, 540-750-1000 rpm. The selector is of the sliding sleeve type. The selector is mechanically controlled and can only be operated when the moving parts are stationary. The P.T.O. output shaft rotates in a counter-clockwise direction, as viewed from the rear of the tractor. Fitting the rear P.T.O. output shaft Before installing the studs, remove any oil/grease from the threads, then apply LOCTITE 242". Technical characteristics P.T.O. speeds 540 r.p.m. 540 r.p.m. 750 r.p.m. 750 r.p.m. 1000 r.p.m. AGROPLUS 60 AGROPLUS 70 - 80 AGROPLUS 60 AGROPLUS 70 - 80 AGROPLUS 60 - 70 - 80
P.T.O. r.p.m. power take-off engine r.p.m. at max horsepower speed for 60 HP 540 r.p.m. (2045 engine r.p.m.) P.T.O. r.p.m engine r.p.m. at fas idling speed engine r.p.m. at fas idling speed engine r.p.m. P.T.O. r.p.m.
14/53 13/50 16/50 15/46 20/46
= = = = =
1/3,7857 1/3,8462 1/3,1250 1/3,0660 1/2,3000
P.T.O. r.p.m.
620/2350
3,7857
(657/2490) (665/2520)
(171/650) (184/700)
for 70 - 80 540 r.p.m. (2077 engine r.p.m.)
611/2350
3,8462
(647/2490) (655/2520)
(169/650) (181/700)
for 60 HP 1000 r.p.m. (2033 engine r.p.m.)
1022/2350
2,3000
(1082/2490) (1095/2520)
(282/650) (304/700)
for 70 - 80 HP 750 r.p.m. (2343 engine r.p.m.) for 60 - 70 - 80 HP 750 r.p.m. (2300 engine r.p.m.)
752/2350
3,1250
(797/2490) (806/2560)
(208/650) (224/700)
766/2350
3,0660
(812/2490) (822/2520)
(212/650) (228/700)
Synchronised P.T.O.
P.T.O. revolutions for each wheel revolution
14,7400
83
3
36
Transmission
Power take-off
Fig. 1 - 540 - 1000 r.p.m. selector.
Fig. 2 - 540 - 750 - 1000 r.p.m. selector
84
Transmission
Power take-off
3
36
ADJUSTMENT OF THE P.T.O. CONTROL LINKAGE Disconnect tie-rod B from lever D . Move control lever A and lever D to the 540 rpm position. Turn fork C to adjust the length of tie-rod B so that the hole in the fork is perfectly aligned with the hole in lever D ; then screw in fork C by a 1/2 turn and connect tie-rod B to lever D. Warning: after adjusting the tie-rod, move the control lever to neutral position and check that the P.T.O. output shaft rotates freely when turned manually. NB: For versions with 3-speed P.T.O., check also that output shaft turns freely when the control lever is in the second neutral positi on.
2-SPEED VERSION 540 750 R.P.M.

WARNING: on assembly, position the lever indicated with the arrow so that head of the lock screw is facing the front of the tractor.
2-SPEED VERSION 540 1000 R.P.M.
Fig. 3 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts (2-speed version) for 60- HP models
85
3
35
Transmission
Power take-off
Fig. 4 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts for 60 HP models (3-speed version)
86
Transmission
Power take-off
3
36
9 kgm (90 Nm)
Fig. 5 - P.T.O. controls and output shafts for 70 - 80 HP models (3-speed version)
87
3
36
P.T.O. clutch
General characteristics
Transmission
Power take-off
The P.T.O. clutch is a wet-type multidisc clutch and is operated by hydraulic pressure. The oil required for the P.T.O. hydraulic control is drawn from the gearbox and filtered before it arrives at the gear pump located on the right-hand side of the gearbox. The clutch control is electro-hydraulic. The electro-hydraulic system controls the circuit by means of a solenoid valve, which supplies oil under pressure to the clutch control piston. In both cases, the driving discs and driven discs are forced together, thereby transmitting drive to the output shaft. The P.T.O. clutch brake is operated mechanically by the piston during the return stroke determined by the helical clutch release spring. Three pins connected to the piston press against the brake counter disc.
Fig. 6 - Cross section view of the P.T.O. clutch.
88
Transmission
Power take-off
Technical specifications
P.T.O. Clutch Clutch number of friction discs diameter of discs thickness of assembled friction discs minimum maximum number of intermediate discs disc lubrication pressure P.T.O. clutch relief pressure setting P.T.O. pressure control valve restrictor valve Correct positions of P.T.O. sensors and cables bar bar bar mm
3
36
oil-immersed multiple disc with axial piston 5 105 mm mm 27.32 29.90 5 5 11 16

+2 0
1.1
A - 3-speed P.T.O. for 70-75-85 HP models
B - 3-speed P.T.O. for 55-60-65 HP models
C - 2-speed P.T.O.
Springs technical data: Piston return spring diameter of wire external diameter spring relaxed spring compressed
kg 98 (978 Nm
mm mm mm kg 82 (808 Nm ) mm ) mm
6 52,5 50 28 23,4
89
3
36
Transmission
Power take-off
WARNING: to prevent oil leaks between the oil delivery and lubrication manifolds, apply Loctite 542 to the threaded parts. CORRECT INSTALLATION OF PINS ON P.T.O. CLUTCH CONTROL PISTON Insert the three pins and install the three grub screws, applying IDRAULERMETIC 542 to the threads, and tighten up against the pins; then unscrew each screw by a 1/4 turn to obtain a clearance of 0.25 between the pins and the piston. Fig. 7 - Rear P.T.O. control.
90
Transmission
Power take-off
Clutch inspection
3
36
Inspect the contact surfaces of the clutch friction discs. If worn or torn, the discs must be replaced. Inspect the control piston and replace if scored. Inspect the clutch hub. If depressions are worn into the tops of the splines on which the friction discs slide, the hub must be replaced. Check the efficiency of the piston return spring. The spring characteristics should match those specified in the relative table; if not, replace the spring. Examine the seals of the clutch control piston and the clutch brake piston and the brake disc. Replace if worn. At each assembly of the P.T.O. clutch, carefully clean the oil ways in the clutch housing; use a compressed air jet if ne cessary.
Checking clutch disc clearance With new discs installed, check that clearance A (Fig. 8) is 0.52 mm . If the clearance exceeds the maximum value, fit one shim (code 2.1599.499.0) in the position indicated by the arrow. Warning: Apply IDRAULERMETIC 542 to the threads of the three screws A before fitting; fully tighten the screws and then back off each screw a 1/4 turn to obtain a clearance of 0.25 mm between the head of the pin and the piston.
Fig. 8 - Checking clutch disc clearance. A - If the clearance exceeds the maximum prescribed value, fit one shim code 2.1599.499.0
91
3
36
Transmission
Power take-off
Checking clutch hydraulic pressures

Connect the mini fitting code 009.2923.4 (with M4 12x1.5 threaded fitting) to the electro-hydraulic control unit as shown in figure 9. Connect tool 5.9030.517.4 to the fitting and attach the pressure gauge 5.9030.514.0. Operate the control valve and check that the pressure gauge shows a reading of approximately 16 bar. For instructions on measuring pressure and relative values see the chapter electro-hydraulic controls.
Fig. 9 - Checking the operating pressure in the P.T.O. clutch control circuit.
92
Transmission
Power take-off
Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch
3
36
On the front shaft of the P.T.O., install circlip A and thrust washer B code 2.1599.761.0; position the shaft in the clutch unit and push it towards the front of the tractor so that it rest up against the oil seal shown in figure at C, then check that clearance between the thrust washer B and the clutch hub is not less than 1 mm. If the clearance is less than 1 mm, remove thrust washer B.
Fig. 10 - Checking the end-play of the front shaft of the P.T.O. clutch.
Installing the waterproof seals rear P.T.O. output shaft and synchronised P.T.O. Fit the seal using a suitable installation tool; the seal is to be oriented as shown in the figure and pressed in to the full depth of the tool. The measurements indicated here are to be used to construct the oil seal installation tool.
Fig. 11 - Installation of the waterproof seals.
93
3
36
Fitting the P.T.O. shaft
Transmission
Power take-off
In the event of interference between shaft B and flange A, heat the flange to allow cou pling. Before fitting plate D, apply Pianerme tic 510 to the surfaces E of shaft B. Tighten bolt C to a torque of 68 Nm (7 kgm).
Fig. 12 - Fitting the P.T.O. shaft with interchangeable output shaft (on certain models only).
RENEWAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. CLUTCH

The P.T.O. clutch unit can be removed without having to remove the driving platform. proceed as follows: Remove the top link; Detach the lift rods of the 3-point linkagefrom the lift arms; Detach the lift control rods from the control levers; Disconnect the oil delivery pipe to the auxiliary control valves from the rear pump; On models with 4-way control valves, detach the oil pipe from the lift control valve to the auxiliary hydraulic control valves. On models with 6-way control valves, detach also the pipe from hydraulic control valves to the upper gearbox cover plate (for 4-way control valves); Disconnect the control levers of the hydraulic control valves from the relay levers connected to the control valves, by removing the relative cotter pins and retaining pins; Remove the 3 screws securing the hydraulic control valve from the support bracket; Disconnect the fuel tank breather pipe in the area above the lift; Remove the 10 screws and the two nuts securing the lift unit to the rear gearbox; Attach the lift unit to a hoist and lift it clear of the tractor (when removing the lift unit, take care not to damage the threads on the two studs); Unscrew the screws securing the P.T.O. access cover (located above the gearbox) and remove this cover; Using a suitable lever, push towards the front of the tractor the sleeve coupling the P.T.O. clutch output shaft to the P.T.O. rear shaft; Loosen the two screws and remove the rear shaft bearing stop plate; NOTE: when removing this plate, take care that the spacers positioned underneath it do not fall into the gearbox. Unscrew the 3 retaining screws and remove the top flange located at the rear of the gearbox. Then withdraw the bearing together with the upper 540 rpm gear. NOTE: when withdrawing the gear, take care that the roller bearing located in the gear does not fall into the gearbox. Disconnect the pipe supplying oil for lubrication of the inversor shaft and to the oil-bath for the P.T.O. clutch discs, located on the right-hand side of the gearbox, by undoing the relative union; then remove the union of the oil supply pipe to the P.T.O. clutch; With the aid of a lever, push the P.T.O. shaft a few centimetres to the rear; This will only be possible if the shaft is positioned in such a way that there is no interference between the teeth of the gear and those on the shaft; Slide the sleeve onto the rear shaft after having first pushed the bearing located in the wall of the gearbox back a sufficient distance; Push the clutch unit together with the front shaft and the output shaft to the rear, so as to be able to withdraw the front shaft to the front P.T.O. unit; Extract the complete clutch unit, disengaging it from the rear shaft; Inspect the clutch discs and renew them if necessary, removing the large circlip and the spacer. WARNING: on re-assembly, after having positioned the clutch unit complete with the front shaft, refit the two oil unions in order to ensure that the unit is positioned correctly, then insert the rear shafts and complete the assembly.
94
Transmission
Power take-off
MAIN OPERATIONS FOR REMOVAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. UNIT.
3
36
Fig. 13 - The rear P.T.O. clutch may be removed without hav ing to remove the cab from the tractor. Disconnect the controls of the auxiliary control valves.
Fig. 14 - Remove the lift and the front cover of the rear gearbox to gain access to the P.T.O. clutch unit.
Fig. 15 - Release the rear shaft of the P.T.O. towards the rear.
Fig. 16 - Remove the circlip on the front clutch shaft.
Fig. 17 - If necessary, push the rear shaft support bearing for ward and withdraw the sleeve coupling the 2 rear shafts of the P.T.O. together.
Fig. 18 - Disconnect the oil supply pipes and remove the complete P.T.O. clutch unit from the gearbox.
95
3
36
Transmission
Power take-off
OPERATIONS FOR REMOVAL OF THE REAR P.T.O. UNIT
Fig. 19 - Withdraw the front shaft from the clutch unit.
Fig. 20 - Check that the clutch hub slides freely in its housing.
Fig. 21 - Check the condition of the lube pipe and nozzle for the hydraulic pumps drive gears.
Fig. 22 - Remove the circlip securing the clutch discs.
Fig. 23 - Remove the clutch discs.
Fig. 24 - The complete disc pack can be extracted along with the clutch hub.
96
Transmission
Power take-off
3
36
Fig. 25 - Inspect the piston; note the three pins of the clutch brake, which is engaged by the action of the clutch release spring in the absence of hydraulic pressure.
Fig. 26 - Remove the thrust washer from between the spring and the clutch hub.
Fig. 27 - Inspect the clutch discs for wear.
Fig. 28 - Examine the condition of the counter disc.
Fig. 29 - Examine the teeth of the clutch hub.
Fig. 30 - Remove the circlip securing the hydraulic manifold of the clutch unit.
97
3
36
Transmission
Power take-off
Fig. 31 - Remove the shoulder plate.
Fig. 32 - Remove the lube pipe for lubrication of the hydraulic pump gears.
Fig. 33 - Completely disconnect the lube pipe.
Fig. 34 - Remove the clutch oil supply manifold.
Fig. 35 - Check the manifold oil ways and check the manifold for wear.
Fig. 36 - Remove the snap rings and check for signs of wear.
98
Transmission
Power take-off
3
36
Fig. 37 - The two holes at the front of the manifold as shown in the figure serve for lubrication of the clutch discs, while the large hole to the rear of these supplies the oil to operate the clutch control piston.
Fig. 38 - Examine the seals on the oil supply fittings.
Fig. 39 - Dismantle the two oil supply fittings and examine them.
Fig. 40 - Remove the brake disc of the clutch unit.
Fig. 41 - Remove the circlip securing the brake disc thrust plate.
Fig. 42 - Extract the two thrust plates together with the brake disc.
99
3
36
Transmission
Power take-off
Fig. 43 - Examine the clutch brake disc pack.
Fig. 44 - Check the three pressure pins for wear.
check the hydraulic system of the sole noid valve block replace the springs of incorrectly calibrated valves check the seals on the piston and manifold if necessary, replace the defective parts
the clutch slips

check that the pi ston slides freely eliminate any roughness preventing free movement replace the plates
check the clutch plates for wear
check the control linkage
replace the defective parts
replace the plates
the clutch fails to disengage
incomplete control valve stroke, solenoid valve faulty
check the plates
plates burned plates jammed
eliminate any roughness preventing free movement
piston stuck
replace the piston
100
Drive axles - axles

Rear axle
Rear axle
4
44
Fig. 1 - Rear axle.
Installing the rear half-shafts (fig. 2)

The half-shafts are fixed to the planet gear carrier flange of the epicyclic reduction unit by means of a plate inserted in the flange and attached to the internal face of the half-shaft by a screw. The correct position of the half-shaft in the trumpet housing is determined by the shim pack A indicated in figure 2. To install the half-shafts, proceed as follows: secure the half-shaft in a vertical position to prevent its rotation; press the rings of bearings B and C into the respective housings in the trumpet housing; (before installing the ring of bearing C, position the cover underneath to retain the grease); then fit spacer I, oil seal D and bearing E to the half-shaft. Slide the trumpet housing onto the half-shaft, fit oil seal H and bearing F, then position the planet carriers; secure the assembly by way of the plate and screw G, interposing a shim pack A between the plate and the half-shaft to obtain a rolling drag torque of 8 to 12 Nm; apply LOCTITE 270 to screw G and tighten to a torque of 18 kgm (177 Nm).
101
4
44
Drive axles - axles

Rear axle
Fig. 2 - Fitting of rear stub axles.
Fig. 3 - Fitting of rear stub axles.
Fig. 4 - Halfshaft securing plate. A - Planet carrier housing B - Spacer
102
Drive axles - axles

Rear axle
4
44
Fig. 5 - Fitting of bearing to halfshaft.
Fig. 6 - Fitting of O-ring to stub axles.
103
4
44
Drive axles - axles

Rear axle
Removal and disassembly of the epicyclic reduction unit

Unscrew the three screws securing the planet carrier B ( Fig. 7) to the half-shaft. Then remove the spacer and the flange, and recover the underlying shim pack. Remove the epicyclic reduction unit and disassemble it into its component parts as follows: 1 - using a hammer and drift, remove the pin securing journal A of planet gear B (Fig. 8). 2 - withdraw the journal and remove the planet gear together with the roller cage and the two thrust washers. 3 - Remove bearing A from the flange of epicyclic reduction unit B , using a suitable puller (Fig. 9).
Fig. 7 - Removing the spacer. A - Flange B - Planet carrier
Fig. 8 - Epicyclic reduction unit. A - Journal B - Planet
Fig. 9 - Removing the bearing from the epicyclic reduction unit flange.
104
Drive axles - axles

Rear axle
FITTING LATERAL STUB AXLES OF THE WHEEL
4
44
Fig. 10 - Before installing the trumpet housing, position sleeve A of the synchronised P.T.O..
Fig. 11 - Position the inner half-shaft in the differential housing.
Fig. 12 - Fit the differential housing support flange and then install the brake piston and brake disc.
Fig. 13 - Install the thrust plate of the brake disc. The side shown in the figure is to be positioned in contact with the brake disc.
Fig. 14 - View showing the side of the brake disc thrust plate to be positioned in contact with the ring gear of the epicyclic reduction unit.
Fig. 15 - Fit the trumpet housing with the aid of a hoist.
105
4
42
Drive axles - axles

2 W.D. extendible axle
2WD extendible axle

General information The wide sideways front axle swinging obtained through excellent anchoring, not only makes it possible to operate the tractor nimbly on steep slopes but also permits the axle to be easily removed from the tractor when any repair is to be performed. End play check is the only operation required on axle reassembly. The telescopic-type axle is extremely rugged and enables the tread to be adapted to any work requirements without removing the hydrostatic steering cylinders.
Fig. 1 - Extendible front axle pivot system.
Tecnical specifications front axle tread - minimum - base - maximum toe-in wheel caster angle axle swinging angle tyre inflating pressure lubricating grease type steering angle bar Kg/cm mm mm mm mm AGROPLUS 60-70-80 1300 1400 1600 24 3 10 2,4 2,40 NGLI 2 LITIO / Ca 70
106
Drive axles - axles

4
42
Fig. 2 - Front axle assembly parts.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 steering track rod clamp sleeve ball-and-socket joint external steering lever ubricating nipple snap ring thrust ring seal ring power steering cylinder 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 shoulder ring bushing seal ring bushing side LH axle cover seal ring castellated nut shoulder ring external bearing 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 wheel hub spacer ring internal bearing retaining ring wheel shaft O.ring axial bearing pin centre axle axle securing pin 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 shims pin disk lower taper roller bearing centre steering lever upper taper roller bearing cover spacer ring
107
4
42
Drive axles - axles

Removing the axle from the front support
Fig. 3 - Place some suitable vessels beneath the steering control cylinders, then loosen unions A of control cylinders C from hoses B side.
Fig. 4 - Loosen both securing screws of pin A to axle support B.
Fig. 5 - Using a hammer and light-alloy punch tap on rear end of pin A . WARNING: Keep the two shim packs separated so that the correct position can be restored on reassembly.
Fig. 6 - By way of both levers A withdraw pin B forward and re cover the shims interposed between flange and front support. Ensure the securing pin surface shows no flattening, craking or chipping, replace the pin if necessary.
Fig. 7 - Remove the axle from the front support by tapping a few times the axle centre portion with the hammer. Lower axle A very slowly and make sure that it does not touch other parts in the process, then remove shoulder rings B.
Fig. 8 - Ensure that bushes A of the centre axle are not worn, checking for well-evident indentations, remove the bushes by hammer and punch if necessary.
108
Drive axles - axles

Carry out installation according to the following procedure:
Use very fine abrasive paper to remove any signs of oxidation from both pin and front support; Bushes and pin should be properly lubricated with the specified grease type; Coat the front support shoulder rings with grease to make positioning easier; Making use of a hammer and light alloy punch tap on spacer F so as it may be moved toward the front side; Insert pin E into the spacer and fit front shoulder ring B; Lift the axle and insert the pin into bush C;
4
42
Place rear shoulder ring D and push the pin almost fully inward; Fit shims G adjusting as instructed on page 216 and then fasten front axle pin securing screws H; Top up the oil in the hydrostatic steering system and bleed the air from the system (see chapter on hydrostatic steering).
A B C D E F G H
Front carrier Front thrust plate Axle bushes Rear thrust plate Pin Spacer Shims Bolt
Fig.9 - Front axle longitudinal section.
109
4
42
Drive axles - axles

A B C D E F G
Snap ring Thrust ring Seal ring Power steering cylinder Grease nipple Pin Castellated nut
Fig. 10 - Front Axle A B C Castellated nut Ball-and-socket joint External steering lever
Check steering rod ball-and-socket joints for damage or wear and make sure the are able to rotate freely and without excessive play inside their seats. Ensure the rubber ball joint guard is intact, otherwise replace the ball joints. Examine the operating rods for damage or warping. Replace if required.
Fig. 11 - Steering arms.
Fig. 12 - Steering linkage. A Steering rods B Ball-and-socket joints C Centre steering lever
110
Drive axles - axles

Centre steering lever
4
42
Use a universal puller to remove centre lever A together with bearing B. Still using a universal puller (see fig. 15) remove bearing C and disk B along with O-ring A .
Make sure the centre lever is not warped or damaged, otherwise replace.
Fig. 13 - Centre steering lever. A Centre steering lever B External bearing races
Carefully examine the bearings turning them slowly, if the bearing is sound no vibrations, noise nor slight jam-ups shall be felt.
Fix centre lever A in a vice if required, and using a light-alloy hammer and punch remove tapered bearing outside races B, located in the centre hole (Fig. 14), taking care to remove first the upper race having smaller diameter by tapping from inside outward. Re-install the centre lever operating in reversed removing order and accordingly with the following procedure: Before assembly carefully lubricate the tapered-roller bearings
and related races. new O-ring. tions:
Fig. 14 - Centre steering lever bearing. A Centre steering lever B Upper tapered-roller bearing
Before mounting the lower bearing in the axle fit a new disk and a When installing the castellated nut keep to the following instruc Tighten the nut fully to bed the bearings properly Loosen the nut and tighten again until all plays have been taken up,
then fit a new check pin. If the hole in the pin is not in the same line as the cut in the nut, tighten the nut furtherly as long as a new check pin can be inserted.
When the reassembly is completed perform pin and bearing lubrication with the specified grease type just operating the lubricating nipples placed on the lever.
Fig. 15 - Removing the centre steering lever Cbearing. A O.ring B Disk C Tapered-roller bearing
111
4
42
Drive axles - axles

Fig. 16 - Removing the wheel hub. A Tractor wheel B Safety stand C Front axle
Fig. 19 - Wheel hub components. A Ball bearing B Spacer C Hub
D E
Ball bearing Oil seal
Wheel hub
Using a universal puller withdraw whole wheel hub B from pin, (Fig. 18) . Make use of a suitable puller to remove front ball bearing A and take spacer B, (Fig. 19). Remove retaining ring E by prising, then using a proper puller remove rear ball bearing D, (Fig. 19). Before assembly coat bearings B and D and new retaining ring A with the recommended grease, (Fig. 20). Carefully insert retaining ring A using a light-alloy hammer and punch. Install wheel hub C onto pin G tapping slightly with the hammer for proper bedding. Tighten castellated nut E to the prescribed torque. Make sure the nut cut is duly aligned with the check pin hole in the pin, otherwise tighten the nut furtherly to make them coinciding and re-install the check pin. Ensure wheel hub C end play is 0.12 to 0.48 mm with respect to wheel shaft pin G.
Fig. 17 - Removing the guard cover. A Check pin B Gasket C Cover D Hub E Nut
Fig. 18 - Using a puller to remove the wheel hub. A Wheel hub shaft pin B Whole wheel hub
Fig. 20 - Section view of the wheel hub. A Oil seal B Innner ball bearing C Whel hub D Outer ball bearing
E - Castellated nut F - Thrust plate G - Whel shaft pin H - Space
112
Drive axles - axles

Clean bearings and the other parts carefully, then dry using compressed air. Carefully examine the bearings turning them slowly, if the bearing is sound no vibrations, noise nor slight jam-ups shall be felt. Carefully examine bearing race and rolling member conditions ensuring no scoring, marking, grinding signs due to foreign matter abrasion are noticed, otherwise replace the bearing.
4
42
WARNING: Should a bearing be no more serviceable, both the internal and the external bearings must be replaced. Make sure the wheel shaft has suffered no damage and threading is whole, replace if required. Ascertain clearance hole A permitting the external cover to be fixed is not obstructed by foreign matters, if so remove any clogging to allow hub B to be properly lubricated. Wash any components carefully and dry with compressed air. Be sure no signs of oxidation are visible on the wheel shaft, if so remove with very fine abrasive paper. Check the shaft for either warp or damage, if so replace the shaft. Carefully inspect the axial bearing making sure no grinding, scoring or marking are evident neither on the rolling members nor on the bearing races, otherwise replace the worn parts. Check side axle upper and lower bushes B for wear, ascertaining they still show evidence of the purpose-made indentations, otherwise replace.
Fig. 21 - Wheel hub lubricating hole. A Clearance hole B Wheel huba
Fig. 22 - Removing the steering lever. A External steering lever B Gasket C Wheel shaft
Fig. 24 - Wheel pivot bushes. A Clearance hole
Fig. 23 - Removing the wheel pivot axial bearing. A Wheel shaft B Axial bearing C O.ring D Axial bearing race
113
4
42
Drive axles - axles

Correct track rod assembly (Fig. 25).
Rotate sleeve A around its axis so that knuckle B is in the position shown in figure, i.e. make sure the knuckle working angle is 90, then insert and tighten both the sleeve securing bolts.
End float adjustment (Fig. 26).

Push the axle towards the rear and, using a feeler gauge, check that the maximum end float G does not exceed 0.4 mm. If the end float exceeds this value, proceed as follows. Unscrew bolts E securing pin B to the front carrier A; Slightly move the pin and remove some of shims D to restore correct end float. Re-tighten bolts E and check end float again.
Fig. 26 - Track rods. A Sleeve B Steering knuckle
Fig. 25 - Adjusting the endfloat of the front axle . A Front carrier B Pin C Thrust plate D Shims E Bolt
114
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
FRONT-WHEEL DRIVE Specifications
Front drive axle ratios reduction gear-front-wheel drive bevel gears final epicyclic reducer total reduction mechanical ratio 30 km/h 40 km/h
30 km/h 40 km/h
4
43
30 km/h 40 km/h
21/47 = 1/2,2381 28/47 = 1/1,6786 (13/13+50) = 1/4,8462 1/23,8618 1/23,8618 1/17,8966

1,3790 1,3830
(number of front wheel turns for each rear wheel turn)
bevel gear teeth backlash front drive axle end play front drive axle swinging steering angle toe-in wheel caster angle camber Check value for the adjusting the bevel gears
mm
0,15 0,20 0,1 0,4 10 50 see specification table here below 7 1
mm
Fig. 1 - Measuring front wheel toe-in and front wheel geometry. Adjusting toe-in Adjust the front wheel tie rod so as the difference A-B shown in figure 1 is: wheel rim keying diamete r 2RM 26 26 26 A-B mm 4RM 02 03 0 3,5
up to 20 (508 mm) from 20 to 30 (509 762 mm) over 302
Adjusting steering angles Make sure the front drive wheel steering angle is as specified in the table above. Otherwise adjust by way of the special setscrews or spacers.
Fig. 2 - Front-wheel drive steering angles.
115
4
43
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Carry out a thorough check and adjust the end play as follows: Move the axle forward tapping with a non-ferrous metal hammer. Use thickness gauge A (see Fig. 4), to make sure that the end play between shoulder ring B and differential housing C is within specifications given in the related table (see page 213). If the end play is correct loosen the four nuts securing front swivel support C to drive axle A (see Fig. 5) and add or remove a number of shims B enough to obtain the recommended end play. Bleed the air from the brake system. Check the toe-in and adjust the differential lock operating rod if necessary. Tighten the swivel support securing nuts to the specified torque.
Fig. 3 - Removing/Installing the front drive axle. A Swivel supports B Front axle C Spacers D Swivel support
Swivel support securing nuts

front rear Fig. 4 - Checking the front axle end play. A Thickness gauge B Shoulder ring C Differential housing 89 Nm 142 Nm (9,1 Kgm) (14,5 Kgm)
Fig. 5 - Front axle end play check point. A Front drive axle B Shims C Front swivel support
Fig. 6 - Power steering cylinder securing pin. A Pin securing pin B Power steering cylinder fixing pin C Power steering hydraulic cylinder D Dust cover E Spacers
116
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
4
43
Fig. 7 - Longitudinal section of the front-wheel drive.
117
4
43
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Fig.8 - Views and sections of the front-wheel drive.
118
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Final epicyclic reducer
Disassembling the hub 1 - If the operation involves the bevel gear pair, removal is enabled simply by extracting the two hub swivel pins; the hub can then be distanced together with the halfshaft. 2 - If the operation involves the hub, proceed as follows: remove the protective cap located at the centre of the epicyclic housing. remove the circlip from its groove. fit puller p/n 5.9030.618.4/10 and remove the flange (see fig 9). remove the circlip from the groove at the end of the halfshaft. screw two bolts into the holes indicated by the arrows (see fig 9) and separate the hub from the epicyclic housing. WARNING: Use a non-ferrous metal hammer and punch to tap on ferrous parts for removal if necessary. Stripping down the epicyclic (fig. 10) Remove the ten securing bolts from the flange of the housing, then remove the flange and the shims beneath. Rest epicyclic reducer A on two wooden blocks as shown in figure and using a press and a punch operate on planetary carrier case centre B until the planetary carrier, bearing C and seal ring D can be removed from the bottom. NOTE: If oil leaks are noticed from seal ring D, this ring can be removed from its groove without requiring the planetary carrier case to be dismounted. In any case, when seal ring D is removed the damage it usually has to undergo is to such an extent to require replacement. Tap with a hammer and a punch on bearings C and E when having to remove, if necessary. Take planetaries A securing pins B; remove the planetaries and take roller cages C. Installation the hub Re-install the disassembled bearing C (Fig.10), in the planetary carrier case paying attention to the assembly direction. Install planetaries B with bearings C (Fig.11) into the planetary carrier case taking care to turn the pin dogs towards the hub centre. Make the planetary and the crown wheel teeth match avoiding any damaging when inserting the planetary carrier into the external case. Install bearing C (Fig.10) if previously disassembled, use a hammer and a punch to tap slightly and evenly on the outer race surface. Shimming epicyclic reducer bearings Fit a number of shims between the planetary carrier flange and the pin fixing plate, until the bearing rotate freely, even though a slight bearing preloading can be felt, then remove one 0.05 mm shim from the shim pack. Fit a new seal ring .
4
43
Fig. 9 - Removing the hub flange with SAT no. 5.9030.618.4/10 tool.
Fig. 10 - Disassembling the epicyclic reducer. A Epicyclic reduction gear B Planetary carrier case C Bearing
Fig. 11 - Epicylic reduction gear planetaries. A Pins B Planetaries C Roller cage
119
4
43
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
The following procedure should be observed on reassembly:
1 - Brakes Replace the brake control piston O-rings and insert piston in its seat with the oil grooves turned outwards. 2 - Final epicyclic reducer Install the final epicyclic reducer holding the axle shaft in position as shown in figure 12 by prising on cross journal A outwards; this to prevent the axle shaft from moving inwards. 3 - Axle shafts When inserting the axle shaft pay attention not to damage the roller bearing or the seal ring. The axle shaft end should be correctly introduced into the differential gear planetaries. Make sure the axle shaft is free to rotate without any hindrance. 4 -Forks After installing the bearings and the dust rings mount the fork by placing one 0.5 mm shim under the lower pin, then fit the pin, use a hammer if necessary, finally tighten the securing screws.
Fig. 12 - Prising with a lever to hold the axle shaft in position when mounting the final epicyclic reducer.
Fit a pack of shims thicker than the one taken on removal under the upper pin. Install the pin tightening the securing screws.
Adjusting wheel fork bearing preloading In the pack of shim to be put together for adjustment it is always advisable to group more shims in one: as an example, it is better one 0,2 mm shim be used instead of two 0,1 mm shims. Fit no. 5.9030.267.0 magnetic base with no. 5.9030.272.0 centesimal dial gauge onto the drive axle and then place the gauge feeler perpendicularly to the lower pin close to centre and set to zero. Using lever A as shown in figure 13, move the fork fully upwards and read the clearance on gauge dial. Loosen the two screws B and remove shims from pack C so that any clearance may be taken up without preloading the bearings. WARNING: The clearance amount should be reduced gradually by repeating reading with the dial gauge each time so that the bearings are not preloaded. After all clearance has been taken up, remove a 0.10 to 0.15 mm shim pack, so that a correct bearing preloading can be obtained. Tighten screws B and D to the specified torque.
Fig. 13 - Checking wheel hub clearance. A Lever B Screws C Pack of shims D Screws E 0.5 mm shim.
After correctly performing adjustment, ensure the shaft taper roller bearing slide in their seats freely, even though a slight preloading is felt.
120
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Side hubs
Disassemble the twin universal joints if required, keeping to the following procedure:
4
43
Remove both snap rings A from one cross journal B. A non-ferrous metal hammer and punch may help in carrying out this operation, (see Fig. 14). Fix the joint fork in a vice provided with protective jaws. Tap with a hammer on wheel shaft fork A (see Fig. 16), so that the bearing may be removed from its seat in fork A and taken from the top. Separate cross joint D from the fork. Following the same procedure separate the cross joint from the universal joint fork as well as from the axle shaft fork. Recover bearing rollers A along with dust rings B.
Fig. 14 - Twin universal joint. A Snap ring B Twin universal joint cross journal
Fig. 15 - Axle shaft twin-type universal joint bearing. 1 Rollers 2 Dust rings
Fig. 16 - Disassembling the twin-type universal joint from the axle shaft. A Wheel shaft forks B Roller bearing C Roller bearing D Cross joint
121
4
43
Pins
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Check differential spider pin and final epicyclic reducer planetary holder pin surfaces for damaging; otherwise both pins are to be replaced. Follow the same procedure for pin housings.
Axle shafts
Check for excessive wear: splines should not be nicked and permit a free gear movement. Spider forks should not be warped and bearings shall slide freely.
Gears
Make sure all gear toothing is neither worn nor damaged, teeth should work on the whole contact face.
Bearings
Examine bearings for proper working conditions, ensure they show neither excessive radial nor end play. Holding the bearings pressed by hand and making simultaneously turn in both directions of rotation, these should slide freely and no sliding friction felt.
Tightening torques
Before tightening all screws should be degreased and cleaned. Kgm 6 6,5 21 23 3 78 Nm 58 64 206 226 29 68 78
Differential/bevel gear securing screws Bevel pinion fixing nut Bearing holding flange securing screws Fork flange securing screws Axle swivelling pivot securing screws Engine front support securing screws Hydraulic cylinder fixing pin Ball-and-socket joint castellated nuts Transmission shaft flange securing screws * Differential housing half securing screws
* Coat the nut with a small amount of Loctite 242.
- rear pin - front pin
14,5 9,1 28 16 12 5 11,5 12
142 89 274 157 119 49 113 118
Check periodically that the wheel bolts are correctly tightened. Front wheel bolts Front wheel bolts 2RM (M20x1,5) 4RM (M18x1,5) (M20x1,5) 50 kgm (490 Nm) 36,8 kgm (360 Nm) 50 kgm (490 Nm)
122
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
4
43
Installing the waterproof seal A inner half-shaft B outer half-shaft C pinion D hub E pinion X outline plug Using a suitable installation tool, install the seals oriented as shown in the figure and pressing them to the full depth of the installation tool. The measurements indicated here are to be used to construct the oil seal installation tool.
Fig. 17 - Waterproof seals.
123
4
43
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Rglage du couple conique.
1 - Monter le botier de diffrentiel en interposant entre les flasques-supports de roulements une paisseur de cales jusqu obtenir une prcontrainte des roulements de 0,04 mm. 2 - Dposer nouveau le botier de diffrentiel et monter le pignon en interposant un jeu de cales A de 0,50 mm et un jeu de cales B pour permettre, aprs avoir serr lcrou au couple de 21 23 kgm (206 226 Nm), la libre rotation des roulements dans leurs logements respectifs malgr une lgre prcontrainte (ne doit pas tre suprieure 0,04 mm).
Fig. 18 Mise en place dpaisseur de cales pour roulements de pignon.
3 - Rgler la distance E botier de diffrentiel-tte du pignon en agissant sur le jeu de cales A. La mesure exacte pour cette opration sobtient en additionnant ou en retranchant de la valeur grave sur le profil dune dent du pignon la valeur de 1 mm. Remarque: aprs avoir rgl la distance entre le botier de diff rentiel et la tte du pignon, il faut refaire le rglage de la prcontrainte, pour dtrminer nouveau le jeu de cales B. 4 - Remonter le botier de diffrentiel et vrifier avec un comparateur le jeu dentredent pignon-couronne: il doit tre de 0,15 0,20 mm; si ce nest pas le cas, enlever des cales au jeu C et les ajouter au jeu D pour approcher la couronne au pignon et vice versa pour lloigner de celui-ci.
Fig. 19 Mesure du jeu dentredent pignon/couronne pour le rglage du couple conique.
Fig. 20 - Rglage du couple conique.
124
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Rglage interne du blocage de diffrentiel de type mcanique (Fig. 22).
(Pour le rglage de la commande extrieure, voir chapitre commandes). 1 - Assembler les pices en plaant lpaisseur de cales A du ct du circlip B ; lpaisseur de cales mise doit faire en sorte que le jeu de lentretoise C soit de 0 0,05 mm. 2 - Dplacer un certain nombre de cales du jeu A dans la position G jusqu obtention du dplacement du manchon D en position denclenchement. REMARQUE Le dplacement des cales doit se faire par jeu dune paisseur non suprieure 0,20 mm. Lenclenchement du manchon D sera correct quand le manchon recouvrira les billes F sans forcer pour se mettre dans la position indique par le repre E Fig. 22.
4
43
Montage du diffrentiel dans le pont

Orienter le groupe de manire que le manchon du blocage de diffrentiel se situe du mme ct du levier interne de commande. Le manchon devra tre dplac vers lextrieur afin de permettre aux patins du levier de sengager dans la gorge. Aprs le montage du diffrentiel dans le pont, contrler lenclenchement du blocage en actionnant le levier et en tournant manuellement le pignon dattaque.
Fig. 21 - Orientation du diffrentiel dans le pont.
Fig. 23 Contrle de la distance tte de pignon-surface rectifie du botier de diffrentiel. A Jauge dpaisseur B Tte pignon C Axe porte-satellites
Fig. 22 - Rglage du blocage de diffrentiel.
125
4
43
Drive axles - axles

4 W.D. front axle
Diagnostic des inconvnients
Usure des croisillons cardan
pont avant surcharg
nemployer que des chargeurs frontaux reconnus par le constructeur changer les gues uses ba-
prvoir le lestage arrire du tracteur
contrler lusure des bagues dtanchit
Pertes dhuile
reniflard dhuile obstru nettoyer
usure uniforme
nutiliser la double traction que sur terrain agricole
excessive exploita- monter des pneus tion du tracteur pour convenables transports routiers
Usure des pneus

usure non uniforme contrler le pincement des roues si ncessaire prvoir la substitution si ncessaire prvoir la substitution rgler et les remplacer si ncessaire prvoir le rglage
contrler lusure des pneus contrler lusure des articulation de direction contrler les roulements coniques du moyeu
Oscillation des roues
126
Vehicle
Brakes
Brakes
General information The service brakes are located between gearbox and final epicyclic reducers and assure a precise and safe braking action. In addition, the four-wheel drive tractor models are also equipped with integral braking system providing braking on all tractor wheels. The braking system is sintered-lining, oil-immersed disk type. The right-hand brake control is completely independent from the left-hand brake control; this allows the tractor turning radius to be conveniently reduced (this operation is only possible when working on farm land and never during transport operations on public roads). The braking system is provided with the SEPARATE BRAKES valve which enables the front wheel braking to be excluded. Each brake pedal controls a hydraulic pump which delivers oil under pressure to a disk thrust plate, which causes the brake disk to lock. Operating both brake pedals simulteneously by coupling them with the special joining latch, opens an oil duct connecting both hydraulic circuits to balance the baking pressure on the wheels. Brake maintenance is limited to an easy adjustment and a system air bleeding if necessary. The parking brake has mechanical control and acts on transmission downstream of gearbox. Pulling the control lever upwards makes the brake disks pack together thus locking the shaft being constantly meshed with the wheels. Maintenance is very easy and consists of replacing the friction pads when worn or adjusting the control lever travel.
5
54
Fig. 1 - Front service brakes.
Fig. 2 - Parking brake parts. Specifications

service brakes Manufacturer Type number of disks each brake brake disk outside diameter original brake disk thickness brake disk minimum thickness allowable brake pedal free travel braking piston max. Play thydraulic pump type parking brake brake type number of braking pads double braking surface single braking surface original braking pad thickness double single braking pad minimum thickness allowable double single brake disk number parking brake control lever travel 2WD 2 (each side) 223,4 4,80 4,40 front 4WD rear SDF DEUTSCHLAND oil-immersed disks 1 (each side) 1 (each side) 223,4 280 4,80 7 4,40 6 40 1,15 Benditalia 1 oil-immersed disks n 2 n 2 5 3,5 4,3 3,2 3 100
mm mm mm mm mm
mm mm mm mm mm
127
5
54
Vehicle
Brakes
A - Oil tank B - Oil delivery pipes C - Oil pumps D - Pumps connection pipe E - Brake pedal coupling latch F - Block for types without front brakes G - SEPARATE BRAKES valve H - Brake pedals I - Parking brake lever L - Toothed quadrant M - Control rod
Fig. 3 - Brake control assembly parts.
Hydraulic pump
Disassebly and checking procedure Referring to fig 4: Remove guard boot A, take snap ring B and withdraw rod C along with the support disk. Referring to fig 6: Fix the pump in a vice provided with protective jaws and pushing pistons into the pump partly, as shown in figure 6, loosen the piston retaining screws and then remove the pistons together with the spring down below.
Fig. 4 - Brake pump control unit.
128
Vehicle
Brakes
5
54
A - Pump B - Delivery pipe union C - Delivery pipe D - Clamp E - Pipe fitting F- Spring
G - Snap ring H - Spacer I - Seal ring L- Intermediate piston M - Spring N - Seal ring O - Washer
P - Piston Q - Seal ring R - Rod S - Support disk T - Snap ring U - Guard boot V - Nut
Z - Fork X - Stop screw Y - Gasket K - Pump union pipe
Fig. 5 - Brake pump assembly parts. Examine the cylinder interior and the pistons for either scoring or rust. Replace if necessary. Check cylinder and pistons for wear. If excessive plays are noticed replace either the whole piston or the whole cylinder assembly. Inspect sealing rings and dust guard boot, replace any worn parts. Inspect all pump internal compartments, apertures and passages and make sure all is properly clean and free from foreign matters. Ensure the springs are neither yielded nor warped. Replace if necessary.
Fig. 6 - Piston retaining screw.
129
5
54
Vehicle
Brakes
1 - Spring 2 - Pump 3 - Intermediate piston 4 - Spring 5 - Pipe fitting 6 - Gasket 7 - Seal ring 8 - Washer 9 - Piston 10 - Seal ring 11 - Support disk
12 - Guard boot 13 - Rod 14 - Nut 15 - Fork 16 - Snap ring 17 - Gasket 18 - Stop screw 19 - Seal ring 20 - Seal ring 21 - Spacer 22 - Snap ring
Fig. 7 - section of the brake pump.
Assembly of brake master cylinder (see fig 5).

Screw the front piston L and the rear piston P together, then check that there is clearance between the two. Insert the pistons into the cylinder, checking that the recess afforded by the outer piston P is aligned correctly with the seat of the limiter screw X. Verify correct operation of the cylinder, making certain that the pistons complete their full travel freely.
Fig. 8 - Installing the front brake disk pressure piston seal ring.
Fig. 10 - Brake assembly. Fig. 9 - Brake assembly flange.

A - Brake assembly flange A - Brake disks B - Intermediate disk C - Brake control piston
130
Vehicle
Brakes
Checking the front brake disks on 2WD and 4WD front axles and the rear brake disks.
Check the ground surfaces contacting the brake disks for excessive scoring. If excess wear is found replace the worn-out parts. Check disk conditions and tickness, compare with specifications table. Examine the brake disk broaching for wear or damage. If excessive oil consumption is noticed, check the piston rings as follows: Connect no. 5.9030.520.4 hydraulic pump to the oil delivery circuit; if the hydraulic circuit is not fully oil-tight under a 1,5 bar pressure, the rings must be replaced. (To check the effectiveness of the seals more accurately, blow compressed air around the perimeter of the seal; if air bubbles appear, the seal is imperfect). Check each brake.
Fig. 11 - Brake housing. A - Locating dowels. B - Brake housing
5
54
For 4WD front brakes and rear brakes only Mark piston and brake housing case with a reference near to a locating pin so as to make reassembly easier. Coat the brake housing case seal ring contacting surfaces of piston A with recommended grease, see figure 11. Carefully mount piston into the brake housing case. Fit the brake housings and halfshaft trumpet housings, repeating the removal operations in reverse order and observing the following directions. Coat the brake housing case inner surface as well as both epicyclic gear crown wheel surfaces with recommended sealant. Tighten the securing nuts of the brake housings and trumpet housings to the prescribed torque (see values below).
- brake housing bolts: - trumpet housing bolts: 3,3 4,1 (32 42) 8,6 9,6 (84 94) Fig. 13 - Rear brake assembly. Fig. 12 - Greasing the seal contact surface of the brake piston. A - Piston
Adjusting service brake pedals

Operate right-hand pump fork A (figure 14) to adjust brake pedal position, until the most suited position for the operator is attained, and in such a way that the pedal may complete its whole travel freely when braking. Operate left-hand pump fork B (figure 14) to adjust the related brake pedal so that the coupling latch holes are in the same line.
Fig. 14 - Adjusting the brake pedals.
131
4
54
Vehicle
Brakes
Fig. 14 - Rear brakes for 2WD front axle.
Fig. 15 - Parking brake inspection window Correct installation of inspection cover for parking brake discs Before fitting the cover, apply the sealant PIANERMETIC 510 to the surfaces in contact with the gearbox (marked A in the figure), then tighten the three screws marked B in the figure to a torque of 5.8 kgm (55 Nm). Check that with the control lever positioned at angle of approx. 40 relative to the horizontal, the brake play is that indicated in the figure. If the play exceeds this value, replace disc C with the single braking surface with a discs with a double braking surface (to recover 1mm of play). Alternatively insert a shim (code 009.9648.0) between the disc C and the reaction plate (to recover 2mm of play).
132
Vehicle
Brakes
5
54
Fig. 17 - Section view of 4WD front brakes.
Fig. 18 - Section view of rear brakes.
133
5
54
Vehicle
Brakes
The parking brake, completely independent from the service brakes, is applied by pulling the special hand lever upwards. Once the parking brake is applied the related pilot lamp on the dashboard lights up.
Checking parking brake pads

Examine the brake pads for wear. If brake pad thickness is out of specifications these shall be replaced. Brake pads can be dismounted after removing the lower brake pad lockpin, this permits access through the cover placed under the gearbox to be gained. Before installing new brake pads, check lockpin seal ring conditions, replace if necessary.
Parking brake control lever overall travel

This travel should be 100 mm, otherwise operate the special adjusting screw until the specified dimension is obtained.
Fig. 19 - Parking brakechecking and adjusting dimension.
Fig. 20 - Parking brake.
Measuring the brake disk thickness.
134
Vehicle
Brakes
5
54
Fig. 21 - Parking brake assembly; (A - Brakes disk).
Bleeding air from the brake hydraulic system

Operate as follows: unhook pedals by removing the coupling latch: afterwards place the SEPARATE BRAKES valve control in OFF position; operate the right-hand brake pedal several times; by holding the pedal in fully depressed position, slightly unscrew and tighten soon after the relevant air bleeding valve on the rear right-hand brake. This operation should be repeated until such time as the oil flows out of the bleeding valve without air bubbles. Repeat the same procedure on the front right-hand brake by acting on the related air bleeding valve. Follow the same procedure on the front and rear left-hand brakes making use of the related air bleeding valves.
Fig. 22 - Bleeding the air from the rear service brake hydraulic system.
We recommend that only oil AKROS MATIC (with international specifications ATF DEXRON II) used in the braking system.
Fig. 23 - Bleeding the air from the front service brake hydraulic system.
135
5
54
Vehicle
Brakes
Separate Brakes valve
The SEPARATE BRAKES valve permits the front wheel side-slip to be removed when performing independent braking. (This prevents cultivation damage as the front wheel is under no braking action). The valve operation can be stopped by operating the special control tap A. When both brake pedals are operated at the same time (coupled pedals), the braking of the four wheels will be always obtained.
IMPORTANT: The idrostop sensor must be installed in the SEPARATE BRAKES valve housing, smearing Loctite 542 on the screw thread.
Fig. 24 - Different braking action diagram.
A = LH brake pedal B = RH brake pedal C = Both when coupled
Hydraulic connections PR - Rear RH brake L - LH brake pedal pump AL - Front LH brake R AR PL H - RH brake pedal pump - RH front brake - Rear LH brake - STOP pressure switch
Fig. 25 - SEPARATE BRAKES valve.
136
Vehicle
Brakes
5
54
Fig. 26 - Hydraulic circuit diagram for SEPARATE BRAKES system
137
5
54
Vehicle
Brakes
Fig. 27 - Brake hydraulic system schematic diagram with tap in position ON. A - oil pressure B - discharge oil
Hydraulic connections PR - Rear RH brake L - LH brake pedal pump PL - Rear LH brake
R AR AL H
- RH brake pedal pump - RH front brake - Front LH brake - STOP pressure switch
138
Vehicle
Brakes
5
54
Fig. 28 - Brake hydraulic system schematic diagram with tap in position OFF A - oil pressure B - discharge oil
Hydraulic connections PR - Rear RH brake L - LH brake pedal pump PL - Front LH brake
R - RH brake pedal pump AR - RH front brake AL - Rear LH brake H - STOP pressure switch
139
5
54
Vehicle
Brakes
make sure no air is inside system bleed the air
poor braking
check for correct adjustment
adjust
check brake disks for wear
replace
make sure the recommended oil type is used
bleed the air
uneven braking
check for correct adjustment
replace
adjust
make sure the recommended oil type is used
replace
noisy braking
check brakes disk for wear replace
140
Vehicle
Hydraulic power-lift
Hydraulic lift with load sensing
5
59
The automatic draft control device, connected directly to the top link, guarantees rapid lift operation and is highly sensitive to even minimal variations in the load on the implement. The hydraulic lift is equipped with an internal cylinder positioned horizontally. The hydraulic lift is equipped with an open-centre control valve. The oil in the suction line is drawn from the gearbox by a high-capacity pump (the same pump supplies the auxiliary control valves) and filtered through a filter with an interchangeable. The oil under passes through the auxiliary control valves before arriving at the lift.
Fig. 1 - Lift lever shaft
Technical characteristics
manufacturer lift type safety valve setting minimum operating pressure minimum permissible piston diameter maximum permissible cylinder diameter lifting capacity with load concentrated on lower link ball ends at height of rear wheel centres tightening torque for cylinder retaining bolts bar bar mm mm kg kgm Nm SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND with open-centre control valve 10 190 + 0 8 89,900 90,050 1600 15 - 16,5 150 - 165
141
5
59
Vehicle
Installing the lift and front cover plate of the gearbox
Install the two lift mounting studs (A in figure) and the two cover plate retaining screws (B in figure), applying Loctite 242 to the threads in both cases.
Fig. 2 - Fixing the front lift and the front cover to the gearbox
Fig. 3 - Lift unit components.
Lift mechanism Inspect the splines for grooves or excessive wear; replace the levers if necessary. Inspect the splines of the lift shaft for excessive wear and check that the machined surfaces in contact with the supports are not damaged; carefully clean the lubrication slots for the shaft supports. At each dismantling, remove the seals and gaskets. Check that there are no oil leaks from the lift cylinder. Checking the safety valves Check that the safety valve incorporated in the auxiliary control valves is set to 190 bar. Remember that to ensure the correct operation of the lift, the operating pressure in the lift circuit must not exceed 150 bar.
Fig. 4 - Hydraulic control valve.
142
Vehicle
Checking the protrusion of the non-return valve control pin B
5
59
Move the ball A so that rests on the valve body D, and move the valve body D so that it rests on the control valve housing, then insert pin B up against ball A (while making sure that the ball A does not move). Check that the pin B protrudes 15.8 0.05 mm as indicated in the figure. Check that the moving parts slide freely For the control vale to function properly, the following parts must slide freely: - G - control valve spool - K - pilot valve - L - enabling valve Checks to be carried out after re-assembly of the control valve. - Check that the control valve spool slides freely. After assembly of the control vale housing with the connection housing, check that the spool G slides freely in its bore. - Check coverage of lifting and lowering ports. Push the spool G in the direction of arrow E until the point where lifting commences. From this point, move the spool back in the direction of arrow F until lowering commences. Check that the spool travel between the lifting and lowering positions is 0.6 to 0.8 mm. - Check for leaks Check that no part of the control valve leaks (plugs, check valve, etc.) at a pressure of 150 bar. Apply Loctite 542 to all the control valve plugs before fitting. The spring calibration values must match those specified in the tables. For bench testing of the control valve use oil of the recommended type and a pump with a capacity of 10 to 15 l/min. Warning: the presence of emulsified oil may prevent correct operation of the control valve.
L K F E G
B D A
Fig. 5 - Hydraulic control valve.
15.80.05
143
5
59
Vehicle
Hydraulic power-lift - first version
1 - MAX. controlled draft 2 - Green sector - CONTROL 3 - MIN. controlled draft 4 - Lowering 5 - Red sector float 6 - Mixed control 7 - Yellow sector position 8 - Raising
Fig. 6 - Lift control adjustment diagram. F - Position control lever (yellow knob) G - Draft control lever (green knob)
144
Vehicle
Adjusting the lift (Fig. 6)
Warning: before adjustment, attach a weight of approx. 200 kg to the 3-point hitch.
5
59
Adjust the forks of the external tie-rods of the lift control linkage so that the yellow lever and the green lever are free to move the entire length of the control slot.
Adjusting the lift travel - YELLOW LEVER Start the engine, and move the yellow lever to the maximum lift position and move the green lever to position 12 in its control slot. Adjust screw E (fig. 6), so that it is up against its stop when the reference marks on the right-hand side of the lift housing and the lift arm coincide. If necessary, also adjust fork B of tie-rod A .
Adjusting the GREEN LEVER Move the yellow lever to the position CONTR of its control slot, and check that when the green lever is moved from position 12 towards 0 , the lifting action commences when the lever is in correspondence with position 4. If not, adjust fork D of tie-rod C.
Checking operation of the safety stop. Move the green lever to the maximum lift position (position 0 ). The lift arms will be raised, rotating through a further angle of approx. 4 (corresponding to a movement of the notch on the lift arm of 6 mm). Checking balance. With the yellow lever in the CONTR position, move the green lever from position 12 to 4 to find the point of balance (before the lifting action begins); check that when the counterweight applied to the lift arms is pulled upwards, the lift raises the arms, and that when the counterweight is pushed downwards, the lift lowers the arms.
145
5
59
Vehicle
Yellow Blue Green Red
= Oil delivery to the hydraulic control valve = Oil flow from the control valve to the lowering valve = Oil for piloting the valves = Pressurised oil to the lift piston
1 - Valvematic 2 - Anti-shock valve 3 - Down valve 4 - Control valve 5 - Pilot valve 6 - Enabling valve 7 - Inlet valve P - Pump T - Return
Fig. 8 - Lift hydraulic circuit.
146
Vehicle
5
59
Yellow = Discharged oil Red = Pressurized oil Blue = Oil from hydraulic pump Green = Oil trapped at relative pression 1 - Directional control valve 2 - Enabling valve 3 - Enabling pilot valve 4 - Unloading valve 5 - Down actuator piston 6 - Valvematic 7 - Inlet valve 8 - Anti shock valve
Fig. 9 - Hydraulic lift circuit - NEUTRAL
147
5
59
Vehicle
Fig. 10 - Hydraulic lift circuit - RAISING
148
Vehicle
5
59
Fig. 11 - Hydraulic lift circuit - LOWERING
149
5
59
Vehicle
Fig. 12 - Control linkage for draft control.
Fig. 13 - Lift hydraulic control valve.
Fig. 14 - Section views of the lift
150
Vehicle
5
59
Fig. 15 - Pins of the draft control and position control levers
Fig. 16 - Control linkage for draft control and stop screw for the position control lever
151
5
59
Vehicle
Fig. 17 - Top view of the lift.
Fig. 18 - Rear view of the lift.
152
Vehicle
5
59
Fig. 19 - Section views of the lift hydraulic control valve
153
5
59
Vehicle
Sensing arm assembly

Install on screw A: ring B , spacer C, spring D, ring E , screw in nut F to take up all play. Screw in nut F a further quarter turn to preload the spring. Slide this assembly into spring holder G. Fit eye H and tighten nut F against it to a torque of 100 105 Nm (~10 Kgm), taking care that nut F does not turn on screw A. Screw plug I into spring holder G to prevent axial movement of the previously assembled pack. Apply a small quantity of LOCTITE 242 before fitting plug I. Apply a small quantity of LOCTITE 242 before fitting nut F and eye H. Grease spring D before fitting
C D
Fig. 20 - Sensing arm assembly diagram
154
Vehicle
Power-lift distributor valve spring setting specifications
5
59
oil flow control valve spring no. of springs used wire diameter external diameter released spring loaded spring
(N 40,4) - kg 4,115 (N 66) - kg 6,727
n. mm mm mm mm mm
1 1,4 7,8 54 47,5 43,37
pilot valve spring no. of springs used wire diameter external diameter released spring loaded spring
(N 21) - kg 2,133 (N 28,5) - kg 2,899
n. mm mm mm mm mm
1 0,9 7,8 25,5 15,2 11,5
hydraulic distributor spring no. of springs used wire diameter external diameter released spring loaded spring
(N 43) - kg 4,4 (N 39) - kg 4
n. mm mm mm mm mm
1 1,2 10,4 110 65 60
nonreturn valve spring no. of springs used wire diameter external diameter released spring loaded spring
(N 29) - kg 2,96 (N 43) - kg 4,43
n. mm mm mm mm mm
2 1,1 8,8 25 17 13
valvematicspring no. of springs used wire diameter external diameter released spring loaded spring
(N 41,3) - kg 4,2 (N 54,3) - kg 5,5
N mm mm mm mm mm
1 1,2 9,5 57,3 35 25,8
155
5
59
ELECTRONIC LIFT
Vehicle
Electronic power-lift
The electronic lift is controlled by an electronic control unit and a control panel. The electronic control unit processes the signals from the input devices and generates the output signals for the electro-hydraulic control of the lift control valve. The system provides Draft and Position control functions. IMPORTANT The "ALL ROUND TESTER" provides the interface for electronic control unit self-diagnostic and programming operations. All the display messages are given in the chapter "LIFT TESTER Control unit version 1.24A" of the Appendix (see table of contents).
Fig. 1 - Configuration of the electronic lift system 1 - Control Unit 2 - Electro-hydraulically operated control valve (2 proportional solenoid valves) 3 - Hydraulic pump 4 - Draft sensor 5 - Position sensor 6 - Maximum lift height control knob 7 - Lowering speed control knob 8 - Draft/wheelslip intermix control knob 9 - Depth control knob 10 - Up/Down control 11 - Lock and alarm warning light 12 - Manual UP control (on the fender) 13 - Manual DOWN control (on the fender)
156
Vehicle
Control panel
5
59
The control panel comprises a series of potentiometers, lights and switches which serve to set the system operating mode, raise or lower the lift and to provide information about system status. The control panel is separate from the electronic control unit, to which it is connected by way of a multi-pin connector.
Fig. 2 - Control panel 1 - Lowering speed control knob 2 - Maximum lift height control knob 3 - Draft/wheelslip intermix control knob 4 - Up/Down control switch with integral Lock and Alarm warning light 5 - Depth control knob
Control level or depth control knob (5) Used to set the reference value for the control function. Informs the electronic control unit of the required level of working depth or draft control for respectively the position and draft control functions. This knob is fitted with a mechanical lock to prevent excessive force being applied at the limits of potentiometer travel. Turning the knob to the left increases the working depth. The first sector on the left permanent Float control. Mix position/draft control (3) Used to select the control mode. When turned fully to the left, pure draft control is selected. When turned fully to the right, pure draft control is selected. In the intermediate sector, sets the minimum depth for draft control: the function is disengaged by turning the knob to the right, the depth is decreased by turning the knob to the left.
157
5
59
Vehicle
Lowering speed control knob (1) Used to vary the at which the linkage is lowered. Sets the maximum aperture of the proportional solenoid valve that controls the lowering speed. Turning the knob to the left reduces the lowering speed.
Maximum lift height control knob (2) Used to set the maximum height to which the linkage is raised when the driver operates the lift control. Turning the knob to the left reduces the maximum lift height.
Up/Down control switch (4) Rocker switch used to raise or lower the linkage, incorporating a safety lockout/release.
Up control Pressing this button for at least 0.2 seconds raises the lift to the maximum lift height.
Control/Float mode If the Down button is pressed for less than 0.2 seconds, Control mode is activated. If the button is held pressed for longer, Float mode is activated. In the latter case, the implement will be lowered at the rate set by the lowering speed control knob and the lowering solenoid valve will be operated for as long as the button is held pressed. The moment the button is released, the system will exit Float mode and automatically resume Control mode.
Lock/release Activates/deactivates total lock out of the control panel. When the lock is activated, the warning light illuminates. On starting, the system is always locked; to release the lock, hold the Up control button pressed for 3 seconds until the light goes out. The light will flash rapidly while the button is pressed. To activate the lock, hold the Up control button pressed for 3 seconds after which the light will illuminate; again, the light will flash rapidly while the button is being pressed. On activating the lock, the linkage is immediately raised to the height determined by the maximum lift height control knob. Any subsequent alteration to the position of the lift controls (including the maximum lift height control knob) will have no effect on the position of the linkage until the lock is released.
Lift status indicator light This light provides information about the operating status of the lift. If the light is permanently illuminated, this indicates that the system is locked. If the light is off, this indicates that the system is operating normally. If the light is flashing, this indicates an alarm condition.
WARNING: only use the Up control button located on the solenoid valve of the lift control valve in cases of extreme necessity and when the engine is running at idle speed. Release the button before the linkage reaches the maximum height, as the automatic stop determined by the both position sensor and the safety switch is excluded during this operation.
158
Vehicle
Remote pushbuttons for lift operation from ground Two remote pushbuttons are located on the rear fender. To enable these pushbuttons it is first necessary to release the lift control system.
5
59
Operation of the manual controls overrides any current lift functions and places the control unit in STOP condition, awaiting new control signals.
Fig. 3 - Lift control pushbuttons
1 - Up
2 - Down
Fig. 4 - Ground-operated lift controls.
159
5
59
Vehicle
Lift operation On starting the engine, the lift is in Lock condition; to release the lift, press the UP switch for at least 5 seconds. The lift control system enters STOP status in which condition the lift may be raised to the maximum lift height by pressing the switch for at least 0.5 seconds but no more than 3 seconds. To activate the lift control system, press the DOWN switch for less than 0.3 seconds; if the switch is held pressed for longer, FLOAT mode is activated and CONTROL mode will only be resumed when the switch is released. The functions of the three potentiometers are as follows: 1 - MAXIMUM LIFT HEIGHT (used to set the maximum height to which the linkage can be raised) 2 - LOWERING SPEED (used to set the rate at which the implement is lowered). 3 - CONTROL (used to select the control type: when turned fully to the left POSITION control is selected, when turned fully right DRAFT control is selected). When turned to the intermediate sector, mixed draft and position control is selected. LIFT ALARMS
CODE 11 12 13 14 15 21 22 23 24 25 31 41 42 45 MESSAGE ON TESTER EVUP DISCONN EVUP C.C. EVDW DISCONN EVDW C.C. EPROM CECKPOS. SENS. C.C. POS. SENS. DIS GEN. FAIL. CPU DRAFT SENS NC DRAFT SENS C.C. EEPROM CECK DRAFT SENSOR DISCONNECTED DRAFT SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT EEPROM ERROR Alarm description UP SOLENOID DISCONNECTED UP SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT DOWN SOLENOID DISCONNECTED DOWN SOLENOID SHORT CIRCUIT BLOCCO TOTALE DEL SISTEMA SOLLEVATOREPOSITION SENSOR SHORT CIRCUIT POSITION SENSOR DISCONNECTED GENERAL FAILURE OF CPU.
Example display of code 23:

on off all times in seconds
2 0.3 0.3 0.3 1,2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2 0.2
The criteria for encoding are as follows: light off for 2 seconds number of 0.3 second flashes corresponding to the tens digit light off continuously for 1.2 seconds number of 0.2 second flashes corresponding to the units digit repetition of the cycle until the alarm ceases
160
Vehicle
Fig. 5 - Electronic circuit diagram of the ECU 1 - Vcc 2 - UP solenoid valve 3 - DOWN solenoid valve 4 - GND 5 - Sensor Vcc 6 - Position 7 - Draft 8 - Lowering speed 9 - Maximum height 10 - Mix 11 - Main control 12 - ISO 9141
5
59
PIN OUT REAR LIFT ECU

1
Vcc
2
Electrovalve UP
3
Electrovalve DOWN
4
GND
12
ISO 9141
6
Position
7
Draft
8
L. Speed
9
Max H.
10
Mix
11
Main Control
5
+Vcc Sensors
Extern up
1K2 Lock/Alarm
Extern down
A - UP solenoid valve B - DOWN solenoid valve C - Tester IN/OUT D - Position sensor E - Draft sensor F - Lowering speed G - Maximum height H - DRAFT/POSITION mix control I - Main control L - DOWN/UP control
1 + EVup EVdown 2 1 2 Tester In/Out Position Sensor Draft Sensor Lowering Speed 1 V 3 2 1 V 3 2 1 2 3
Down
Up
Maximum Height
Mix Draft/Pos
Main Control
Down/Up Control lever
161
5
59
Vehicle
Calibration of the AUTOMATIC 1 - Unlock the lift. 2 - Move the lift arms to the required height using the ground-operated UP/DOWN controls. 3 - Press the P.T.O. AUTO switch. 4 - Press the P.T.O. engagement switch for approx. 10 seconds. The selected height is set as the maximum height limit for P.T.O. operation. Emergency manual lift control In the event of a malfunction of the electronic system, the lift can still be controlled by way of the mechanical pushbuttons located on the solenoid valves of the lift control valve (see figure below). However this operation should only be carried in an emergency and with the engine running at idle speed. Release the pushbutton before the lift arms reach their maximum height, as the automatic stop determined by the position sensor is disabled during this manoeuvre.
Fig. 6 - Emergency manual lift control pushbuttons.
HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE (located on lift casing)
A - Up B - Down
Fig. 7 - Diagram of the hydraulic control valve. Hydraulic control valve of the electronic lift This control valve is of the open centre type and has two solenoid valves for raising and lowering the lift arms. The two solenoid valves are controlled directly by the ECU. Do not connect the solenoid valves directly to an electrical power source, as they would be irreparably damaged.
162
Vehicle
LIST OF ELECTRONIC LIFT TESTS
5
59
Connect the ALL-ROUND TESTER to the diagnostics socket and select option (2) [REAR LIFT CONTROL]. Press (0) twice and enter the password [BAC0] in order to modify the parameters. Press [E] twice to display the first screen page. The first screen indicates the selected tractor type (10N or 10S). If the selected tractor type does not correspond to the machine being tested, change the type by pressing the number alongside the required model and follow the on-screen instructions to store the new type in memory. Release 1.23A does not display the tractor type selection screen and the parameters are those relative to the 10S type. Enter the MENU screen and press (0) to enter the modification menu.
2 - Modification menu. 1 - Monitor 2 - Parameters 3 - Tests 4 - Max/min height calibr. 5 - Alarms 6 - Calibr. PWMmin
- MONITOR Displays data related to the control algorithm and the PWM controls (sensor and potentiometer status). - Parameters 10S - Programming parameters of the control solenoid valves (Ev). - Tests - allows you to test ground-operated pushbuttons and display sensor values. - MAXIMUM/MINIMUM LIFT HEIGHT CALIBRATION Allows you to calibrate the maximum lift height and the lifting speed. DEFAULT VALUES 10S: 1 - max. Height 880 2 - Lifting speed. 500
To calibrate the maximum height, put the lift control in STOP condition (see LIFT OPERATION) and select "CALIBRATION" from the main menu. Then select option 1 from the "CALIBRATION" menu, turn the MAXIMUM LIFT HEIGHT knob to the maximum position and, using the ground-operated UP/DOWN pushbuttons, position the lift arms at the required maximum height. Press "E" and "C" to save and confirm the new maximum height value. Exit the "CALIBRATION" menu and continue the tests.
(V=0.84 dm )
Rear lift
210 Bar
Fig. 8 - Functional diagram of the lift control valve. 1- UP valve 2- DOWN valve 3- Enabling valve 4- Antishock valve 5- Check valve 6- Lifting cylinder
1
P
163
5
59
Vehicle
Fig. 9 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - NEUTRAL 1 - UP solenoid valve 2 - DOWN solenoid valve 3 - Enabling valve 4 - Check valve P - Oil flow
164
Vehicle
5
59
Fig. 10 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - LIFTING 1 - UP solenoid valve 2 - DOWN solenoid valve 3 - Enabling valve 4 - Check valve P - Oil flow
165
5
59
Vehicle
Fig. 11 - Control valve hydraulic circuit - LOWERING 1 - UP solenoid valve 2 - DOWN solenoid valve 3 - Enabling valve 4 - Check valve P - Oil flow
166
Vehicle
5
59
Fig. 12 - Hydraulic control valve for electronic lift.
167
5
59
Vehicle
Fig. 13 - Position sensor calibration of the electronic lift.
POSITION SENSOR CALIBRATION If a new position sensor is fitted, it will have to be adjusted. Proceed as follows: 1 - Move the lift arms to the minimum height position, connect the "ALL AROUND TESTER" and access the maximum height calibration screen; screw the sensor in or out until a number between 4 and 10 is displayed. 2 - Tighten down the sensor 3 - Proceed with the calibration of the maximum height.
168
Vehicle
5
59
2 1 3
Fig. 14 - Pin for draft control of the electronic lift 1 - Pressure test fitting for lift cylinder pressure 2 - Lift control valve 3 - Anti-shock valve
169
5
59
Vehicle
Fig. 15 - Rear view of the electronic lift.
170
Vehicle
5
59
A
(ALIMENTAZIONE DA REGOLATORE DI FLUSSO)
27 L/min MAX.
(ALIMENTAZIONE DA POMPA O DA FRENATURA IDRAULICA) 27 L/min

2630'
B
7330'
2630'
Quota sensore libero: 119
Quota sensore montato: 117.5
Corsa sensore 10
8.43
Fig. 16 - External hydraulic circuit of the lift. A - Lift control valve
171
172
59
Fig. 17 - Top view of the electronic lift.
Vehicle
PA
T. E LE S A
(discesa)
(Salita)
Asse tubo alim. da regolatore di flusso x sollev. meccanico
Vehicle
Precautions for electronic equipment
5
59
The tractor is equipped with a number of sensitive electrical devices and electronic components. In particular, electronic components do not tolerate polarity inversion, over-current, connection errors, etc.. The electronic components are provided with internal and external protections, but the following precautions are still necessary: Switch off the control panel before carrying out any work on electrical components. Do not use a screwdriver of light bulb to test for electrical current; only use the appropriate diagnostic equipment (tester). Do not apply excessive force when connecting and disconnecting electrical connectors; do not prise connectors apart using a screwdriver, and always respect the polarity of the connection. In the event of a fault in a circuit controlled by an electronic control unit, do not immediately replace the control unit, but first check that the sensors and actuators are functioning correctly. When replacing a defective electronic control unit, only unscrew the retaining screws; avoid interfering with other screws as these could be calibration screws. Inspect contacts on sensors and connectors for corrosion. Do not use arc welding in the vicinity of electrical circuits. Avoid short-circuits and polarity inversion. When working on components controlled by microprocessors, always disconnect the power supply by turning the ignition key to the STOP position before disconnecting the component. If the tractor is to be resprayed and passed through a paint baking oven, remove all electronic components. Do not insert the probes of the tester into multi-pole sockets on connectors or other devices (this deforms the contacts and thus leads to poor connections). Do not test for the presence of electrical current by causing a spark, i.e. by short-circuiting components across wires or to earth. Do not reverse the polarity or swap over wires in multi-pole connectors. CHECKING THE ELECTRONIC SYSTEM Elements to check: Sensors Electronic control units Actuators
1) Checking the system power supply: current present at input to the connector plugged into the device; current present at output from connector earth connection voltage correct. 2) Check downstream components: sensors. 3) Check upstream components. CHECKING MECHANICAL COMPONENTS Check the splines on the external and internal lift arms for damage or excessive wear; replace the levers if necessary. Check the bushes of the lift arm shaft for scoring or excessive wear. Check the bushes and the pins connecting the lift arms to the hydraulic cylinder are not worn and are firmly inserted in the seats on the levers. Check the diameters of the rod and bushes in the cylinders and compare with the maximum wear limits in the table. Check that the splines on the lifting shaft are not excessively worn and that the machines surfaces in contact with the support bushes are not damaged. NOTE: whenever the lifting cylinders are dismantled, new seals must be fitted.
173
5
59
Front hydraulic lift
Vehicle
Front hydraulic power-lift
On request the tractor can be equipped with the front hydraulic lifting system. It is operated by means of two hydraulic cylinders actuated by the related control lever placed at the right-hand side of the operator driving position. The lever controls a single-acting distributor valve linked to the rear tractor power-lift case. Inspections Ensure that the cylinder pin bushings are not worn and be sure these are firmly secured in their seats. NOTE: Replace gaskets after each hydraulic lifting cylinder disassembly. Specifications power-lift type hydraulic cylinder type oil supply peak operating pressure cylinder stem diameter lifting stroke lifting capacity bar mm mm Kg with two hydraulic cylinders and removable arms single-acting from the rear auxiliary hydraulic distributor 180 50 170 1500
A - Front lift cylinders (2) B - Hydraulic accumulator Volume 0.700 litres Nitrogen precharge 130 bar maximum operating pressure 250 bar C - Antishock valve D - Lowering speed regulator valve E - Lockout cock (prevents oil from discharging from the cylinders when transporting raised implements on the road).
Fig. 1 - Lift operation.
174
Vehicle
Hydraulic accumulator and antishock valve for front lift
5
59
The front lift is equipped with a hydraulic accumulator with an antishock valve. This improves hydraulic system performance and reduces strain on the front axle.
Fig. 2 - Front linkage components. The grease seal ring must be fitted as shown in the figure and must enter the housing bushing by 2 mm
Fig. 3 - Front linkage components with relative valves and accumulator.
175
5
59
Vehicle
A - To lift cylinders B - Rate of drop valve C - Anti-shock valve D - Accumulator E - Lowering speed control valve F - Directional control valve Fig. 4 - Oil pressure accumulator and anti-shock valve. (The directional valve to which is connecting, is convertable into single-acting. For the operations to see auxiliary systems chapter).
176
Vehicle
Front power take-off
Front power take-off General information
The power take-off clutch is a multidisk, oil-bath and electro-hydraulic control type. The front power take-off is directly linked to the crankshaft by means of a flexing coupling; while the shaft-end is equipped by an universal joint. The oil used for P.T.O. operation is contained in the P.T.O. casing. A specific gear pump installed on the P.T.O. shaft sucks the oil, which flows first through a filter for being subsequently routed under pressure to the clutch assembly through an electro-hydraulic distributor. The oil is strained through a second (15 micron) filter placed on the pressurized circuit located between oil pump and hydraulic distributor. A maximum 57 kgm (560 Nm) torque can be transitted to the hitched implement in this way, i.e. 80 CV max. (or 58 kW). To avoid these standards may be exceeded it is recommended that a special joint having proper specifications be installed between implement and P.T.O. The P.T.O. shaft rear teminal has clockwise direction of rotation (with respect to the driving position).
5
59
Fig. 1 - Front P.T.O. shaft terminal.
Fig. 2 - Front P.T.O. clutch assembly.
Specifications
clutch manufacturer clutch disk no clutch disk diameter clutch disk set thickness mm - max. wear mm - standard wear mm SAME DEUTZ-FAHR DEUTSCHLAND 4 124,5 20,80 21,80 - 22,20 4 + 1(spacer) 1,5 4 13 1523 1 gear type 12 9012.424.2 90 222 1,5 1.3/8" - 6 splines with regard to driving position 2,5 AKROS MULTI 10W30 (APl-GL4)
counterdisk number disk lubricating pressure bar peak calibrating pressure (to press the disks together): - of brake disk bar - of clutch disk bar piston axial thrust kg brake disk braking torque (peak pressure) kgm hydraulic pump oil flow rate (at engine peak speed) (dm/min) litre/min oil filter cod. filtering capacity micron filtering surface cm hydraulic distributor stroke mm rrear P.T.O. shaft terminal direction of rotation oil reservoir capacity litre (dm) oil type
3 2 3
177
5
59
engagement stage
Vehicle
A - Checking the clutch assembly engagement pressure (10 13 bar).
Fig. 3 - Front P.T.O. clutch hydraulic circuit (engagement stage).
178
Vehicle
disengagement stage
5
59
A - Checking clutch assembly engagement pressure (4 6 bar).
Fig. 4 - Front P.T.O. clutch hydraulic circuit (disengagement stage).
179
5
59
Vehicle
Apply some LOCTITE 510 (red) on the surface betuen cover and box
Fig. 5 - Longitudinal section of the front P.T.O. assembly.

A - Solenoid valve C - brake apply press. control valve E - Strainer
B - Clutch pressure control valve D - Clutch engagement pressure accumulator F - Oil level indicator plug
Fig. 6 - Front P.T.O. shaft flexing coupling.
180
Vehicle
Apply some LOCTITE 212 (sky-blue) on the screw threads.
5
59
Fig. 7 - Cross-section of the front P.T.O. assembly.

A - Brake disc D - Input shaft G - P.T.O. shaft
B - Clutch discs E - Strainer
C - Oil pump F - Oil drain plug
Fig. 8 - Top view of front P.TO.
Correct fitment of front P.T.O. shaft bearing Locate the bearing 2.2421.012.0 with the shoulder directed toward the gear as indicated in fig 8.
181
9
59
Vehicle
Installing RING-FEEDER rings
Install all the parts following the order shown in figure. Thoroughly tighten the pulley hub on engine crankshaft to 38 2 kgm (380 20 Nm). Fit an intermediate flexible coupling with a torsional rigidity of 25,145 kgm/rad; the maximum applicable inertia must not exceed 0.5 kgm .
2
Fig. 9 - RING-FEEDER rings installed.
Fig. 10 - Front P.T.O. assembly parts
182
Vehicle
Checking clutch
5
59
Make sure that the clutch disk friction linings are neither worn nor torn, if so replace the disks. The control piston should be replaced if signs of scoring are noticed. If the splined sliding surface of the clutch disk hub is sunk in its upper part, the hub should be replaced. Check the efficiency of the piston return spring. The spring specifications should correspond to those indicated in the specific table. Replace if necessary. The clutch and brake piston sealing rings as well as the brake disk itself should be replaced if excessively worn. If either the rotary seals or the relevant seats are worn, these should be replaced. Every time the assembly is taken to pieces, carefully clean the oil passages in the clutch casing; use compressed air if required.
Check the clearance of the clutch friction discs With new discs in place, check that distance A (Fig 11) is between 0,5 and 2 mm. If the clearance is greater than the maximum value indicated, add 1 x shim p/n 2.1599.499.0 at the position arrowed.
Fig. 11 - Checking disk clearance of front power-take-off.
Checking clutch assembly engagement pressure

Fit no. 5.9030.517.4 equipment to the oil supply pipe using no. 5.9030.632.0/10 union as shown in figure 3 at pages 254-255 and then connect no. 5.9030.514.0 oil pressure gauge. With the P.T.O. engaged Let the oil circulate within the clutch casing and then be sure the following conditions are established: with engine running at peak idling speed the pressure reading should be 13 1 bar; with engine running at the lowest idling speed the pressure reading should be 10 1 bar. N.B. - Make sure the P.T.O. shaft terminal is turning. With the P.T.O. disengaged Let the oil circulate within the distributor casing and then be sure the following conditions are established: with engine running at peak idling speed the pressure reading should be 6 0.5 bar; with engine running at the lowest idling speed the pressure reading should be 4 0.5 bar. N.B: Make sure the P.T.O. shaft terminal is being braked.
Fig. 12 - Electro-hydraulic control valve.
183
5
59
Vehicle
Verify activation of the solenoid valve replace the solenoid valve if necessary replace the springs of inefficient valves inspect O-rings on piston and manifold remove any roughness preventing smooth action replace discs recheck pressure
check piston free stroke
for
replace the defective parts replace the solenoid valves if necessary
clutch slipping
verify movement of piston
inspect clutch discs for wear Check the solenoid operated control valve
replace the solenoid valve if necessary
P.T.O. brake does not apply
Check engage ment pressure
inspect O-rings and replace if necessary replace out-of-setting valve springs
piston jammed
Spring specifications
piston return spring wire diameter external diameter released spring loaded spring hydraulic system valve springs quantit wire diameter external diameter released spring loaded spring cod. mm mm mm - kg 75,7 (Nm 742) mm - kg 79,7 (Nm 782) mm cod. numero mm mm mm - kg 3.6 (Nm 35) mm - kg 4.6 (Nm 45) mm 2.4019.373.1 6,5 79,5 61,5 30 28 2.4019.179.1 2 1.2 8.8 63 44,6 39.5
184
Controls
Hydrostatic steering
6
63
code 290.6310.4/10 Danfoss type for 4WD code 010.8555.4 danfoss type for 4WD with double steering cylinder and oversized pump capacity of 14cc code 009.3141.4/10 Danfoss type for 2WD
General information
There in no direct mechanical connection between the wheels and the steering wheel and therefore no vibration can reach the driver. Turning the steering wheel operates a rotary distributor connected to an oil flow control shutter permitting the pressure oil to be directed to the hydraulic cylinder in the amount necessary to provide the desired steering action. The steering system is an open-centre reactive type: the user can directly feel the steering response on the steering wheel and perform a prompt correction of the driving direction. In addition, the remarkable wheel caster angle will help increase the wheel self-centering effect as the wheels will automatically get in a straight line when the steering wheel is released. The hydraulic circuit is fully independent. The oil drawn from the gearbox flows first through a high-delivery filter before being routed under pressure to the distributor by a pump constantly in mesh driven by the engine and fitted on gearbox left-hand side. Two powerful cylinders, connected to the front wheel hubs, ensure the thrust necessary to steering under any working conditions. Oil returning from the power steering unit is directed to the unit piloting the electrohydraulic controls and sole function to lubricate the gearbox. Moreover this system offers the advantage that the tractor can be driven also in the event of either a pump failure or an engine stop. A valve within the distributor will allow the oil to be drawn from the discharge circuit through the oil control shutter, whenever a pressure drop occurs in the pump delivery circuit.
hydraulic directional control valve type of valve relief valve setting bar bar mm
clearance between spool and sleeve turns of steering wheel before road wheels respond - engine running - engine at standstill steering cylinders working stroke of piston rod rod diameter pushing force steering wheel turns to full lock
ospc 80 or open-centre reactive type for 2WD and 4WD ospc 125 or open-centre reactive type for 4WD with oversized oil pump and double steering cylinder 150 for 4 WD 100 for 2 WD 0,03 0 - 2 0 - 6
2WD 4WD 2WD 4WD
mm mm mm kn kn n
171 42 50 13,6 19 2.17
tightening torques valve cover securing screws cylinder securing bolt
kgm kgm
3 16
Nm Nm
29 155
185
6
63
Controls
Inspections and checks Steering pump
Clean all component parts of the pump thoroughly, using petrol. Check that the gears are not unduly worn, otherwise replace.
Directional control valve

Clean all parts of the valve thoroughly. Check, utilizing a comparator for internal dimensions, that the clearance between spool and sleeve (A - B - Fig 1) is no greater that 0.03 mm: otherwise replace. The two components are not available separately as spare parts.
Check the setting of the pressure relief valve

Fig. 1 - Fit diameter between internal and external elements of the control valve.
Couple pressure gauge 5.9030.513.0 by means of adaptor 5.9030.579.0 to the fitting of the left hand steering cylinder (as indicated in fig 2). Start the engine and allow to idle for a few minutes; then, with the steering on full right hand lock, turn the wheel further until the hand of the gauge stabilizes at around the maximum pressure. If this is different to the maximum operating pressure (150 bar for 4WT and 100 bar for 2WT), adjust the setscrew (A - fig 10, page 192) of the valve until the requisite value is re-established in the circuit. Repeat the same sequence of operations with the pressure gauge and adaptor fitted to the right hand steering cylinder, this time on the left hand lock.
Fig. 2 - Testing pressure in the hydraulic steering circuit. A - fitting B - cylinder
Bleeding the hydraulic circuit

Start the engine and allow to idle at minimum rpm. Loosen the two fittings at the cylinder and turn the steering wheel each way until oil emerges devoid of air bubbles.
Assembly of orbital pump unit

Locate the rotor A in the stator B as illustrated, making certain that the pin C is perpendicular to the plane x - x of the valve body as indicated in fig 3.
Fig. 3 - Correct assembly of orbital pump unit
186
Controls
Teering wheel shaft
Verify the integrity of the steering column, and in particular, make certain that the surfaces of the bearings are not scored, also that the splines are neither damaged nor showing signs of excessive wear. Do not grease or oil the bearing inside the sleeve. Check that the steering column rotates freely, without sticking, but also without excessive play. Before refitting the rubber boot A (Fig 4), smear the steering column B with the grease at the position indicated in fig 4. Having tightened all components, check that the steering wheel continues to operate correctly even when at its two height adjustment limit positions (fully raised and fully lowered).
6
63
Fig. 4 - Section through steering wheel shaft A - Rubber boot B - Steering column
Steering cylinders Clamp the cylinder in a vice and withdraw the piston G (fig. 7); If necessary, remove the circlip F (fig. 8) from its groove with the aid of a suitable tool to allow withdrawal of the ball end G (fig. 8).
Fig. 5 - Steering column. A - Bearing B - Sleeve
A - Shock valves B - Anticavitation valves C - Pressure relief valve (150 bar) D - Emergency steering check valve E - By-pass valve (redirects return flow to inlet) F - Orbital pump unit G - Directional control valve
Fig. 6 - Components of directional control valve
187
6
63
Controls
Fig. 7 - Single acting cylinder. A - Snap ring B - Ball C - Cylinder D - Self-locking nut E - Guide ring F - Seal G - Piston H - Shaft
I - Snap ring L - Head M - Gasket N - Dust seal O - Spring P - Ring nut
Servicing
Verify the integrity of the O-ring and wiper seals. Replace any components showing signs of wear or damage. Inspect the sliding surfaces both of the rod and of the cylinder for signs of scoring, heavy wear or any kind of damage; if any of these are discernible, replace the affected component. Check for correct operation of the ball end, ensuring that it betrays no signs of heavy wear, scoring or oxidation, the presence of which dictates replacement. Lubricate the wiper seals and ball end with care. Reassemble the cylinder, repeating the dismantling operations in reverse sequence.
Fig. 8 - Ball joint F - Circlip G - Ball joint
Fig. 9- Section through single acting cylinder. A - Wiper B - Ring nut C - Gasket D - Head E - Cylinder F - O-ring G - Self-locking nut H - Ball end I - Circlip L - Piston M - O-ring N - Shaft
188
Controls
Instructions for the hydrostatic steering distributor assembly
6
63
1 - Insert the spring set (blue) as shown in figure.
2 -Insert first the two external spring blades into the rotary distributor and subsequently the two internal ones.
3 - Press the spring blades to align in centre position.
4 - Reassemble the rotary distributor.
5 - Act on springs in such a way they are prevented from projecting outwards with respect to the rotary distributor outside surface.
6 -Fit the spacer onte the distributor.
7 - Insert the drive pin into the cylinder
8 - Install the axial bearing following the assembly order shown in next figure.
9 - Axial bearing installation.
10 - Use no. 5.9030.480.0 tool to fit the seal ring.
11 - Insert the O-ring after fitting the tool sleeve into the distributor case.
189
6
63
Controls
12 - O-ring as installed on the plug.
13 - Insert the O-ring into the sleeve and press until it is fully inserted.
14 - Pull out the tool.
15 - Insert the distributor from the bottom trying to make installation easier alternately rotating in both directions.
16 - Press the distributor until the plug is pushed out of the opposite side.
17 - Turn the distributor case upside down holding the rotary distributor in place and iserting the shunt valve as in dicated by the arrow in figure.
18 - Screw down the valve grub screw in its seat.
19 - Insert the balls as shown by the arrow.
20 - Insert the two pins in the same posi tions as previously shown.
21 - Fit the seal ring in the related seat.
22 - Fit the spacer in such a way the holes in it are in the same line as the corresponding grooves.
23 - Insert the drive shaft in the distribu tor so that the notching may engage into the pin in a position being parallel to the distributor face.
190
Controls
6
63
24 - Place the fork as shown in figure so as the drive shaft may be held in position.
25 - After inserting the two O-rings pro perly lubricated into the oil flow control shutter fit the stator positioning as shown in figure.
26 - The rotor should be placed to the sta tor and then swiveled with regard to the drive shaft as shown in figure.
27 - Place the spacer ring, (only for those models which the spacer is fitted).
28 - Install the pin screw in the special hole (the ball valve hole).
29 - Fit the cover.
30 - Fix the cover with the securing screws by tightening to the recommended torque.
31 - Fit the seal ring.
32 - Insert the seal ring into its seat.
33 - Install the pressure relief valve.
34 - Insert the spring.
35 - Fit the pressure relief valve cap screw.
191
6
63
Controls
A - pressure relief valve B - check valve C - from pump D - anticavitation valve E - emergency steering check valve Fig. 10 - Distributor cross-section.
F - return flow L - to left hand cylinder R - to right hand cylinder P - pump T - discharger
192
Controls
6
63
1 - Oil to the main pump 2 - Oil to the flow control shutter 3 - Oil to the steering cylinder 4 - Oil trapped in closed circuit 5 - Oil in the discharging line 6 - Oil in the aspirating line 7 - Right-hand rotation 8 - Left-hand rotation 9 - Neutral position
Fig. 11 - Reactive-type, open-centre hydraulic distributor schematic diagram.
193
6
63
Controls
Greasing the steering shaft
On assembly, grease the areas shown on the left with Molikote GN-PLUS
Fig. 12 - Greasing the steering shaft.
Fig. 13 - Components of steering controls and hydrostatic power steering support
194
Controls
6
63
8 Bar L R
OSPC 80 OR
100 Bar 2 WD 0.009.3141.4/11 150 Bar 4 WD 0.290.6310.4/10 T P
Fig. 14 - Hydrostatic steering operation diagram.
195
6
63
Controls
Check oil level in tank Restore level Check for air in system Bleed the system
Unable to steer tractor

Check safety valve setting Check for shorn distributor securing pin Replace pin
Reset or replace if necessary
Hard steering
Check safety valve setting
Bleed the system Check for air in the system Check for leakage Replace worn seal from the distributor rings and the piston seal rings in the hydraulic cylinder
Distributor and oil flow Check oil filter for dirt control shutter worn
Change oil and replace filter Check that the oil is of prescribed type Change oil and replace filter
Blocked distributor
Check for dirty oil
Clean distributor and replace oil Check that oil is not excessively hot Stop tractor and let oil cool
Bleed the system Check for oil leakage in the hydraulic cylinder Replace seal ring
Wheels oscillation
Check for air in system
Check valve setting
Adjust
196
Controls
Mechanical controls
Mechanical controls
6
64
Given the constructional simplicity of these controls, we present a series of figures illustrating the individual components of the controls. Only some of these controls require adjustment; for instructions for these adjustments, refer to the chapter dealing with corresponding unit. Fig. 1 - Gearbox inversor control Fig. 2 - Gear-change control Fig. 3 - Gearbox reduction unit control Fig. 4 - Synchronised P.T.O. control Fig. 5 - Hand throttle control Fig. 6 - Accelerator pedal control Fig. 7 - Lift controls Fig. 8 - Ground-operated lift controls Fig. 9 - Auxiliary control valve controls
N.B.: For P.T.O. controls see instructions on page 178.
WARNING: It is important that those tie-rods fitted with adjustable forks are adjusted so that their respective control levers can be moved through their entire range from min. to max. without obstruction.
Fig. 1 - Gearbox inversor control
197
6
64
Controls
Mechanical controls
Fig. 2 - Gear-change control.
Fig. 3 - Gearbox reduction unit control.
198
Controls
Mechanical controls
6
64
Fig. 4 - Synchronised P.T.O. control.
Lever play adjustment: insert a washer 2.1311.010.2 and , if necessary, other washers 2.1580.004.0 in the space A to obtain a play of 0.5-1 mm.
Fig. 5 - Hand throttle control. Control adjustment: tighten nut A to a torque of 7 kgm (70 Nm), screw in screw B to obtain lever movement with a load of 70N
Turn the control lever backward and forward 2-3 times through approx. 25 and re-check the load on the lever; adjust if necessary. 199
6
64
Controls
Mechanical controls
EXTERNAL CONTROLS OF THE MECHANICAL
FITTING AND ADJUSTMENT OF THE GOVERNOR
Accelerator pedal (fig. 6). Attach the throttle cable A to bracket C and then to lever D, then fit spring P. Adjust the position of screw G to obtain a pedal travel of 75 mm as shown in figure 6 (corresponding to an angle of approximately 32) and secure in position with locknut Q. Hand throttle Attach the throttle cable B to bracket E by tightening screw N and positioning the locknuts O and then attach the cable to lever V. Connection of the accelerator pedal and hand throttle cables to the governor. Attach the throttle cable to bracket H of the governor by way of screw L, and secure with locknuts I; Connect the throttle cable to bracket M of the governor. Adjust the freeplay of the throttle cable by turning the screw L (after having undone the locknuts I) so that the cable is correctly tensioned, then re-tighten the locknuts. Attach the throttle cable S of the hand throttle to bracket T and then attach it to lever U. Then apply a force f = 5 to lever F and screw in self-locking nut R until the force applied is no longer capable of moving the lever. Move the hand throttle lever to the MAX position and manually push lever F to the end of its travel, then screw in screw N until the throttle cable is fully tensioned, then tighten locknuts O.
0,5
Fig. 6 - Adjustment of the external controls of the mechanical governor.
200
Controls
Mechanical controls
6
64
Control adjustment: screw in the screw with spring (Belleville) to obtain lever movement with a load of 35N. Turn the control lever backward and forward 2-3 times through approx. 22 and re-check the load on the lever, and reset the load to 45N.
Fig. 7 - Lift controls.
Fig. 8 - Ground-operated lift controls.
Fig. 9 - Auxiliary control valve controls.
201
6
68
Controls
Electro-hydraulic controls
Front P.T.O. clutch engagement control The front P.T.O. can only be engaged when the engine is running. Pressing the pushbutton engages the front P.T.O.. The integral light illuminates to indicate that the P.T.O. is engaged.
Rear P.T.O. clutch engagement control Activation and deactivation of the P.T.O. clutch are piloted by a dedicated control unit. The activate/deactivate control function is se-lected by pressing the button, which returns to the off position when released. An integral light shows when the function is activated, and serves also to indicate the type of fault that may affect the electrohydraulic control. When the engine is started, the warning light blinks to indicate that the control system is activated. The P.T.O. is engaged by pressing and holding the button for at least 2 se-conds. If the button is held for more than 10 seconds, or if there is a fault with the electrohydraulic control, the P.T.O. will be deactivated automatically. The control unit also disengages the P.T.O. every time the engine is swit-ched off. The rear P.T.O. can be engaged by pressing the ground-operated pushbutton located on the rear right-hand fender.
Differential lock engagement control Pressing the pushbutton engages the front and rear differential locks. The integral light illuminates to indicate that the locks are engaged. Pressing the pushbutton again disengages the locks.
Front-wheel drive engagement control Pushbutton with integral indicator light. Press to engage front-wheel drive; press again to disengage. N.B. Engagement of the above devices is also signalled by indicator lights on the console.
Gearbox The POWERSHIFT transmission offers the possibility to select each speed in or or (using the gear and range lever) without having to depress the clutch pedal simply by pressing the electro-hydraulic control switch. This is achieved by way of three multi-plate clutches.
Front and rear lift The front lift is operated by way of the control lever of the auxiliary service control valves located on the right of the driving seat, after first opening the shut-off cock in the oil delivery line to the front lift. The mechanical rear lift is operated by controls located to the right of the driving seat. For tractors equipped with electronic lifts, see p. 157 for a description of the controls.
202
Controls
6
68
R
F
4RM 2RM 8 Bar L R T OSPC 80 OR
210 Bar
Rear lift
(V=0.84 dm ) T
A - Main oil filter on supply circuit B - Hydraulic pump for auxiliary service control valve and power lift C - Hydraulic pump for hydrostatic steering and electro-hydraulic controls E - Hydrostatic steering control valve F - Steering cylinders G - Oil cooler H - Pressure control valves I - Gearbox lubrication L - Hydraulic power unit M - Differential locks N - 4WD engagement O - Rear P.T.O. clutch P - Auxiliary service control valve Q - Front lift hydraulic control valve R - Lifting cylinder
T
Lift Lower
100 Bar 2 WD 0.009.3141.4/11 150 Bar 4 WD 0.290.6310.4/10 T P
O M
Diff.look
Neutral
6 Bar
P.T.O.
Main shaft
B P
32 cc
N
Dis.
Rear
Inn.
Front
4 Wd
I
1 1
Dis.
Inn.
E 1.1
Sec. shaft
H.P.C.
A P T
A P T
A P T
190 Bar T
2.3719.730.0 11 bar
1 0
L
16 bar 5 bar
H
19 cm 3 47 L/min. 11 cm 3 27 L/min. Rh Lf 14 cm 3 35 L/min.
N.giri/min.pompe:2522
C
150 Micr.
Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)
Fig. 1 - Hydraulic circuit diagram (with electronic lift - STANDARD version).
203
6
68
Controls
F 6 U
(V=0.84 dm )
Rear lift
R
R 2.3729.320.0 OSPC 80 OR
4
210 Bar A
5
700 cc
70 Bar
2 V1
100 Bar 2 WD 0.009.3141.4/11 150 Bar 4 WD 0.290.6310.4/10 T P

S V2
1 O M
Rear free return
B 190 bar P-Ecc.
A T
P.T.O.
32 cc
A - Main oil filter on supply circuit B - Hydraulic pump for auxiliary service control valve and power lift C - Hydraulic pump for hydrostatic steering and electro-hydraulic controls D - POWERSHIFT E - Hydrostatic steering control valve F - Steering cylinders G- Delivery line filter H - Pressure control valves I - Gearbox lubrication L - Hydraulic power unit M - Differential locks N - 4WD engagement O - Rear P.T.O. clutch P - 6-way auxiliary service control valve Q - Front lift hydraulic control valve R - Lifting cylinder S - Shut-off valve for front lift T - Control valve for hydraulic trailer braking U - Front lift cylinders V1 - Anti-shock valve for front lift V2 - Lowering speed control valve for front lift Z - Hydraulic unloader (oil level pump)
Inn.
Dis.
Diff.look Rear
Main shaft
Front
4 Wd
Dis.
Inn.
Trailer brake
1.1
Sec. shaft
A P T
A P T
A P T 11 bar
G
P-Reg.
Y Tractor brake
2.3719.740.0/10
16 bar
5 bar
2.3719.810.0/10 (Italia) 2.3719.550.0/20 (Francia)
Freno inser.=13 bar,disinser.=5 bar =3 bar
P 1
3 11 cm 27 L/min. Rh Lf
11 cm 3 27 L/min. N.giri/min.pompe:2522 Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)

C
A H M
A L
25 Micr.
A
25 Micr.
Fig. 2 - Hydraulic circuit diagram (version with full complement of optional equipment).
204
Controls
6
68
A - Check valve B - Check valve C - Gearbox lubrication pressure control valve (5 bar) D - Sequence valve (16 bar) P - Pump T - Oil return L1- Gearbox lubrication L2- PTO lubrication 1 - Rear PTO 2 - Differential lock 3 - 4WD
Fig. 3 - Hydraulic circuit on right-hand side of gearbox.
205
6
68
Controls
The hydraulic injector A inserted in the transfer pipe B equalises the oil levels in the front and rear gearboxes. The injector allows oil in the front gearbox to flow easily into the rear gearbox.
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Flow used Pressure of jet Flow transferred
1,8 l/min 16 bar 25 l/min
A - Hydraulic injector B - Transfer pipe C - Front gearbox D - Rear gearbox E - Venturi pipe
Fig. 4 - Details of front and rear gearboxes.
206
Controls
6
68
A - Circuit transmission lubrification\PTO B - Flow control valve
Fig. 5 - Machine with electrohydraulic controls operating differential lock, four wheel drive and power take-off, equipped with POWERSHIFT.
207
6
68
Controls
A - Circuit transmission lubrification\PTO B - Flow control valve
Fig. 6 - Machine with electrohydraulic controls operating differential lock, four wheel drive and power take-off, not equipped with POWERSHIFT.
208
Controls
Specifications
6
68
Solenoid operated valve controlling four wheel drive engagement, differential lock, equipped with POWERSHIFT and the rear P.T.O. clutch. Code 2.3719.670.0 max. delivery rate l/min 12 max. pressure bar 210.
Before tightening the lock nut, smear the thread with LOCTlTE 242 (blue).
Fig. 7 - Solenoid valve
209
6
68
Specifications
Controls
Solenoid operated valve controlling the front P.T.O. clutch Code 007.5339.0/10 max. Delivery l/min 12 max. pressure bar 210.
Before tightening the lock nut, smear the thread with LOCTlTE 242 (blue).
Fig. 8 - Solenoid valve
210
Controls
6
68
Fig. 9 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - LOW clutch engagement
211
6
68
Controls
Fig. 10 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - MEDIUM clutch engagement
212
Controls
6
68
Fig. 11 - POWERSHIFT solenoid valves - HIGH clutch engagement.
213
6
68
Controls
Adjustment of front and rear differential lock control

Turn fork A and lock nut B to preload spring C, so as to obtain a distance X allowing contact with piston E (with spring D attached) when the piston is positioned flush with surface F (on version with electrohydraulic controls) or protrudes 18.5 mm (on version with mechanical controls). Also check that the shoes of the fork do not rub against the sides of the engagement sleeve.
For adjustment of engagement sleeve, see chapter on front-wheel drive. To make sure that the shifting of the piston of the rear differential look is of 12 mms.
Fig. 12 - Front and rear differential lock control.
214
Body
Driving position
Platform
7
71
Fig. 1 - Instrument panel.
Fig. 2 - Roll bar.
Fig. 3 - Structure of the platform.
215
7
71
Cab
general specifications
Body
Driving position
The cab responds to international standards in terms both of safety and of internal noise levels. The enclosure is equipped with ventilation, heating and air conditioning systems. Versions available are: Cab with ventilation and heating Cab with ventilation, heating and air conditioning
Fig. 4 - Structure of cab.
Fig. 5 - Front window glass and seals.
Fig. 6 - Front windows glass and seals.
Fig. 7 - Cab doors
216
Body
Driving position
7
71
Fig. 8 - Rear window.
Fig. 9 - Internal claddings
Fig. 10 - Cab roof.
Fig. 11 - Screenwash pump and liquid container.
217
7
71
Body
Driving position
Fig. 12 - Cab air filter unit 1 - Air filter 2 - Protective grille
Periodically (as dictated by operating conditions): clean the filter. To gain access to the filter, lower the protective grille,release the two filter clamp knobs, and remove The filter is cleaned as follows: blast with compressed air (6 bar max) in the direction opposite to that of normal filtration, until all accumulated dust has been dislodged; wash for about 15 minutes in a solution of detergent and water at 40 C; rinse clean in running water; leave to dry naturally at ambient temperature. Important: the filter must be replaced if damaged, or renewed routinely after cleaning 6 times.
Cab air filter
Screen wash
Periodically (as dictated by operating conditions): check the level of screenwash liquid in the plastic container located at the rear of the machine. In the event of the jet being rendered defective by an obstruction, this will be remedied generally by freeing the nozzle outlet with a pin. If necessary, reposition the nozzle so that the jet strikes the screen at the top of the sweep made by the wiper blade. It is good policy during winter months to add antifreeze solution to the screenwash liquid, or methyl alcohol. Warning: it is important that all glass in the cab is kept thoroughly clean. The rear view mirrors must always be kept clean and properly positioned.
Screen wipers (front and rear)
The wiper blade has a bayonet fitting. The blade is removed by lifting the catch of the central mounting.
218
Body
Driving position
7
71
Fig. 13 - Front screen wiper.
Fig. 14 - Rear screen wiper.
REMOVING THE DRIVING PLATFORM COMPLETE WITH CAB

NOTE: even though not strictly necessary, we advise that you remove the rear wheels to facilitate access to parts requiring disconnection. PROCEED AS FOLLOWS: Using a hydraulic jack, raise the rear of the tractor and place stands under the rear trumpet housings, then remove the rear wheels; Remove the top engine hood; Remove the front panel, disconnecting the leads of the front lights and then disconnect the positive (+) and negative(-) battery leads; Disconnect the leads from the starter motor and the engine oil pressure switch; Disconnect the bulkhead connector of the dashboard warning lights; Disconnect the leads on the right-hand side of the gearbox connected to the solenoid valves of the electro-hydraulic services and the POWERSHIFT unit; Disconnect the lead connected to the actuator of the electronic accelerator (only on tractors equipped with electronic governors); Disconnect the two tie-rods of the THROTTLE and ENGINE STOP from the governor; Disconnect the lead connected to wheel speed sensor positioned on the left-hand side of the front gearbox; Disconnect the three leads connected to the PTO selection sensors (540-775-1000 rpm); Disconnect the lead to the cab heating element from the heater alternator; Disconnect the oil pipe from the clutch control actuator; Disconnect the brake pipes from the separate brakes valves; Disconnect the lift control rods and remove them from the tractor; Disconnect the hydrostatic steering oil delivery and return pipes underneath the platform and on the right-hand side of the gearbox; Disconnect the three 3 control levers GEARCHANGE-INVERSOR-RANGE GEARS from underneath the platform, removing the retaining screws of each lever; Remove the two securing straps of the exhaust silencer and remove the silencer itself;
219
7
71
Body
Driving position
Detach the two pipe clamps positioned in the channel passing over the engine and disconnect the oil return pipe from the cooler and the oil pipe of front lift; Disconnect the two hydrostatic steering delivery-return pipes from the hydrostatic steering oil cooler; Disconnect the lead and remove the brake and clutch oil reservoir securing strap; Disconnect the handbrake control and the synchro PTO control rod on the left-hand side under the driving platform; Loosen the 4 screws securing the platform to the silent-blocks; Disconnect the air conditioning system pipes at the quick-fit couplings and then loosen the respective retaining nuts of the pipes connected to the cab so that they may be detached from their support brackets; Connect the cab to a suitable hoist and raise it, taking care that it disengages form the tractor, then remove it from the tractor;
Fig. 15 - Disconnecting the parts connectinga the cab to the tractor.
Fig. 16 - Lifting the cab off the tractor using a hoisting.
Remove cab.
WARNING: during the cab hoisting operation, check carefully that all the parts have been disconnected and that the cab disengages from the tractor. IMPORTANT: If the fuel tank is also to be removed, disconnect the flexible pipe from the rigid injector leak-off pipe.
Refitting the cab or driving platform.

Refitting: the reverse of removal.
BREAKAGE OF THE TOP ENGINE HOOD RELEASE CABLE To open the hood, insert a screwdriver between the hood and the grille to operate the hood catch. Push the screwdriver to the left (relative to the driving position) to release the hood.
Fig. 17 - Position the cab on suitable supports and proceed with the operations on the tractor.
220
Body
Driving position
7
71
Fig. 18 - Hood catch release control.
Fig. 19 - Condenser and filter/dryer unit.
Fig. 20 - Air conditioning system pipes from compressor to condenser and from the condenser to the filter/dryer.
Fig. 21 - Air conditioning system compressor
221
7
71
Body
Driving position
84
Fig. 22 - High visibility cab air filter
Fig. 23 - Coverings and outlets for air circulation in high visibility cab
Fig. 24 - High visibility cab roof.
222
Systems
Air conditioning
Ventilation
8
86
The ventilation unit is housed in the cab ceiling. To switch it on and adjust it, turn the electrical fan switch to the desired speed. The cab becomes slightly pressurized when the ventilation system is in operation, so that fresh air can enter only by way of the filter installed in the rear section of the cab roof. The fan switch can be operated only after the ignition key is inserted. The air flow can be regulated and directed by suitably positioning the air diffusers. Air can be taken in fresh from outside or recirculated from within the cab by way of the relative side inlets. Recirculation inlets fully closed: air is taken in entirely from outside the cab through the rear grille and filtered through a paper element positioned behind the grille. Either fully or partially open air recirculating grille: now the air is recirculated inside the cab. N.B. - It is very important that the air diffusers never be completely closed so as to allow for a steady air flow. To obtain a greater pressurization inside the cab, it is necessary to take the air from the outside, therefore the inside air recirculating grille should be fully closed.
Climate control system A - Condenser B - Temperature sensor C - Control switches D - 2400 Watt electric heating element (resistance across terminals 0.655 ohm) E - Defroster F - Ventilation unit
Heating System
The heater is switched on and adjusted by rotating the control knob at the roof console, then switching on the blower and setting the selector at the preferred speed. To warm the cab up quickly, the knob should be rotated fully clockwise and the blower set to speed III. The screen is demisted or defrosted by air directed through a slot vent. For defrost or fast demist, all other vents should be closed off. IMPORTANT: ventilation is provided by a single blower unit serving both the heating system and the air-conditioning system. After reaching the desired temperature adjust the system to suit your needs. N.B. - For ideal system operation, the engine must run at 1600 r.p.m. WARNING: Before starting the engine, make sure the system is off (by turning off the ventilation fan) so as not to overload the battery. After using the system at full power for a long period of time, never turn it off suddenly but let it first idle for about 20 seconds.
223
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
System configuration
The heating system consist of two units: 1 - Electric heater 3 (3 fig. 1) and blower unit (4 fig. 1) installed behind roof console. 2 - Power supplyng set, consisting of an auxiliary alternator (1 fig.1) located front of the engine and driven by a belt di rectly linked to the engine pulley. If the air does not come out from the diffusers right away as soon as the system is started, turn off immediately and identify the fault. N.B. Never turn on the heating system when working in dusty environments. In the event of the system failing to operate, check the fuse in the roof terminal box.
Fig. 1 - Configuration of ventilation and heating unit. 1 - Alternator 2 - Compressor 3 - 3 speed fan 4 - Electric resistence 5 - Evaporator 6 - Ventilator 7 - Dehydrating filter 8 - Condenser 9 - Air filter 10 - Recirculation inlets 11 - Pivotable air diffusers
224
Systems
Air conditioning
8
86
Temperature sensor
Ventilation switch
Temperature control potentiometer
Fig. 2 - Ventilation - heating system.
225
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Temperature control knob
Blower motor
Heating relay
Fig. 3 - Components of the ventilation - heating system.
226
Systems
Air conditioning
Air conditioning unit for cabs
8
86
The air conditioning system will operate only with engine running and the 3-speed electric fan unit switched on. Technical specifications type of refrigerant inlet circuit pressure (*): high bar normal bar low bar delivery circuit pressure quantity of refrigerant in circuit quantity of oil cc type of oil minimum pressure switch settingbar maximum pressure switch setting electric fan pressure switch setting tightening torque for pipeline fittings R 134 a 2,5 0,8 2,5 0,8 see page 350 1400 200 Suniso SP20 2 27 close at 15 bar - open at 11 bar 6 (58)
bar g
bar kgm (Nm)
(*) Pressure is influenced by ambient temperature; in normal operating conditions, with a temperature of 27 C, pressure in the delivery circuit will be 12 bar. Pressure in the same system will register at around 16 bar with an ambient temperature of 38 C.
1 - Electromagnetic coupling 2 - Compressor 3 - Condenser 4 - Fan 5 - Filter 6 - Sight glass 7 - Minimum pressure switch 8 - Electric fan control pressure switch 9 - Maximum pressure switch 10 - Expansion valve 11 - Evaporator 12 - Bulb 13 - Potentiometer
Fig. 4 - Diagram showing operation of air conditioning system.
227
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Operation and maintenance of the air-conditioning system

Air-conditioning process The cooler is provided with a three-speed fan which aspirates the air from the cab interior thereafter forcing it across the radiant block, thus making it cool down. The heat exchange occurring between the gaseous coolant and the air lapping the walls of the cooler radiant block results in air cooling.
The conditioned air undergoes a humidification process, as the low temperature inside the cooler causes a great deal of condensate to deposit on the external walls of the cooler. This condensate is subsequently conveyed under liquid state outside the cab through a special drainage system. The coolant at the cooler exit is still under gaseous state and has a temperature of 5 to 10C, in spite of the thermal exchange that has taken place, and then it is aspirated by the compressor again.
How to operate the system Before starting the air-conditioning system set the electric fan onto the desired speed. If the electric fan is switched off, the conditioning system will not start. The air-conditioning system is turned on by progressively rotating the control potentiometer clockwise, which is located in the front top section of the cab compartment. Rotate it anticlockwise to turn the system off. Warning: Before starting the engine, always make sure the air-conditioning system is switched off so that the battery will not be overloaded. When the air-conditioning system is operating, the pivotable air diffusers should never be completely closed. To obtain a quick cab environment cooling the following is recommended: Fully open the air recirculation grating and the pivotable air diffusers; Turn first the fan control and then the potentiometer control all the way out; Open the doors a few seconds so as to let the hot air out of the cab compartment if the tractor has stood under the sun radiation for a long period; Adjust the system according to personal preference when the desired temperature has been attained.
Checking the air-conditioning system charge System fully charged Sight glass clear
(refrigerant entirely in liquid state)
System fully discharged
(refrigerant entirely in gaseous state)
System not fully charged
Refrigerant in part gaseous and part liquid state
Sight glass cloudy (Bubbles or foam visible)
228
Systems
Air conditioning
8
86
Switching on the air conditioning
The system is activated by way of the 3 speed electric fan switch. Once the potentiometer is moved beyond the initial contact, a voltage of 12 V is generated between terminal B (red wire) and the brown wire terminal of the potentiometer. Engagement and disengagement is piloted by the temperature control potentiometer, and by the pressure switch located at the demoisturizing filter which cuts in respectively at: 2 bar and 27 bar.
Electromagnetic coupling
Pressure switches
Expansion valve Temperature sensor Electric fan unit
Pressure switch (positioned on demoisturizing filter). Comprises 3 switches: 1 controlling minimum pressure 1 controlling maximum pressure 1 controlling the electric fan of the condenser. The electric fan unit is interlocked to the pressure switch, which is set: - to close the circuit at 15 bar - to open the circuit at 11 bar
By-pass the pressure switch (place jumpers across the two terminals of the pressure switch and the 2 leads of the fan unit). If the fan operates: If the fan does not operate: Tracing faults in the electric fan unit Fault
Fan does not start
the pressure switch is defective a) check the fuse; b) check the relay.
Causes
Defective pressure switch Defective relay Defective electrical or mechanical
Action
Replace pressure switch Replace relay Replace fan unit
Relay (see electrical diagram)

Place a jumper across terminals 30 and 87a ; if the fan comes into operation, the relay needs to be replaced.
Water dripping from the points at which condensate drain lines are connected to the conditioning unit
The problem can be overcome by loosening the clip that fastens the drain line to the cab upright and pulling the tube downwards, so that the water can run away freely.
229
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Fig. 5 - Compressor, air conditioning system.
Fig. 6 - Demoisturizing filter, air conditioning system.
230
Systems
Air conditioning
Checking system
8
86
Check belt tension: under finger pressure applied to the mid point between the two pulleys, belt should not deflect more than 8 to 10 mm maximally. Always keep condenser fins duly clean. Cleaning should be carried out by a water or air jet (be careful not to bend the fins, use the special combing tool to straighten them again). Ascertain the compressor is firmly secured to tractor and the pulleys are properly aligned. Warning: When removing the strainer or the air-conditioning unit it is required to plug the inlet and the outlet pipes at once, this is to prevent both dust and moisture from entering. Even a few minutes exposure to the environmental humidity makes it necessary to replace the filter.
System safety elements

Minimum pressure switch (7 Fig. 4). Switches the system off when a failure causes the pressure to drop below 2 bar within the high pressure circuit. Maximum pressure switch (9 Fig. 4). Switches the system off when pressure exceeds 27 bar inside the circuit as a result of an excessive setting or a failure (high pressure area). Condenser fan control pressure switch (8 Fig. 4) Switches the condenser fan on when coolant attains the same pressure of the switch setting pressure. Note: The above three safety devices are grouped inside the thermostatic bulb located on the dehydrator filter. (figura 6 page 230).
Temperature regulation
Temperature regulation is obtained through the potentiometer, which automatically regulates the temperature of the air flow from the radiator according to the environmental temperature, through a combined action with the fan. A pressure switch located on the electric circuit opens and closes the electric circuit of the compressor electromagnetic coupling as a consequence of the potentiometer operation. When the circuit is open the pulley will be idling, on the other hand, when the circuit is closed, this will operate integrally with the compressor shaft.
231
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Charging the system

with recharging station p/n 5.9030.508.6
1 - High pressure gauge 2 - Low pressure gauge 3 - Low pressure valve 4 - Vacuum pump valve 5 - Metering pipeline valve 6 - Recharge pipeline valve 7 - Metering pipeline 8 - Vacuum pump pipeline 9 - Low pressure circuit recharge pipeline (blue) 10 - High pressure circuit recharge pipeline (red) 11 - Vacuum pump 12 - Electric switch 13 - Metering gauge 14 - Air bleed valves 15 - Metering unit 16 - Electrical power supply 17 - Compressor 18 - Refrigerant bottle 19 - Electric leak detector 20 - Electric heater element for refrigerant
Fig. 7 - Charging station for air conditioning circuit.
Filling the metering unit

Connect the refrigerant bottle to the metering unit by means of the high or low pressure hose (9 - 10 Fig. 7). Make certain that the valve (5 Fig. 7) is securely shut, then open the valve of the bottle. As the refrigerant flows into the metering unit, open and shut the air bleed valve (14, Fig. 7) intermittently. Read the value given by the hand of the metering unit pressure gauge (13, Fig. 7) and position the value against the indicator. Once 1400 grams of refrigerant have been transferred into the metering unit, close the valve of the bottle and detach the hose.
Refilling the system with oil

Connect the high pressure hose (9, Fig. 7) of the recharge station by way of the smaller diameter valve A (Fig. 8) positioned on the pipeline connecting with fitting D (Fig. 5) at the compressor (mounted in the engine compartment), and the low pressure hose (10, Fig. 7) of the station by way of the larger diameter valve B (Fig. 8) positioned on the pipeline connected with fitting S (Fig. 5) at the compressor; then activate the pump for 30 minutes approx to establish a vacuum in the circuit. The valves (3 - 4 - 5 - 6, Fig. 7) must remain open during this operation.
232
Systems
Air conditioning
8
86
Filling the system with oil Detach the low pressure hose from the recharge station and immerse the end in a graduated vessel containing 200 g approx of SUNISO SP 20 or equivalent oil. Allow 250 grams of the oil to be drawn into the circuit. Reconnect the hose to the station. Filling the system with R134a refrigerant When the low pressure gauge (2, Fig. 7) registers a minimum value (760 mm Hg) that remains stable for between 5 and 10 minutes, close the valve (5 Fig. 7). Open the filler valve (5, Fig. 7) and wait until the specified quantity (1800 g) of refrigerant has entered the system. In the event that the flow of refrigerant contained in the metering unit should be interrupted, warm the unit by means of the electric heater (20, Fig. 7), rechecking the pressure on the relative gauge. Should this not be sufficient, start the engine and throttle up to 1200 rev/min approx. Switch on the air conditioning system, and the R 134a refrigerant will be drawn directly into the circuit by the compressor. Close the filler valve (5, Fig. 7), and check with the leak detector that there is no escape of fluid from the fittings of the circuit. Should any leaks be detected, these must be eliminated, and the refrigerant reintroduced. Caution: In the event of oil leaks being detected, the circuit must be emptied completely and the entire recharge procedure recommenced.
Fig. 8 - Valves for connection of the tractor to the air conditioning recharge and service station. A - HIGH PRESSURE valve B - LOW PRESSURE valve
Final checks Once all the refrigerant has been put into the air conditioning circuit, check (with the engine running and the system in operation) that the high pressure gauge shows a value of between 15 and 20 bar, and the low pressure gauge a value between 1.5 and 2.5 bar.
233
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Verifying operation of the system after recharging

The system can be regarded as performing to its full capabilites when the delivery pressure gauge shows the following values: Ambient temperature C Delivery circuit pressure 27 32 35 38 40 43 12 bar 14 bar 15 bar 17 bar 18 bar 20 bar
The temperature values indicated are those likely to be encountered in the course of a typical twelve month period. Having established that the system is operating correctly, detach the high and lower pressure hoses of the station from the tractor and check again with the leak detector that there is no escape of fluid from any part of the system.
CAUTION: use only R 134a refrigerant as indicated on the data plate attached to the compressor of the air conditioning system.
Connecting the tractor to the air conditioning system recharge and service station.
Directions for tightening air conditioning system pipeline fittings.

All fittings have an internal seal. Screw the two parts of the fitting together by hand until the nut is finger tight, then holding the one part steady with a fixed wrench, apply a torque wrench to the nut and tighten to the value indicated in the table.
Type 6 7 8 9
Thread 5/8 - 18 UNF 3/4 - 16 UNF 7/8 - 14 UNF 1 1/16 - 14 UNF
Tightening torque 13,6 20,3 Nm (1,4 2,1 kgm) 33,5 40,0 Nm (3,3 4,0 kgm) 35,5 42,0 Nm (3,6 4,3 kgm) 40,3 47,3 Nm (4,1 4,8 kgm)
234
Systems
Air conditioning
8
86
Fig. 9 - Control switches 1 - Heating control. 2 - Air conditioning control. 3 - Ventilation control.
Fig. 10 - Receiver-drier located in cab roof. 1 - Level sight glass.
Fig. 11 - Ventilation - conditioning - heating.
235
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Fig. 12 - Components of the ventilation - conditioning - heating system.
Fig. 13 - Air handling unit for high visibility cab
236
Systems
Air conditioning
8
86
Fig. 14 - Condenser and fan unit for high visibility cab
237
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Fig. 15 - Ventilation-heating unit for high visibility cab
238
Systems
Air conditioning
8
86
Fig. 16 - Ventilation-heating unit components for high visibility cab
239
8
86
Systems
Air conditioning
Fig. 17 - Climatisation system components for high visibility cab
240
Systems
Diagnosing malfunctions LOW PRESSURE CIRCUIT
excessive pressure in the high pressure circuit compressor not operatin smoothly overcharged circuit
8
86
release system pressure through the compressor needle valves
Excessive pressure
too a low pressure in the high pressure circuit pressures inside both high and low pressure circuits tend to balance bubbles are visible through the filter inspection glass poor system efficiency expansion jammed up valve replace the valve
Normal pressure
excessive pressure in the high pressure circuit normal pressure in the high pressure circuit
air in the circuit
dehydrate the circuit
Out-of-setting compressor needle valves
replace the valves
after some working time
humidity inside the replace the filter and bleed the air. Recircuit charge the circuit replace the expansion valve change the part and replace the filter
Excessively low pressure
normal pressure in the high pressure circuit
expansion jammed up
valve
blocked circuit
low pressure in the high pressure circuit burnt fuse
discharged system
recharge system
replace the fuse
System fails to operate

disconnected wires connect the wires
Poor system efficiency
coolant leaks
inspect with leak-finder
stop the leakage and recharge the system
241
8
82
Hydraulic system
Systems
Hydraulic system
KEY TO FIGURE 1:
1 - Delivery line pressure test point 2 - Hydrostatic steering - maximum hydrostatic steering pressure (see instructions on page 186-192) 3 - 4WD steering cylinder pressure test point 4 - 2WD steering cylinder pressure test point 5 - Gearbox oil cooler 6 - Electro-hydraulic control unit (see instructions on page 92) 7 - Hydraulic power unit pressure test point (see instructions on page 40-92) 8 - Lubrication oil pressure test point 9 - POWERSHIFT 10 - Hydraulic unloader for equalising oil level in gearboxes 11 - Gearbox lubrication 12 - Rear P.T.O. (see instructions on page 92) 13 - Diff. lock hydraulic actuators 14 - 4WD engagement hydraulic actuator 15 - Trailer braking hydraulic control valve 16 - Pressure test point for trailer braking hydraulic control valve 17 - 8-way auxiliary control valve (see instructions on pages 250) 18 - Pressure relief valve oil pressure test point 19 - Kick-out oil pressure test point (see instructions on page 250) 20 - Hydraulic ways oil pressure test point 21 - Connected implement 22 - Rear lift 23 - Front lift antishock valve and accumulator (see instructions on page 174) 24 - Implement coupled to rear lift 25 - Lifting cylinder 26 - Rear lift antishock valve 27 - Front lift (see instruction on page 174) 28 - Lifting cylinder pressure test point 29 - Front lift antishock valve 30 - Shut-off valve for oil supply to front lift 31 - Free oil return line on rear of tractor (for hydraulic motors) 32 - Front P.T.O. control valve (see instructions on page 178)
242
Systems
Hydraulic system
ATTREZZO COLLEGATO
8
82
24
(V=0.84 dm )
3
4 28
Pressione dii esercizio Sollevatore anteriore con attrezzo collegato Pressione di esercizio
23
25
Rear lift
210 Bar
150 bar
L R
100 bar
8 Bar
700 cc
70 Bar
SOLLEVATORE ANTERIORE
A
27
26
OSPC 80 OR
GUIDA IDROSTATICA
100 Bar 2 WD 150 Bar 4 WD
SOLLEVATORE POSTERIORE
22 B
29 30
6/20 L/min.
18 20
B A B
190 bar 150 bar

ATTREZZO COLLEGATO
190 bar
Rear free return
19 21
A B A
T
5
Diff.look
Inn.
32 cc
Dis.
Front
Rear
4 Wd
12
PTO
Main shaft
16 11
Trailer brake
31
190 bar
P-Ecc.
Dis.
Inn.
DISTRIBUTORE IDRAULICO
17
13
A
14
A P T P
16 bar
A
1.1
Sec. shaft
1
T 11 bar
CENTRALINA COMANDI ELETROIDRAULICI
DISTRIBUTORE IDRAULICO PER LA FRENATURA DEL RIMORCHIO

Y Tractor brake
15
P-Reg.
7
16 bar
P
16 bar
5 bar
Freno inser.=13 bar,disinser.=5 bar
5 bar
T
8
AGROSHIFT
M
A 1 H
POWERSHIFT
99
19 cm 47 L/min. Rh Lf
11 cm 3 27 L/min. N.giri/min.pompe:2522 Rapp. 1/1.0732 (44/41)
13 bar
4 bar
A L
32
VALVOLA DI COMANDO PTO anteriore
10
V max 11.6 cm
F.to A2
25 Micr.
25 Micr.
V max 14.7 cm
V max 13.9 cm
Fig. 1 - Points provided for measurement of oil pressures in the tractors hydraulic system (see references on page 242).
243
8
82
Oil filters
Systems
Hydraulic system
The oil filters are mounted to the rigth hand side of the transmission at the rear end, and are easily replaced. Filters must be replaced whenever the blockage indicator lights up at the instrument panel. The filter blockage pressure switch is set at 0.5 bar, and must be replaced with another of identical specifications if faulty. Ensure that the replacement is stamped with the correct 0.5 bar setting. Whenever the transmission is stripped down for servicing or overhaul, clean the mesh strainer fitted to the bottom of the housing. CAUTION - Operate the lift system and auxiliary spool valves only when the blockage indicator is no longer alight. IMPORTANT - If during normal operation of the machine the clogging filter indicator should light up, remplace the filter.
Hydraulic pumps
The hydraulic pumps require no servicing or adjustment even after a long period of operation, although the splines of the pump shaft must be inspected with care: there must be no signs of wear or damage. Checking the relief valves of the hydraulic lift system Using tool 5.9030.520.4, check that the circuit pressure relief valve incorporated into the auxiliary spool valves is set at 190 bar and the system pressure shock valve at 210 bar. Remember that for the lift to function correctly, operating pressure in the circuit should not exceed 150 bar. The operating pressure can be measured by coupling a gauge to the oil pressure line between the directional control valve and the lift; for machines with assistor cylinders, the gauge can be coupled to the pressure line connecting with the assistors.
Fig. 3 - Pump assembly cover. A - Cover B - Pump case C - Base Fig. 4 - Pump case. B - Pump case.
Stripping the hydraulic pump

Removal The pump is secured to the tractor by 2 of the 4 bolts holding the pump assembly together. These two bolts are diagonally opposite. Having removed the pump from the vehicle, the components are freed by unscrewing the two remaining bolts which keep the cover A (see fig 3) clamped to the frame C and the pump body B; this done, remove the washers and then the cover. Using a proper pointed tool remove gasket E (Fig. 6 pag. 343), mark with a reference the position of the bearings with respect to the pump case and then take the bearings from their seats by pushing from inside outwards and being careful the connecting pin neither be lost nor damaged.
A - Snap-ring B - Seal ring C - Cover D - Gasket E - Gasket F - Gasket G - Feather key
H - Bearing I - Bushes L - Driver gear M - Pump case N - Gasket O - Driver gear P - Cover
Block the pump case in a vice as shown in figure and then remove snap ring F . Remove the seal ring.
Fig. 5 - Pump disassembly.

B - Pump case C - Base D - Bearings G - Gears I - Screw
Fig. 2 - Component parts of the hydraulic pump assembly
244
Systems
Hydraulic system
WARNING - If pump bearings, pinions or casing are found to be damaged or worn, these parts cannot be repaired because of their construction tolerances. When performing checks, because of an oil leakage or an excessive and irregular delivery pressure, only the gaskets indicated in the spare parts lists can be replaced. After checking the pump for wear due to abrasion from impurities and for any other visible damage, when reassembling use, in any case, a new set of gaskets. It is also indispensable to mark each single part to reinstall correctly.
8
82
D - Bearing E - Gasket
Inspections and checks After removing all gaskets, both on the covers and in the pump casing, carefully clean all parts using a proper solvent. Carefully dry all parts with compressed air; this is to avoid that any solvent residuals may damage the gaskets on reassembly. Visually check the pump case internally and ascertain it is not damaged. Check both pinions and bearings for wear, abrasion due to foreign matters or cavitation. NOTE: Should any damage, wear or in any case a component replacement be required, with the exception of the gaskets, the entire pump must be replaced. WARNING: Do not press onto the stop ring to prevent any damage. + 0, 05 Use a dial gauge to make sure the stop ring height be 21 , - 0,15 mm, otherwise replace taking care the new stop ring installed be measured accordingly. If reading is above specification fit the new ring in reversed position.
Fig. 6 - Internal pump case parts.
C - Housing D - Bearing G - Gear H - Bush Fig. 7 - Pump gears.
A - Stop ring B - Gasket C - Bearings
C - Base F - Snap ring Fig. 9 - Inside seals. Fig. 8 - Snap ring removal.
245
8
82
Systems
Hydraulic system
1064-48
A - Seal ring Fig. 10 - Seal ring. Fig. 11 - Piloted check valve components
Assembly Before assembly all parts shall be oiled. Correctly position the gaskets in their seats paying particular attention stop ring A and gasket B be correctly fitted into bearings C (see fig. 9). Coat the cover inner side with a slight grease layer then apply to pump case and tightening the securing screws to the recommended torque. WARNING:The securing screws should be tightened gradually making also sure that rotors are not hampered in their movements. Tightening torques Pump cover securing screws: - M8 2 kgm (20 Nm) - M10 5 kgm (49 Nm) Restore the recommended oil level and then bleed the air from the hydraulic circuit.
Fig. 12 - Connection of check valve to hydraulic control valve.
NOTE: To ensure correct operation of the check valve, it must be connected to the element of the control valve fitted with DETENT (as shown in the figure ) 246
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves
Auxiliary spool valves are used to control hydraulically operated external implements. The controls consist in 2 levers for a 4-way valve, or 3 levers for a 6-way valve. The levers are located on the drivers right hand side. Auxiliary hydraulic spool valves:
8
88
Version 1: 4 way, 2 way double acting - 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with spool detent Version 2: 6 way, 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with kickout - 2 way double acting convertible to single acting, with spool detent (with perfect sealing valve) - 2 way double acting with float position - throttle valve (FLOW DIVIDER) with tap in cab - quick coupling for free discharge. NB: with the auxiliary spool valve in use (unless a Flow Divider is incorporated), the operation of the hydraulic lift system remains inhibited (except in FLOAT position). Important: the lever should be recentred to the neutral position as soon as the external actuator has reached its stroke limit, to ensure that the hydraulic circuit does not remain pressurized any longer than strictly necessary; prolonged pressure will result ultimately in the hydraulic system being subjected to hazardous levels of stress. Auxiliary spool valves levers must always be in the neutral position when external services are not in use.
Fig. 1 - 4-way auxiliary control valves. A - Quick coupling for free discharge
247
8
88
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Fig. 2 - 4-way auxiliary control valves. A - Quick coupling for free discharge B - Pressure relief valve.
248
Systems
Auxiliary systems
8
88
NOTE : The 6-way auxiliary spool valve incorporates a FLOW DIVIDER which ensures that oil can be delivered at a constant flow rate of between 3 and 42 l/min to the 2-way kickout section (first valve alongside the flow divider). The tap has set in the cab, to left hand of the place of guide. NB: Even when the flow divider is shut off by turning the knob fully in the direction marked (- ), a residual flow of oil will continue to reach the valve at a steady rate of 3 l/min.
Float
5 5 5 5
5 5
B
KICK-OUT DETENT.
B
FLOAT
B
190 bar
A T
P-Ecc.
P-Reg.
Fig. 3 - 6-way hydraulic control valve.
A - Pressure relief valve B - Screws to convert from double-acting to single-acting control valve C - Perfect seal valve P - Hydraulic pump N - To rear lift T - Return
249
8
88
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Checking the pressure relief valve setting
The setting of the pressure relief valve must always be 190 bar, and can be checked by fitting gauge p/n 5.9030.513.0 to either of the valve work ports and operating the relative lever. If the gauge reading is not correct, adjust the pressure relief valve see pages 248 - 249 NOTE: Remember that the purpose of the relief valve is to maintain pressure in the hydraulic lift circuit within a given safety limit, in this instance 190 bar.
Fig. 4 - Checking the operating pressure of auxiliary spool valves. A - Quick coupler B - Implement oil line C - Tee
Checking the operating pressure (see fig 4).

To verify the operating pressure of an implement connnected to the work ports of the auxiliary spool valves, proceed as follows: Connect a Tee between quick coupler A and the implement pressure line B. Connect pressure gauge p/n 5.9030.513.0 to the Tee. Start the engine, apply the parking brake in the interests of safety, and operate the spool valve connected to the implement. The gauge will show the operating pressure currently registering in the circuit. The operating pressure depends on the weight of the hitched implement, and should not normally exceed 150 bar.
Fig. 5 - A conversion screw allowing conversion from double to single acting operation; B conversion screw lock washer.
Conversion of auxiliary spool valves from double acting to single acting operation (see fig 5)
Where particular requirements dictate, a double acting spool valve can be converted to operate in single acting mode. To effect the conversion from double to single acting, hold the fitting secure and loosen the screw A by between 4 and 5 turns. NOTE: Once slack, the screw is best rotated by hand to avoid applying excessive force and unseating the lock washer B ; if this were to happen, the washer would find its way into the hydraulic circuit and disallow normal operation of the lift system. The conversion from single to double acting operation is effected by tightening the screw A fully.
Checking the surface of the valve spools

Check that the machined surface of the spool is free of scoring or any other kind of wear.
Fig.6 - Longitudinal section through 4/6-way spool valve.
250
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Trailer hydraulic braking system
8
89
The tractor can be equipped with a trailer hydraulic braking system on request. For trailers with safety brake (ITALY version), the system is equipped with a specific distributor. The oil used is drawn from the tractors main hydraulic system by a special distributor. This distributor is activated by a valve which is hydraulically connected to the tractor hydrostatic braking system control.
Trailer hydraulic braking distributor unit

Specifications (see Fig. 2, page 254)
P N B T Y E
supply services connections trailer brake connection oil discharge trailer braking system connection parking brake signaling pressure switch
Supply Constant pressure in B (only for distributor ITALY version) Maximum pressure in B (only for distributor ITALY version) Maximum operating pressure in N (distributor ITALY version) Working temperature Supply in P Pilot Y (supplied from below)
l/min bar bar bar C
20 80 12,5 2 135 5 200 -20 + 100 with hydraulic mineral oil with hydraulic mineral oil
251
8
89
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Fig. 1 - Oil lines connected to directional control valve of hydraulic trailer braking system. A - bistable valve (fitted only in conjunction with ITALY version of the control valve) allows trailer brake to be applied even when tractor brakes are operated independently.
252
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Use of the tractor with CUNA 341/01 hydraulic trailer braking
8
89
The trailer hitched to a tractor equipped with this type of trailer braking requires a constant pressure of 12.5 2.5 bar in order to release the parking brake ( spring operated). Therefore, before hitching or unhitching the trailer, this pressure must be eliminated at the coupler by switching off the engine, or better still, by applying the tractor handbrake. The female quick-action couplers are specially-designed to remain connected if the internal pressure exceeds 1.5 bar. Unless the driver waits the few seconds required to eliminate the pressure, the coupling or uncoupling operation will be extremely difficult if not impossible. The correct type of female coupler inserts are marked FASTER VFBO/1815F and can also be identified by the release ring, which is 44 mm in diameter and 38 mm long. When uncoupling is performed to hastily, the pressure in the trailer's hydraulic system will lock the coupling, and in addition to compromising the efficiency of the emergency brake, it will prevent re-coupling. In this event: Uncouple the push-pull coupler which passes through the reservoir mounted on the trailer, by pulling on the pipe connecting the trailer to the tractor. Discharge the pressure. Re-couple Special recommendations In order to change from parking brake applied from the trailer (tractor handbrake in lowered position) to efficient service braking, the tractor needs to send large quantities of oil to the cylinders. Some time is therefore required before trailer braking reaches full efficiency and therefore, should it be necessary to use the service brake urgently, after having released the parking brake, accelerate the engine to maximum speed before releasing the tractor handbrake. In general, remember that if the engine revs are high, braking will be more responsive. Users who have trailers with "France" type non-type approved hydraulic braking may adapt the SAFIM brake valve to this type of operation by unscrewing the hex socket screw on the pilot side cover by three turns (6 mm Allen wrench). In this way, the 12.5 bar pressure is eliminated, the red light remains on, only going out on braking. It is dangerous to leave the valve by-pass lever in the braking position; trailers which do not conform to the Cuna 341/01 standard are not equipped any protection against this. The lever on the valve serves to completely by-pass the valve when trailers are not to be hitched to the tractor for long periods (on trailers which conform to the Cuna 341/01 standard, even if the lever is left in the OFF position, the trailer parking brake is not released).
253
8
89
Starting
Systems
Auxiliary systems
1 - Trailer parking brake control knob (present only on mechanically operated valves) A - Rotation for engagement B - Rotation for disengagement
Fig. 2 - Control valve for hydraulic trailer braking.
No special precautions are required, simply start the engine and allow time(10-15 seconds) for the hydraulic pipes to fill with oil before operating the brake pedal. Checking operation The red indicator light illuminates when the pressure at the trailer brake coupling is less than 10 bar; the light therefore gives an indication of whether the system is functioning correctly. During normal operation, providing the handbrake is released and the brake pedal is not depressed, the red light should be off. When the handbrake is applied, the light will stay on even if the brake pedal is pressed. The light also comes on if the engine stalls under load, as there will be no pressure at the trailer brake coupling. In normal operation with the handbrake released, on pressing the brake pedal it is possible to hear the pump as it increases the pressure. To test the pressures, apply a pressure gauge with a minimum full-scale value of 160 bar to the trailer brake coupling.
254
Systems
Auxiliary systems
8
89
Fig. 3 - Operation of the hydraulic control valve 1 - Brake ON/OFF control 2 - Lift 3 - Trailer brake 4 - Trailer brake lever
255
8
89
Systems
Auxiliary systems
The pressure readings to be taken are: Engine running with handbrake released: 12.5 2.5 bar (10 to15 bar) With handbrake applied: 0 bar With handbrake released and brake pedal depressed, the pressure will rise from 12.5 to 130 10 bar (120 to 140 bar). N.B.: the valve is factory-set by Safim. ( ) values in brackets refer to pressure limits specified by the Cuna standard.
Malfunctions Insufficient pressure

Check the position of the valve by-pass lever, which should be aligned with the axis of the valve.
For valves with mechanical parking brake control
Release the handbrake lever. Check that the lever on the valve returns to the limit stop when the handbrake is lowered. Check that the microswitch is functioning correctly (operated when the handbrake is lowered).
For electrically controlled valves
Check the power fuse and the power supply in general. Check the connections to the coil on the two opposite poles. If the coil is energised, by loosening the retaining nut it is possible to feel the pull of the magnet; the coil will be very hot.
The valve pressure rises very slowly
Clean the holes of the main piston; to access the piston, remove the plug on the opposite side to the pilot side (27 mm wrench). Withdraw the piston and blow clean. Close the hex socket adapter screw (France type).
The parking brake is slow to release
Clean the holes (by washing and blowing) the rapid discharge piston, which can be accessed by first removing the solenoid valve and the adapter. Warning: the valve has been tested and calibrated correctly prior to delivery. Before attempting to adjust the springs and the shims, to solve pressure problems, clean all the holes of the piston and solenoid valve with petrol and compressed air. The pressure settings are regulated by way of shims, which can be accessed by removing the pilot valve and withdrawing the 25 mm diameter piston. The internal spring regulates the pressure of 12.5 2.5 bar, while the outer spring regulates the pressure of 130 10 bar.
Low and high pressure settings
256
Systems
Auxiliary systems
8
89
Fig. 4 - View of the hydraulic control valve. 1 - Lever position with handbrake fully applied 2 - Start of trailer braking 3 - Lever position with handbrake released
257
8
89
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Installing the hydraulic braking valve for trailers equipped with safety brake (ITALY version)
For correct valve and related controls installation, it is necessary to proceed as follows: Secure the distributor to the tractor and connect the various oil tubes; Bring the tractor parking brake lever to position A (4th notch of the toothed sector) and carry out the parking brake adjustment so that, in this position, the tractor is braked. Then bring the parking brake lever to position B (stop notch). Keeping the parking brake lever in position B, hook the hose fork to lever Y , pushing it against stop screw X. Then connect the hose to lock plate C by means of the special adjusting nuts. Under these conditions, acting on the parking brake hand lever of the tractor synchronizes the tractor and trailer stationary braking. Connect the wiring of the pressure switch, that is screwed on the distributor, to the specific warning light installed on the instrument panel of the dashboard. Then, when engaging the parking brake, the tractor warning light and the trailer warning light will light up at the same time. CAUTION: When the trailer is hitched to the tractor the knob on the control valve must always be turned counter-clockwise to position "1". When a trailer is not hitched or during trailer hitching/unhitching operations, the lever on the control valve must always be in the position "0". On the hydraulic distributor is placed a sensor (E Fig, 5). This sensor active the warning light on the dashboard, when the trailer brakes is operated.
Fig. 5 - Diagram illustrating adjustment of brake control valve for trailer equipped with safety brake (ITALY version)
258
Systems
Auxiliary systems
8
89
Fig. 6 - Components of the hydraulic control valve - FRANCE version.
259
8
89
Systems
Auxiliary systems
Fig. 7 - Components of the hydraulic control valve - FRANCE version
260
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
ELECTRICAL WIRING AGROPLUS 60 (up serial number 1017) - 70 (up serial number 2773) - 80 CONTENTS
THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT ..................................................................................263 HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT......................................................................................264 1. 1.1 1.2 1.3 INTRODUCTION .........................................................................................................265 List of wiring looms....................................................................................................265 Definition of components and symbols .....................................................................266 General rules.............................................................................................................266 1.3.1 Modification of the tractors electrical/electronic circuits ............................266 1.3.2 Main wiring faults .......................................................................................266 1.3.3 Removal, refitting and drying of connectors and wiring .............................266 Diagnostic instruments..............................................................................................268 Wire colour codes .....................................................................................................268 INDICES ......................................................................................................................269 Component description index....................................................................................269 Component code index .............................................................................................274 Connector index ........................................................................................................278 COMPONENTS ..........................................................................................................286 Connector layouts .....................................................................................................268 Component technical data ........................................................................................288 Pinouts and descriptions of electronic control units ..................................................296 3.3.1 HML control unit.........................................................................................296 3.3.2 Power lift control unit .................................................................................297 3.3.3 Analogue instrument panel ........................................................................298 3.3.4 Digital instrument panel .............................................................................300
1.4 1.5 2. 2.1 2.2 2.3 3. 3.1 3.2 3.3
4. SYSTEMS ...................................................................................................................302 4.1 Earthing points ..........................................................................................................303 4.2 Starting and preheating.............................................................................................305 4.3 Lights - steering column switch unit (platform)..........................................................306 4.4 Lights - steering column switch unit (standard cab) ..................................................307 4.5 Lights - steering column switch unit (high-visibility cab)............................................308 4.6 Accessories - Diagnostics (platform).........................................................................309 4.7 Accessories - Diagnostics (standard cab).................................................................310 4.8 Accessories - Diagnostics (high-visibility cab) ..........................................................311 4.9 Wipers (standard cab)...............................................................................................312 4.10 Wipers (high visibility cab).........................................................................................314 4.11 Front instrument panel ..............................................................................................312 4.12 Radio (version with standard cab).............................................................................315 4.13 Radio (version with high-visibility cab) ......................................................................315 4.14 Heater (standard cab) ...............................................................................................316 4.15 Heater (high-visibility roof) ........................................................................................317 4.16 Heating and air conditioning (standard cab) .............................................................318 4.17 Heating and air conditioning (high-visibility roof).......................................................319 4.18 Braking system - trailer braking.................................................................................320 4.19 HML transmission .....................................................................................................321 4.20 Electronic lift..............................................................................................................322 4.21 Rear and front PTOs .................................................................................................323
261
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
LAYOUTS, ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS, CONNECTOR POSITIONS Engine wiring ....................................................................................................................... 325 Central wiring....................................................................................................................... 333 Front light wiring (Version with cab) .................................................................................... 335 FULLDRIVE wiring .............................................................................................................. 349 Electronic lift wiring.............................................................................................................. 353 Standard cab Roof wiring........................................................................................................................... 359 Worklights wiring ................................................................................................................. 367 Screenwash pumps wiring................................................................................................... 373 Windscreen wiper wiring...................................................................................................... 375 Speaker wiring..................................................................................................................... 375 Roof power supply wiring .................................................................................................... 381 Heater wiring ....................................................................................................................... 387 Air conditioning wiring.......................................................................................................... 393 Air conditioning fan wiring.................................................................................................... 399 High-visibility roof Roof wiring........................................................................................................................... 403 Worklights wiring ................................................................................................................. 409 Screenwash pump wiring .................................................................................................... 413 Windscreen wiper wiring...................................................................................................... 415 Speaker and radio wiring..................................................................................................... 417 Roof power supply wiring .................................................................................................... 423 Heater wiring ....................................................................................................................... 429 Air conditioning wiring.......................................................................................................... 435 Air conditioning fan wiring.................................................................................................... 441
262
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
THE STRUCTURE OF THE UNIT

For easier consultation, this unit has been divided into the following chapters:
1. Introduction
Contains a brief description of the terminology used, the procedures to follow for troubleshooting and repairs, and the instruments required for troubleshooting.
2. Indices
Contains the indices arranged by connector name, by component code and by component description.
3. Components
Contains the layouts of the connectors used in the electrical system, descriptions of the components installed on the tractor, the technical data necessary for functional testing and the pinouts of the electronic control units.
4. Systems
Contains the electrical diagrams of the tractors systems.
5. Layouts, electrical wiring diagrams, connector positions

Contains the layouts, the wiring diagrams and the positioning of connectors on the tractor.
263
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
HOW TO CONSULT THE UNIT

A B
2
9 12 X10 0.011.6955.4 Interruttore comando PTO posteriore 2.7659.108.0 42 X10 2 40
How to consult the table

The quickest way to determine the cause of a malfunction of a component (e.g. the starter motor) is to check all the components in the system in which the component is incorporated. The example given on this page assumes a malfunction of the starter motor, which fails to start the engine. 1 -Look in paragraph 2.1. Component description index (figure A) for the starter motor and identify the system in which it is incorporated. The system is indicated in the column System (para 4.xx) and in this case is 2 (figure A). 2 - 2 -Consult paragraph 4.2 Starting (figure B), in which all the components in the system are indicated in the electrical diagram; these components are accompanied by numbers that correspond to the key on the same page. 3 - 3 -Check all the components in the system, starting, for example, with the switch 12. 4 -Look in paragraph 2.1. Component description index (figure A) for Rear PTO control switch and check in the column Technical description (para 3.2.xx) if there is a technical description of the component (in this case it is given at n 42 of the paragraph 3.2 Component technical data) (figure C). Make a note also of the name of the connector to which the component is connected (in this case X10). Only if the position of the component is not known 5 - Look in paragraph 2.3 Connector index (figure D) for the name of the connector to which the component is connected (in this case X10) and note down the wiring loom in which it is incorporated (in this case 0.011.6955.4 or 0.011.6958.4) and the type of connector (in this case 6). 6 - 6 -Look for the wiring loom in chapter Layouts, electrical wiring diagrams, connector positions using the main index . 7 - 7 -Look for the name of the connector in the photos attached to the electrical diagrams and determine its position on the tractor from the drawing (figure E). NOTE. The electrical diagrams (figure F) contain the names of the connectors and the descriptions used in all the tables in chapter 2. 8 - 8 -Using the data contained in the paragraph 3.2 Component technical data (figure C) at position n 42, check the operation of the switch. If the pinout of the connector is not known, look in paragraph 3.1 Connector layouts (figure G) for the number found in the column Type of paragraph 2.3 Connector index.
Motorino davviamento
2.9619.360.0
X37
22
X10
42
X10
12
Interruttore comando PTO posteriore
D F
X10
0.011.6855.4
X10
0.011.6955.4
2.7659.108.0
Interruttore comando PTO posteriore
G
6
0.011.6855.4
264
Systems
Electrical system
1. INTRODUCTION
8
84
This section of the workshop manual is intended as a practical guide to troubleshooting the tractors electrical and electronic systems. The following pages provide the technician with all the necessary information about the tractors systems and components. Due to the possible time difference between the introduction of technical modifications (in line with our policy of continuous product improvement) and the corresponding amendment of our printed documentation, we are obliged to state that the data contained in this document are subject to modification and as such are not binding. 1.1 LIST OF WIRING LOOMSI DESCRIPTION Cab accessories wiring POWERSHIFT lever wiring Roof power supply wiring Roof power supply wiring Speaker wiring Speaker and radio wiring Air conditioning wiring Air conditioning wiring Front light wiring Central wiring Worklights line wiring Engine wiring Electronic lift wiring Roof wiring Roof wiring Screenwash pump wiring Screenwash pumps wiring Heater wiring Heater wiring Windscreen wiper wiring Windscreen wiper wiring Air conditioning fan wiring Air conditioning fan wiring Standard roof High-visibility roof High-visibility roof Standard roof Standard roof High-visibility roof Standard roof High-visibility roof Standard roof High-visibility roof High-visibility roof Standard roof High-visibility roof Standard roof High-visibility roof Standard roof High-visibility roof Only with cab NOTES Standard roof CODE 0.009.7851.4/40 0.011.7972.4 0.009.7852.3/40 0.011.3761.3/30 0.011.0729.4/10 0.011.3596.3/30 0.010.2130.1 0.010.2562.1 0.010.5582.3/01 0.010.5303.4/60 0.011.3595.3/10 0.009.7624.4/50 0.011.6943.4/10 0.009.7850.4/50 0.011.3606.4/51 0.011.3743.3 0.009.7854.3/10 0.010.2123.2 0.010.2558.1 0.010.4516.3/01 0.011.3597.3/03 0.009.7853.3/21 0.011.3610.3/20
265
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
1.2 DEFINITION OF COMPONENTS AND SYMBOLS To prevent any misunderstanding or ambiguity, listed below are definitions for some of the key terms used in this unit. TERM Connector Temperature sensor Pressure sensor Position sensor Pressure switch Thermostat Switch Solenoid valve DESCRIPTION Element used to connect two components (e.g. wiring-switch, wiring-wiring) Electrical component that converts the temperature of a medium (air, water, oil, etc.) into a voltage or resistance Electrical component that converts the pressure of a medium (air, water, etc.) into a voltage or resistance Electrical component that converts the angular or linear position of an object into a voltage Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the operating pressure in the circuit in which it is installed Switch that changes state (opens or closes a contact) according to the temperature of the medium in which it is immersed. Mechanical component that opens or closes one or more electrical contacts. Valve operated by applying electrical current to a coil (or solenoid)
Chapter 3.2 Component descriptions contains the wiring diagrams for some switches and pushbuttons. The following symbols are used for clarity: SYMBOL DESCRIPTION Contact between pins CLOSED (stable switch position) Contact between pins CLOSED (non-stable switch position) LED warning light Warning light 1.3 GENERAL RULES The inspection, maintenance, troubleshooting and repair operations are essential to ensure that the tractor continues to operate correctly over time and to prevent malfunctions and breakdowns. The scope of this paragraph is to describe repair procedures and to help improve the quality of repairs. 1.3.1MODIFICATION OF THE TRACTORS ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC CIRCUITS The manufacturer prohibits any modification or alteration of the electrical wiring for the connection of any non-approved electrical equipment or components. In particular, if it is discovered that the electrical system or a component has been modified without authorisation, the Manufacturer will accept no liability for any damage to the vehicle and the vehicle warranty will be invalidated. 1.3.2MAIN WIRING FAULTS a. Poor contact between connectors The main causes of poor contact between connectors are incorrect insertion of the male into the female connector, deformation of one or both connectors, and corrosion or oxidisation of the pin contact surfaces.
266
Systems
Electrical system
b.
8
84
Welding or crimping of defective pins The pins of the male and female connectors make good contact in the crimped or welded area, but the wires are subjected to excessive tension, leading to breakage of the insulation or the wire itself and a poor connection. Disconnecting wiring If components are disconnected by pulling on the wires, or if components are removed with the wires still connected, or if the wiring is subject to a heavy impact this could damage the connections at the pins, breaking strands of wire. Penetration of water in connectors The connectors are designed to prevent penetration of liquids (water, oil etc.); however, it is possible that when the tractor is cleaned using high-pressure water or steam, water could penetrate or condense in the connectors. As the connectors are designed to prevent liquid penetration, any water that does get in will not be able to drain out, and thus may cause shortcircuits across the pins. For this reason it is good practice to dry the connectors with a low pressure jet of compressed air after washing the tractor. Oil or dirt on connectors Oil or grease on the connectors or pins can create a poor contact (oil and grease are nonconductors). Clean the connectors thoroughly using a dry cloth or a low pressure jet of compressed air and use specific products (deoxidising sprays, etc.) to degrease the contacts. # # Take care not to bend the pins when cleaning them. Use dehydrated but not lubricated compressed air.
c.
d.
e.
1.3.3REMOVAL, REFITTING AND DRYING OF CONNECTORS AND WIRING a. Disconnection of connectors When disconnecting wiring, pull on the connectors rather than on the wires themselves. For connectors that are held in position with screws or levers, fully loosen the screws, then pull on the connector. For connectors that are clipped together, fully depress the clip then pull the connector apart. After disconnecting connectors, cover them in a waterproof material to prevent dirt or moisture getting into the contacts. Connecting the connectors Check the condition of the connectors: Make sure the pin contact surfaces are free of water, dirt or oil. Check that the connectors are not deformed and that the pins are not corroded. Check that the connector casings are not damaged or split. # If a connector is contaminated with oil or grease, or if moisture has penetrated the casing, clean it as described in paragraph 1.3.2. # If a connector is damaged, deformed or broken, replace it with a new one. When connecting connectors, make sure they are properly aligned before applying any force. For connectors with clips, insert the two halves until they clip together. Cleaning and drying wiring When wiring is dirty or contaminated with oil or grease, clean it with a dry cloth, or, if necessary, with water or steam. If the wiring has to be cleaned with water, avoid directing the water or steam jet on the connectors; if water penetrates the connector, proceed as described in paragraph 1.3.2. # Check that the connector is not short circuited by humidity by testing the continuity across the pins.
b.
c.
267
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
# d. After checking the connector is good condition, degrease the contacts using a deoxidising product.
Renewal of damaged electrical components. When replacing electrical components (fuses, relays, etc.), use only original parts supplied by the manufacturer. When replacing fuses, check that the new fuse conforms to DIN 72581 standards and in particular: - fuse F1 (100A) DIN 72581/2 - bayonet fuse (F2, F3, etc.) DIN 72581/3C The fitting of replacement fuses that do not comply with these standards will invalidate the warranty with immediate effect and release the manufacturer from any liability. When replacing relays, make sure that the new relay conforms to the standards marked on the original relay.
1.4 DIAGNOSTIC INSTRUMENTS For the correct diagnosis of any faults in tne tractor s electrical system, the following instruments are required: 1 - Digital multimeter with the following minimum characteristics: AC VOLT 0-600 DC VOLT 0-600 OHM 0-32M AC AMP 0-10 DC AMP 0-10 2 - All Round Tester 1.5 WIRE COLOUR CODES COLOUR CODES A B C G H L Light blue White Orange Yellow Grey Dark blue COLOUR CODES M N R S V Z Brown Black Red Pink Green Purple
268
Systems
Electrical system
2. INDICES
2.1 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION INDEX Component code 2.7099.770.0 2.9439.420.0 2.9439.460.0/10 2.9439.440.0/10 Tech. descr. (Chap. 3.2.x)
8
84
Component description Cigar lighter Alternator ISKRA 65A Alternator ISKRA 85A Heating alternator ISKRA 70A RH speaker LH speaker Radio Horn Glowplug Preheating control unit Rear lift control unit Hazard lights control unit HML control unit Heater settings control unit Fan speed selector switch Fan speed selector switch Air conditioning compressor Compressor for drivers seat air suspension Diagnostics connector Analogue instrument panel Digital instrument panel Lights selector switch Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF) 4WD control solenoid valve High range control solenoid valve (HI) Low range control solenoid valve (LO) Preheating control solenoid valve Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO) Lift lowering solenoid valve Front PTO solenoid valve Lift raising solenoid valve
Connector X2 X65 X65 X109/B+/BX133 X132 X86-X131
System (Chap. 4.xx) 6-7-8 2 2 14-15-16-17 12-13 12-13 12-13 3-4-5 2 2 6-7-8-20 3-4-5 19 14-15-16-17 14-16 15-17 16-17 6-7-8 6-7-8-20 2-3-4-5-1118-19-21 2-3-4-5-1118-19-21 3-4-5-6-7-8 19 19 19 19 2 21 20 21 20
2.8419.003.0 01175757 01178976 0.011.2992.4/20 2.8639.007.0 0.010.8869.4/20 0.007.6766.4 0.009.4743.1 0.010.2528.1 0.009.7660.4 0.007.6273.4
X61 X57 X43 X71 X40 X72 X136 X139 X154 X59 X12 X42
2.8339.212.0/10 2.8339.153.0/30 0.009.6491.4 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 01179366 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.460.0 2.3729.400.0 2.3729.460.0 10 39 8 9 11 12
X3 X3 X36 X16 X15 H L X58 X17 EV DW X63 EV UP
269
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Tech. descr. (Chap. 3.2.x)
Component description Front right headlamp Front left headlamp Front right worklight Front left worklight Rear right worklight Rear left worklight Number plate light Front right lights Front left lights Front right sidelight and direction indicator Front left sidelight and direction indicator Rear right light Left rear light Rear worklight (platform version) Roof wiring fuse (40 Amp) Starter switch Air conditioning control switch Diff lock control switch 4WD control switch Rotating beacon control switch Rotating beacon control switch Front worklights switch Front worklights switch Rear worklights switch Rear worklights switch Front screen washer switch Front screen washer switch Rear PTO control switch Front PTO control switch Front wiper control switch
Component code 2.8019.970.0 2.8019.960.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.240.0/10 2.8029.820.0/30 2.8029.830.0/30 04411920.4 04411921.4 2.8019.190.0 2.8019.180.0 2.8029.300.0
Connector X13 X27 X124 X121 X123 X122 X28 X64 X62 X13 X27 X14 X29 X22 X104
System (Chap. 4.xx) 3 3 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 3-4-5 3-4-5 3-4-5 4-5 4-5 3-4-5-18 3-4-5-18 3 5-8-10 2-3-4-5-6-7-8-910-11-14-15-1617-18-19-20-21 17 19 19 8 7 5 4 5 4 10 9 2-21 21 9
2.7659.127.0 0.010.2560.1 2.7659.163.0 0.007.5945.0/20 2.7659.159.0 2.7659.126.0 2.7659.154.0 2.7659.078.0 2.7659.155.0 2.7659.079.0 2.7659.223.0 2.7659.091.0 2.7659.108.0/10 2.7659.108.0/10 2.7659.092.0
28
X32 X158
32 34 31
X9 X8 X96 X81
30
X100 X85
29
X99 X78
24
X80 X80
36 35 25
X10 X35 X84
270
Systems
Electrical system
Tech. descr. (Chap. 3.2.x) 38 26 37 17 27
8
84
Component description Front wiper control switch Rear wiper control switch Rear wiper control switch Start enable switch Handbrake switch Hazard warning lights switch Rear worklights switch (Not utilised) Brake pedal switch Flashing light Windscreen wiper motor Rear screen wiper motor Rear screen wiper motor Starter motor Clock Interior roof light Fuel pump Front screen washer pump Rear screen washer pump Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer Lift position adjustment potentiometer Potentiometer adjustment heading Draft/wheelslip adjustment potentiometer Lift lowering speed adjustment potentiometer Outlet socket (in cab) Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power) Air conditioning pressure switch Air conditioning pressure switch Trailer braking low pressure switch Hydraulic oil low pressure switch Pressure switch - hydraulic oil filter clogging Engine oil pressure switch Engine governor reset button
Component code 2.7659.224.0 2.7659.146.0 2.7659.192.0 2.7659.097.0 2.7659.129.0 2.7659.110.0
Connector X98 X79 X97 X31 X24 X33 X34
System (Chap. 4.xx) 10 9 10 2 18 3-4-5 3 18 7-8 9-10 9 10 2 7-8 7-8 2 9-10 9-10 20 20 14-15-16-17 20 20 6-7-8 3-4-5-18 16 17 18 11 11 11 11
2.7659.097.0 04413192 2.9019.100.0/20 2.9019.180.0 01180928 2.9389.002.0 2.8339.032.0 0.9241.566.1 0.9241.566.1 0.011.2990.0 0.011.2990.0 0.98707.67.3 0.011.2990.0 0.011.2990.0 2.6039.017.0 5 6 3 4
X5 X127 X130 X125 X125 X37-X38 X83 X74 X41 X129 X135 H1 P1 X138-X145 M1 V X11 X26
0.010.2140.0 0.010.2262.0 2.7099.430.0 2.7099.660.0/10 15
X118-X120 X116 X25 X20 X19
01181549 2.7659.139.0
16 18
X55 X45
271
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Tech. descr. (Chap. 3.2.x) 22
Component description Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton HML control pushbutton Preheating control pushbutton Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton Rear lift control pushbutton Selection pushbutton Display pushbutton Relay - cab roof wiring Relay -1st heater fan and air conditioning on Relay - 3rd heater fan vspeed Relay - air conditioning Relay - alternator excitation Relay - maximum fan speed Relay - heat exchanger fan Relay - supplementary heat exchanger fan Relay RL1 Relay RL2 Heater unit resistance Resistor - right heater fan Resistor - heater fan Resistor - left heater fan Air cleaner clogged sensor Fuel level sensor Brake fluid level sensor Rear lift position sensor Lift draft sensor Heating air temperature sensor Coolant temperature sensor Transmission speed sensor PTO engagement sensor 1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor 540 rpm PTO engagement sensor 750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor Intermittent windscreen wiper interval timer
Component code 2.7659.182.0 0.010.5330.4 2.7659.140.0 2.7659.182.0 0.011.7720.0/10 2.7659.140.0 2.7659.173.0
Connector
System (Chap. 4.xx) 20 19 2 20 20 11 11 4-5-7-8-9-1014-15-16-17 17 15-17 16 14-15-16-17 15-17 16-17 17 2 2 14-15-16-17 15-17 14-16 15-17 11 11 18 20 20 14-15-16-17 11 11 21 21 21 21 9-10
DW M
21 23 33 19 20
X67 UP C-I X52 X44 X103 X156 X157 X143 X142-X147 X146 X115 X114 RL1 RL2 X106
0.010.2555.0 0.010.2122.0 0.010.2555.0 2.7099.320.0/10 2.7059.998.0 0.009.2194.4 0.011.2164.0/10 0.010.2124.1 01177090 0.008.1646.0 2.7659.097.0 2.7659.131.0 2.7659.131.0 2.7659.131.0 2.8639.008.0 7 14 13 1 2
X149 X140 X148 X60 X23 X66 P2 S1 X137 X54 X50 S 1 5 E X82
272
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
Component description Antifrost thermostat Air conditioning thermostat Right heater fan Right heater fan Heater fan Air conditioning heat exchanger fan Air conditioning heat exchanger fan Left heater fan Left heater fan Supplementary air conditioning heat exchanger fan
Component code 0.009.4744.1 0.010.2522.0 0.011.2047.4 0.011.8858.4 0.010.2121.1 0.010.0618.4 0.010.2545.2 0.011.2047.4 0.011.8858.4 0.010.2545.2
Connector X144 X159 X153 X153 X141 X119 X117a X151 X151 X117b
System (Chap. 4.xx) 16 17 15 17 14-16 16 17 15 17 17
273
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
2.2 COMPONENT CODE INDEX Tech. descr. (Chap. 3.2.x) 34 System (Chap. 4.xx) 19 6-7-8 14-15-16-17 11 20 14-16 16 3-4-5-6-7-8 16-17 16 14-16 14-16 14-15-16-17 16 17 17 15-17 17 17 15-17 15-17 17 19 19 15 15 20 20 20
Code
Description
Connector
0.007.5945.0/20 0.007.6273.4 0.007.6766.4 0.008.1646.0 0.009.2194.4 0.009.4743.1 0.009.4744.1 0.009.6491.4 0.009.7660.4 0.010.0618.4 0.010.2121.1 0.010.2122.0 0.010.2124.1 0.010.2140.0 0.010.2262.0 0.010.2522.0 0.010.2528.1 0.010.2545.2 0.010.2545.2 0.010.2555.0 0.010.2555.0 0.010.2560.1 0.010.5330.4 0.010.8869.4/20 0.011.2047.4 0.011.2047.4 0.011.2164.0/10 0.011.2990.0 0.011.2990.0
4WD control switch Compressor for drivers seat air suspension Heater settings control unit Transmission speed sensor Rear lift position sensor Fan speed selector switch Antifrost thermostat Lights selector switch Air conditioning compressor Air conditioning heat exchanger fan Heater fan Resistor - heater fan Heating air temperature sensor Air conditioning pressure switch Air conditioning pressure switch Air conditioning thermostat Fan speed selector switch Air conditioning heat exchanger fan Supplementary air conditioning heat exchanger fan Resistor - right heater fan Resistor - left heater fan Air conditioning control switch HML control pushbutton HML control unit Right heater fan Left heater fan Lift draft sensor Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer Lift position adjustment potentiometer
X8 X12 X136
7 1
X50 P2 X139 X144
39
X36 X59 X119 X141 X140 X137 X118-X120 X116 X159 X154 X117a X117b X149 X148 X158 M X72 X153 X151
2 3 4
S1 H1 P1
274
Systems
Electrical system
Tech. descr. (Chap. 3.2.x) 5 6
8
84
Code
Description
Connector
System (Chap. 4.xx)
0.011.2990.0 0.011.2990.0 0.011.2992.4/20 0.011.7720.0/10 0.011.8858.4 0.011.8858.4 0.9241.566.1 0.9241.566.1 0.98707.67.3 01175757 01177090 01178976 01179366 01180928 01181549 04411920.4 04411921.4 04413192 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.400.0 2.3729.460.0 2.3729.460.0 2.6039.017.0 2.7059.998.0 2.7099.320.0/10
Draft/wheelslip adjustment potentiometer Lift lowering speed adjustment potentiometer Rear lift control unit Rear lift control pushbutton Right heater fan Left heater fan Front screen washer pump Rear screen washer pump Potentiometer adjustment heading Glowplug Coolant temperature sensor Preheating control unit Preheating control solenoid valve Starter motor Engine oil pressure switch Front right sidelight and direction indicator Front left sidelight and direction indicator Windscreen wiper motor Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF) 4WD control solenoid valve Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO) High range control solenoid valve (HI) Low range control solenoid valve (LO) Front PTO solenoid valve Lift lowering solenoid valve Lift raising solenoid valve Outlet socket (in cab) Fuel level sensor Air cleaner clogged sensor
M1 V X71
20 20 6-7-8-20 20 17 17 9-10 9-10 14-15-16-17 2 11 2 2 2 11 4-5 4-5 9-10 19 19 21 19 19 21 20 20 6-7-8 11 11
33
C-I X153 X151 X129 X135 X138-X145 X57 X54 X43 X58 X37-X38
16
X55 X13 X27 X130
8 9 10 11 12
X16 X15 X17 H L X63 EV DW EV UP X11
13 14
X23 X60
275
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Code
Description
Connector
System (Chap. 4.xx)
2.7099.430.0 2.7099.660.0/10 2.7099.770.0 2.7659.078.0 2.7659.079.0 2.7659.091.0 2.7659.092.0 2.7659.097.0 2.7659.097.0 2.7659.097.0 2.7659.108.0/10 2.7659.108.0/10 2.7659.110.0 2.7659.126.0 2.7659.127.0 2.7659.129.0 2.7659.131.0 2.7659.131.0 2.7659.131.0 2.7659.139.0 2.7659.140.0 2.7659.140.0 2.7659.146.0 2.7659.154.0 2.7659.155.0 2.7659.159.0 2.7659.163.0 2.7659.173.0 2.7659.182.0
Trailer braking low pressure switch Hydraulic oil low pressure switch Cigar lighter Front worklights control switch Rear worklights control switch Front screen washer control switch Front wiper control switch Start enable switch Brake pedal switch PTO engagement sensor Front PTO control switch Rear PTO control switch Hazard warning lights switch Rotating beacon control switch Starter switch Handbrake switch 1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor 540 rpm PTO engagement sensor 750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor Engine governor reset button Selection pushbutton Preheating control pushbutton Rear wiper control switch Front worklights control switch Rear worklights control switch Rotating beacon control switch Diff lock control switch Display pushbutton Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton 18 19 21 26 30 29 31 32 20 22 28 17 35 36 27 25 15
X25 X20 X2 X85 X78 X80 X84 X31 X5 S X35 X10 X33 X81 X32 X24 1 5 E X45 X52 X67 X79 X100 X99 X96 X9 X44 DW
18 11 6-7-8 4 4 9 9 2 18 21 21 2-21 3-4-5 7 2-3-4-5-6-7-8-910-11-14-15-16 17-18-19-20-21 18 21 21 21 11 11 2 9 5 5 8 19 11 20
276
Systems
Electrical system
Tech. descr. (Chap. 3.2.x) 23 37 24 38
8
84
Code
Description
Connector
System (Chap. 4.xx) 20 10 10 10 3-4-5-18 3-4-5-18 3 3 3-4-5 3 4-5 4-5 4-5 4-5 3-4-5 3-4-5 7-8 2-3-4-5-1118-19-21 2-3-4-5-1118-19-21 3-4-5 3-4-5 9-10 9 10 7-8 2 14-15-16-17 2
2.7659.182.0 2.7659.192.0 2.7659.223.0 2.7659.224.0 2.8019.180.0 2.8019.190.0 2.8019.960.0 2.8019.970.0 2.8029.240.0/10 2.8029.300.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.820.0/30 2.8029.830.0/30 2.8339.032.0 2.8339.153.0/30 2.8339.212.0/10 2.8419.003.0 2.8639.007.0 2.8639.008.0 2.9019.100.0/20 2.9019.180.0 2.9389.002.0 2.9439.420.0 2.9439.440.0/10 2.9439.460.0/10
Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton Rear wiper control switch Front screen washer control switch Front wiper control switch Rear left light Rear right light Front left light Front right light Number plate light Rear worklight (platform version) Front right worklight Front left worklight Rear right worklight Rear left worklight Front right light Front left light Interior roof light Digital instrument panel Analogue instrument panel Horn Hazard lights control unit Intermittent windscreen wiper interval timer Rear screen wiper motor Rear screen wiper motor Clock Alternator ISKRA 65A Heating alternator ISKRA 70A Alternator ISKRA 65A
UP X97 X80 X98 X29 X14 X27 X13 X28 X22 X124 X121 X123 X122 X64 X62 X74 X3 X3 X61 X40 X82 X125 X125 X83 X65 X109/B+/BX65
277
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
2.3 CONNECTOR INDEX Connector 1 5 B0.011.3761.3 0.009.7852.3 B+ 0.011.3761.3 C DW E EV DW EV UP H1 H I L M1 M P1 P2 RL1 RL2 S1 S UP V X1 X2 3 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 2 2 3 2 3 0.011.6943.4 0.011.6943.4 0.010.5303.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.7972.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.7972.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.7972.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.6943.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.011.6943.4 0.010.5303.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.6943.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5303.4 0.011.2164.0/10 2.7659.097.0 2.7659.182.0 0.011.2990.0 0.010.5303.4 2.7099.770.0 Cigar lighter 0.011.7720.0/10 2.7659.182.0 2.7659.131.0 2.3729.460.0 2.3729.460.0 0.011.2990.0 2.3729.240.0/10 0.011.7720.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 0.011.2990.0 0.010.5330.4 0.011.2990.0 0.009.2194.4 Rear lift control pushbutton Rear lift "lower" control pushbutton 750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor Lift lowering solenoid valve Lift raising solenoid valve Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer High range control solenoid valve (HI Rear lift control pushbutton Low range control solenoid valve (LO) Draft/wheelslip adjustment potentiometer HML control pushbutton Lift position adjustment potentiometer Rear lift position sensor Relay RL1 Relay RL2 Lift draft sensor PTO engagement sensor Rear lift "raise" control pushbutton Lift lowering speed adjustment potentiometer 2.9439.440.0/10 Heating alternator ISKRA 70A Type Wiring code 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.009.7852.3 2.9439.440.0/10 Heating alternator ISKRA 70A Connection wiring or component code 2.7659.131.0 2.7659.131.0 Component description 1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor 540 rpm PTO engagement sensor
278
Systems
Electrical system
Connection wiring or component code 2.8339.153.0/30 0.010.5582.3 2.7659.097.0 0.011.7972.4 0.011.6943.4 0.007.5945.0/20 2.7659.163.0 2.7659.108.0/10 2.6039.017.0 0.007.6766.4 04411920.4 2.8019.970.0 2.8019.190.0 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 2.3729.240.0/10 Brake pedal switch
8
84
Connector X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12
Type 7 9
Wiring code 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4
Component description Digital instrument panel
8 4 6 6 6
0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5582.3
Four-wheel drive control switch Diff lock control switch PTO control switch Outlet socket (in cab) Compressor for drivers seat air suspension Front right sidelight and direction indicator Front right headlamp Rear right light 4WD control solenoid valve Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF) Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO) Connector for joint Pressure switch hydraulic oil filter clogging
X13 0.010.5303.4 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 2 4 2 2 2 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5582.3 X27 0.010.5303.4 2.8019.960.0 04411921.4 2.8029.300.0 2.7059.998.0 2.7659.129.0 2.7099.430.0 2.7099.660.0/10
Hydraulic oil low pressure switch Connector for joint Rear worklight (platform version Fuel level sensor Handbrake switch Trailer braking low pressure switch Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power) Front left sidelight and direction indicator Front left headlamp
279
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Connection wiring or component code 2.8029.240.0/10 2.8019.180.0 2.7659.097.0 2.7659.127.0 2.7659.110.0
Connector X28 X29 X31 X32 X33 X34 X35 X36
Type
Wiring code 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4
Component description Number plate light Left rear light Start enable switch Starter switch Hazard warning lights switch Rear worklights switch (Not utilised)
6 6 6 5
0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5302.4 0.009.7852.3 0.011.3761.3 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5303.4
2.7659.108.0/10 0.009.6491.4
Front PTO control switch Lights selector switch
X37
01180928
Starter motor
X38
01180928 0.009.7852.3
Starter motor
X39 X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X50 X52 X54 X55 X57 X58 X59 X60 X61 X62 X63
0.010.5303.4 0.011.3761.3 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5302.4 2.8639.007.0 Hazard lights control unit Fuel pump Diagnostics connector 01178976 2.7659.173.0 2.7659.139.0 0.008.1646.0 2.7659.140.0 01177090 01181549 01175757 01179366 0.007.7660.4 2.7099.320.0/10 2.8419.003.0 2.8029.830.0/30 2.3729.400.0 Preheating control unit Display pushbutton Engine governor reset button Transmission speed sensor Selection pushbutton Coolant temperature sensor Engine oil pressure switch Glowplug Preheating control solenoid valve Air conditioning compressor Air cleaner clogged sensor Horn Front left lights Front PTO solenoid valve
3 10 6 6 11 3
0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5303.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5302.4
0.010.5302.4
280
Systems
Electrical system
Connection wiring or component code 2.8029.820.0/30 2.9439.420.0 X65 X66 X67 X71 X72 X74 0.011.3606.4 0.009.7850.4 X75 0.011.3606.4 X76 X77 X78 X79 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 X80 0.011.3606.4 X81 X82 0.011.3606.4 0.009.7850.4 X83 0.011.3596.3 X84 X85 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 X86 0.011.3596.3 X87 X88 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7852.3 0.010.4516.3 Radio 2.7659.092.0 2.7659.078.0 2.9389.002.0 Clock 0.009.7850.4 0.009.7850.4 2.8639.008.0 2.7659.223.0 2.7659.126.0 0.011.3743.3 0.009.7853.3 0.009.7851.4 2.7659.079.0 2.7659.146.0 2.7659.091.0 0.009.7854.3 14 3 0.010.5302.4 2.9439.460.0/10 0.010.5302.4 0.010.5303.4 0.011.6943.4 0.011.7972.4 0.009.7850.4 2.8339.032.0 Interior roof light 2.7659.140.0 0.011.2992.4/20 0.010.8869.4/20
8
84
Connector X64
Type
Wiring code 0.010.5302.4
Component description Front right lights Alternator ISKRA 65A Alternator ISKRA 85A Brake fluid level sensor Preheating control pushbutton Rear lift control unit HML control unit
Rear worklights switch Rear screen washer switch
Front screen washer switch
Rotating beacon control switch Intermittent windscreen wiper interval timer
Front screen washer switch Rear worklights switch
281
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Connection wiring or component code 0.010.2123.2
Connector
Type
Wiring code
Component description
X89 X90 X91 X92 X93 X94 X95 X96 X97 X98 X99 X100 X101 X102 X103 12
0.009.7850.4 0.010.2130.1 0.009.7850.4 0.011.3761.3 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.010.2562.1 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3606.4 0.009.7850.4 Relay - cab roof wiring 0.011.3606.4 0.009.7852.3 0.009.7850.4 0.011.3606.4 Roof wiring fuse (40 Amp) Heater unit resistance 0.011.3761.3 0.010.2123.2 0.010.2562.1 0.011.3595.3 2.7659.159.0 2.7659.192.0 2.7659.224.0 2.7659.155.0 2.7659.154.0 0.011.3596.3 0.011.3610.3 Rotating beacon control switch Rear wiper control switch Winscreen wiper control switch Rear worklights control switch Front worklights control switch 0.010.2130.1 0.011.3606.4 0.011.3597.3 0.010.2558.1
X103-30 0.011.3761.3 X104 0.011.3606.4 0.009.7852.3 X106
X107
0.009.7852.3 0.010.2130.1 0.009.7852.3
X108
2 0.011.3761.3 0.009.7852.3
Connector for joint
X109 0.011.3761.3
2.9439.440.0/10
Heating alternator ISKRA 70A
282
Systems
Electrical system
Connection wiring or component code
8
84
Connector
Type
X111 0.011.3761.3 0.010.2558.1 X113 4 0.011.3761.3 0.010.2562.1 X114 0.011.3610.3 0.009.7853.3 X115 0.011.3610.3 X116 X117a X117b X118 X119 X120 X121 0.011.3595.3 0.009.7851.4 X122 0.011.3595.3 0.009.7851.4 X123 0.011.3595.3 0.009.7851.4 X124 0.011.3595.3 0.009.7851.4 X125 0.011.3596.3 0.009.7851.4 X126 0.011.3596.3 0.009.7851.4 X127 0.011.3596.3 0.009.7854.3 X129 0.011.3743.3 0.010.4516.3 X130 0.011.3597.3 04413192 0.9241.566.1 2.9019.180.0 2.9019.100.0/20 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 2.8029.730.0 13 15 15 3 0.011.3610.3 0.011.3610.3 0.011.3610.3 0.009.7853.3 0.009.7853.3 0.009.7853.3 0.009.7851.4 2.8029.730.0 0.010.2262.0 0.010.2545.2 0.010.2545.2 0.010.2140.0 0.010.0618.4 0.010.2140.0
Connector for joint
Relay - supplementary heat exchanger fan Relay - heat exchanger fan Air conditioning pressure switch Air conditioning heat exchanger fan Supplementary air conditioning heat exchanger fan Air conditioning pressure switch Air conditioning heat exchanger fan Air conditioning pressure switch Front left worklight
Rear left worklight
Rear right worklight
Front right worklight
Rear screen wiper motor
Connector for joint
Flashing light
Front screen washer pump
Front screen wiper motor
283
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Connector
Type
X131 0.011.3596.3 0.011.0729.4 X132 0.011.3596.3 0.011.0729.4 X133 0.011.3596.3 0.009.7854.3 X135 0.011.3743.3 0.010.2123.2 0.010.2130.1 X136 010.2558.1 0.010.2562.1 0.010.2123.2 0.010.2130.1 X137 010.2558.1 0.010.2562.1 0.010.2123.2 X138 0.010.2130.1 0.010.2123.2 X139 0.010.2130.1 0.010.2123.2 X140 0.010.2130.1 0.010.2123.2 X141 0.010.2130.1 0.010.2123.2 X142 0.010.2130.1 X143 X144 X145 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X146 0.010.2562.1 0.010.2130.1 0.010.2130.1 010.2558.1 0.98707.67.3 0.009.4744.0 0.010.2121.1 0.010.2122.0 0.009.4743.1 0.98707.67.3 0.010.2124.1 0.007.6766.4 0.9241.566.1
Radio
Left speaker
Right speaker
Rear screen washer pump
Heater settings control unit
Heating air temperature sensor
Potentiometer adjustment heading
Fan speed selector switch
Resistor - heater fan
Heater fan
Relay - alternator excitation Relay - air conditioning Antifrost thermostat Potentiometer adjustment heading
Relay - maximum fan speed
284
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
Connector
Type
Wiring code 010.2558.1
X147 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X148 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X149 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X150 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X151 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X152 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X153 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X154 0.010.2562.1 X156 0.010.2562.1 010.2558.1 X157 0.010.2562.1 X158 X159 0.010.2562.1 0.010.2562.1 0.010.2560.1 0.010.2522.0 0.010.2528.1 0.011.8858.4 0.011.2047.4 0.011.8858.4 0.011.2047.4 0.010.2555.0 0.010.2555.0
Relay - alternator excitation
Resistor - left heater fan
Resistor - right heater fan
Connector for joint
Left heater fan
Connector for joint
Right heater fan
Fan speed selector switch Relay -1st heater fan and air conditioning on Relay - 3rd heater fan speed Air conditioning control switch Air conditioning thermostat
285
8
84
3. COMPONENTS
Systems
Electrical system
This chapter contains: 1 - Connectors table: the shapes and pinouts of the connectors 2 - Components table: technical and functional description of the components 3 - Pinouts of the electronic control units 3.1 CONNECTOR LAYOUTS
1
4 9 15 21
3 8
1 4 9 15 21 26 29 25 3 8 14 20
2
14 20 25 1 2
26
29
5
1 4 2 5 3 6 3 6 9 2 5 8 1 4 7
6
2
7
36 28 19 10 1
8
7 6 5
27 18
2 4 1
3 4
286
Systems
Electrical system
1 2 3
4 5 2 1
8
84
9
4
2 5
4 5 6 7 8
10
10
11
7 8 3
1 2 3
1 4 6
5 6 8 7
17
12
13
6
2 3
14
3 1
2 4 4 1 1 12
15
A
A
B
B
287
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
3.2 COMPONENT TECHNICAL DATA N Description Code Characteristics Pin1 = earth Pin2 = output signal Pin3 = 10Vdc power 0.2Vdc output (sensor not engaged) 8.3 Vdc (Sensor fully pressed) Pin1 = earth Pin2 = analogue signal Pin3 = 10V power Signal with sensor disconnected from the tractor between pins 1 and 2: ~5 V Resistance between pin1 and pin 3: ~4.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 04.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 3: ~4.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 04.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 3: ~4.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 04.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 3: ~4.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: 04.7 kOhm Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: ~1000 Ohm at 20C Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: ~ 8 Ohm at 20C Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: ~ 8 Ohm at 20C Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: ~ 8 Ohm at 20C Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: ~ 8 Ohm at 20C Resistance between pin1 and pin 2: ~ 8 Ohm at 20C Resistance between pin 2 and pin 3: ___ Ohm (Tank full ___ mm) ___ Ohm (Tank half full ___ mm) ___ Ohm (Tank empty ___ mm) Illumination reserve warning light (Closes contact between pins 1 and 3): at _____ mm from tank empty signal Normally open contact Notes Connector
Rear lift position sensor
0.009.2194.4
P2
Lift draft sensor
0.011.2164.0
S1
Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer Lift position adjustment potentiometer Draft/wheelslip adjustment potentiometer Max. lift height adjustment potentiometer Transmission speed sensor Diff lock control solenoid valve (DF) 4WD control solenoid valve Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO)
0.011.2990.0
H1
0.011.2990.0
P1
0.011.2990.0
M1
0.011.2990.0
7 8 9 10
008.1646.0 2.3729.240.0 2.3729.240.0 2.3729.240.0 2.3729.240.0 2.3729.240.0
X50 X16 X15 X17 H L
High range control 11 solenoid valve (HI) 12 L o w r a n g e c o n t r o l solenoid valve (LO)
13 Fuel level sensor
2.7059.998.0
X23
Air cleaner clogging 14 sensor
2.7099.320.0
X60
288
Systems
Electrical system
N Description Hydraulic oil 15 pressure switch 16 Engine oil pressure switch 17 Handbrake switch Engine governor reset 18 button 19 T y r e s i z e s e l e c t i o n pushbutton 20 Engine governor display pushbutton low Code 2.7099.660.0 01181549 2.7659.129.0 2.7659.139.0 2.7659.140.0 2.7659.173.0 2.7659.177.0 Characteristics Normally open contact Normally closed contact Normally closed contact (Handbrake on) Normally open contact Normally open contact Normally open contact Normally open contact (NO) resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm Normally open contact (NO) resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm Normally open contact (NO) resistance with contact closed 3.9 Ohm Normally open contact between contacts 2 and 3.
8
84
Connector X20 X55 X24 X45 X52 X73 X67
Notes
21 Preheating control pushbutton Rear lift "lower" control 22 pushbutton Rear lift "raise" 23 control pushbutton 24 Front screen washer control switch
2.7659.182.0
DW
2.7659.182.0 2.7659.223.0
UP 32
289
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
N Description
Code
Characteristics
Connector
0 1 2
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
25
Winscreen wiper control switch
2.7659.092.0
Pin Pos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X84
0 1 2
0 1 2
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
26 Rear wiper control switch
2.7659.146.0
Pin Pos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X79
0 1 2
0
30
L
R
Hazard warning lights 27 switch
2.7659.110.0
Pin Pos 15 49 30 L 49a R
15
b 30
49
49a
X33
0 1
290
Systems
Electrical system
N Description Code Characteristics
8
84
Connector
1
30
2
50
15
19
28 Starter switch
2.7659.127.0
Pos
Pin
15 30/1 50
19
30
17
P 0 1 2 0 1
Rear worklights control 29 switch
2.7659.155.0
Pin Pos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1
0 1
Front worklights control 30 switch
2.7659.154.0
Pin Pos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 1
17
30/1
X32
X99
X100
291
8
84
N Description
Systems
Electrical system
Code Characteristics Connector
0 1
31
Rotating beacon control switch
2.7659.159.0
Pin Pos 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
X96
0 1
0
3
6
7
32 Diff lock control switch
2.7659.163.0
X9
Pin Pos
0 1
2 0 1
1 2 3 4 5
Rear lift 33 pushbutton
control
0.011.7720.0
Pos
C-I
1 2 3 4 5
Pin
1 0 2
292
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
Connector
0
30
L
R
34 4WD control switch
007.5945.0
Pin Pos 15 49 30 30b L R
15
30
49
49a
X8
0 1
0
30
L
R
35 Rear PTO control switch
2.7659.108.0
Pin Pos 15 49 30 30b L R
15
30
49
49a
X10
0 1
0
30
L
R
36 Front PTO control switch
2.7659.108.0
Pin Pos 15 49 30 30b L R
15
b 30
49
49a
X35
0 1
293
8
84
N Description
Systems
Electrical system
Code Characteristics Connector
1 2
37 Rear wiper control switch
2.7659.192.0
Pin Pos 1 2 3 5 6
X97
0 1 2 0
1 2
38 Winscreen wiper control switch
2.7659.224.0
Pin Pos 1 2 3 5 6
X98
0 1 2
Pin Pos
39 Lights selector switch
0.009.6491.4
Freccia sx Freccia dx Clacson Lampeggio Luci di posizione Luci anabbagl. Luci abbagl.
X36
294
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
Connector
0
C
31
S1
PTO engagement 40 pushbutton
2.7659.142.0
X10
Pos
Pin S1
31
0 1
295
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
3.3 PINOUTS AND DESCRIPTIONS OF ELECTRONIC CONTROL UNITS 3.3.1 HML CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR X72
12 11 10 9
12
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 +12V 0V +12V 0V Volts. 0V
Abbreviation
Description Battery negative "M" warning light output Power (+) commmon for "H-M-L" solenoid valves Configuration pin Not utilised Digital signal - range downshift pushbutton Digital signal - range upshift pushbutton Range switch common Power for "L" solenoid valve Power for "M" solenoid valve Power for "H" solenoid valve Battery positive
296
Systems
Electrical system
3.3.2 POWER LIFT CONTROL UNIT CONNECTOR X71
8
84
12 11 10 9
12
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 0V +10V Volts. +12V
Abbreviation
Description Battery positive Power for "UP" solenoid valve Power for "DOWN" solenoid valve Battery negative Power (+) common for solenoid valves and sensors Analogue input - lift position sensor Analogue input - lift draft sensor Analogue input - lift lowering speed adjustment trimmer Analogue input - max. lift height adjustment trimmer Analogue input - lift draft-wheelslip adjustment trimmer Analogue input - lift position adjustment trimmer ISO 9141 serial interface (Diagnostics connector)
297
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
3.3.4 ANALOGUE INSTRUMENT PANEL CONNECTOR X3
35 34
36
26
27
33
25
17
16
8
18
32
15
31
24
REF.SAME-10S-10N ANALOGICO 2200RPM=567A-473W HZ 12V REF.AST/Rev. DATE........ AST MADE IN SPAIN
23
30
22
14
28
W A
29
21
13
19
12
11 2 3
20
10
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Volts.
Abbreviation
Description Warning light - "Memorising selected gear" Analogue input - "W" (Alternator rotation) Not utilised Input - engine temperature sensor Input - fuel level sensor resistance Warning light - "High beam" Warning light - "Preheating" "Clogged air cleaner" warning light Warning light - "Low engine oil pressure" Warning light - "Handbrake - Low fluid level" Warning light - "Low gear" (L) Warning light - "Fuel reserve" Warning light - "Low trailer braking pressure" Warning light - "Battery charging" Warning light - "Hydraulic oil filter clogged - Low oil presure" Warning light - "Front PTO engaged" Warning light - "Rear PTO engaged" Warning light - "Broken belt alarm" Instrument panel lighting Warning light - "Diff lock" Warning light - "4wd engaged" Warning light - "Direction indicators" Warning light - "1st trailer direction indicators" Warning light - "2nd trailer direction indicators"
298
Systems
Electrical system
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 0V +12V Warning light - "Rear PTO Groundspeed" Warning light - "High gear" (H) Warning light - "Medium gear" (M) Warning light - "Rear PTO at 540 rpm" Warning light - "Rear PTO at 1000 rpm" Warning light - "Rear PTO ECO"
8
84
Common earth fore warning lights (pins 1,6,16,18,19,22,23,24) Power common for warning lights (Pins 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,17,20,21,25,26,27,28,29,30) Power for "External alarm" warning light Not utilised Not utilised Not utilised
299
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
3.3.5 DIGITAL INSTRUMENT PANEL CONNECTOR X3
35 34
36
26
27
33
25
17
16
8
18
32
24
15
31
23
30
22
29
21
13
14
SWITCH SELEZIONE ACQUA/ARIA REF.SAME-10S-10N DIGITALE 2200RPM=1760 Hz12V REF.AST/Rev. DATE........ AST MADE IN SPAIN
28
19
12
11 2 3
20
10
Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24
Volts.
Abbreviation Description
Warning light - "Memorising selected gear" Input - engine speed signal (from engine control unit - Pin 22) Digital input - transmission speed sensor Input - engine temperature sensor Input - fuel level sensor resistance Warning light - "High beam" Warning light - "Preheating" Spia "Intasamento filtro aria" Warning light - "Low engine oil pressure" Warning light - "Handbrake - Low fluid level" Warning light - "Low gear" (L) Warning light - "Fuel reserve" Warning light - "Low trailer braking pressure" Warning light - "Battery charging" Warning light - "Hydraulic oil filter clogged - Low oil presure" Warning light - "Front PTO engaged" Warning light - "Rear PTO engaged" Warning light - "Broken belt alarm" Instrument panel lighting Warning light - "Diff lock" Warning light - "4wd engaged" Warning light - "Direction indicators" Warning light - "1st trailer direction indicators" Warning light - "2nd trailer direction indicators"
300
Systems
Electrical system
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 0V +12V Warning light - "Rear PTO Groundspeed" Warning light - "High gear" (H) Warning light - "Medium gear" (M) Warning light - "Rear PTO at 540 rpm" Warning light - "Rear PTO at 1000 rpm" Warning light - "Rear PTO ECO"
8
84
Common earth fore warning lights (pins 1,6,16,18,19,22,23,24) Power common for warning lights (Pins 7,8,9,10,11,12,13,14,15,17,20,21,25,26,27,28,29,30) Power for "External alarm" warning light Input - "Display" pushbutton Input - "Reset" pushbutton Input - "Select" pushbutton
301
8
84
4. SYSTEMS
N 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
Systems
Electrical system
Systems
Earths Starting and preheating Lights - steering column switch unit Lights - steering column switch unit Lights - steering column switch unit Accessories - Diagnostics Accessories - Diagnostics Accessories - Diagnostics Wipers Wipers Front instrument panel Radio Radio Heating Heating Heating and air conditioning Heating and air conditioning Braking system - Trailer braking HML transmission Electronic lift Rear and front PTO
Platform X X X
Standard cab X X X
High Visib. Cab X X
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
302
Systems
Electrical system
4.1 EARTHING POINTS
GND4 GND5
8
84
F0028140
F0028100
GND9 GND5 GND1
GND2
F0028120
GND8 GND3
F0026980
F0028560
D0007220
303
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
GND6
F0027370
GND7
F0027210
D0007860
304
Systems
Electrical system
4.2 STARTING AND PREHEATING
4 2 1 3
210
8
84
X67
RL2
RL1
X32
13
R 30b
X10
7 2
49
ON
Fmax
F1
F6
40A
20A
OFF
15 30 L
1 6 3
-VCC CARICA BATTERIA +12 VOLT W (ROTAZIONE ALTERNATORE) PRERISCALDO
31 14 32 2 7
12
X3
X43
X31
5 1 6 3 4 2 4 3 2 1 29 5 12 11 13 4
X1
X38
+50 +30
40A
X37
M +
GND4
0.010.5303.4 5
BATTERY
G
30 86 85 87
87a
87 85 86 30
15
30/1
30 50
11
10
GND3
0.010.5302.4
X41 X57
1 2
X58
D+ B+
+
X65
W
7 9
6
1 2 3 4 5 6 Preheating push button Relay RL2 Relay RL1 Starter switch Starter motor Alternator 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
8 Preheating control solenoid valve Glowplug Fuel pump Start enable switch Preheating control unit Instrument panel Rear PTO control switch
D0008840
305
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.3 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (PLATFORM)
6
OFF
7
ON
8
IND. DIR. 2 RIMORCHIO IND. DIR. 1 RIMORCHIO
10 9
ABBAGLIANTI -VCC
G
ILL. CRUSCOTTO
2 1 0 +12 VOLT
IND. DIREZIONE
11
C2 C3 49
0.010.5303.4
15
30/1
30 50
1 3
32 19 22 24 23 18 31
X32
X33
X3
X26
X40
1 2
X22 X21
X4
5 3 1
GND5 GND4 X34

7 6 3
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
7 6 1
X13
2 4 5 6
2 3 4
X14
1 2
X28
9
Rear left light Front left headlamp Number plate light Rear right light Front right headlamp Starter switch Hazard warning lights switch Instrument panel Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power) Hazard warning control unit Rear worklight Lights selector switch Horn Front left lights Front right lights Starter motor
+15
+30
49a
49
-31
49a
8 7
X27
4 5 3
X36
+ 1
12
30 5 FS
X29
9 7 8 2 3 4 6
FD
Fmax 40A
F2 20A
F4 20A
F12 10A
F6 20A
F3 15A
F8 10A
F9 10A
F10 10A
F11 10A
57/58 56b 56a H
X38
+50 +30
X37
M
X1
8 7 9 10 6
16 0.010.5302.4
BATTERY
X64
2 1 3
X62
2 1 3 2
X61
1
GND3
15
14
13
D0008850
306
Systems
Electrical system
4.4 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (STANDARD CAB)
8
IND. DIR. 2 RIMORCHIO
OFF
8
84
6
2 10
7
ON
10 9
ABBAGLIANTI -VCC
-31 49a
G
ILL. CRUSCOTTO
0.010.5582.3 5
5 7 6
0.010.5303.4
IND. DIREZIONE
+12 VOLT
+15
+30
49a
C C2 C3
49
15
30/1
30 50
1 3 6 5 7 4
32 19 22 24 23 18 31
7 5
4 1 3
1 4 2 3 5 6
49
X32 X13
3 1 2 4 5 6
X33
X3
X26
X40
GND5 X4 GND4
9 8 7
X27
11
GND6
1 3 4 2
12
4 3
1 2 3 4 1 3 4 2
13
14
15
16
1 2
2 1
1 2
2 1
X14
X85
X78
X121 X124
X122
X123
2 1
1 2
X28
6 4 5 3
F8
10A
F7
10A
X29
Fmax F10
20A 10A 10A 10A 10A
X39
1 2 F12
10A 40A 15A
X87
3 1 2
X77
F11
20A
F6
F8
10A
5 6 1 2
F7
F2
F3
F9
F
50A
X111
X103-30
X38
+50 +30
X37
X1
8 7 9 10 6 6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
57/58 56a 56b H L
+
FD
X36
X103
0.010.5302.4
0.009.7852.3
30 86 85 87
0.009.7850.4
0.009.7851.4
FS
M +
22
30
BATTERY
17
X64
2 1 3
X62
2 1 3 2 1
X61 GND6
18 21
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Rear left light Number plate light Rear right light Front left sidelight and direction indicator Front right sidelight and direction indicator Starter switch Hazard warning lights switch Instrument panel Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power) 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
20
19
20 21 22 Front left lights Front right lights Starter motor
Hazard warning control unit Front worklights control switch Rear worklights control switch Front left worklight Front right worklight Rear left worklight Rear right worklight Roof wiring power relay Lights selector switch Horn
D0008860
307
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.5 LIGHTS - STEERING COLUMN SWITCH UNIT (HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)

6
OFF
7
ON
8
ILL. CRUSCOTTO IND. DIREZIONE
10 9
ABBAGLIANTI -VCC -31 49a
G
2 10 I+12 VOLT
+15
+30
0.010.5582.3 5
5 7 6
0.010.5303.4
49a
C C2 C3
49
15
30/1
30 50
1 3 6 5 7 4
32 19 22 24 23 18 31
7 5 4 1 3
1 4 2 3 5 6
49
X32 X13 X4 X27

9 8 7 3 1 2 4 5 6
X33
X3
X26
X40 GND5 GND4
4 3
1 2 3 4
11
12
13
14
15
16
X14
GND7
7 2 3 1 5 6 4 8 7 2 3 1 5 6 4 8 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1
2 1
1 2 6 4 5 3
X100 X28
F8
10A
X99
X121
X124
X122
X123
F7
10A
X29
2 Fmax F10 F12
40A 20A 10A 10A 10A 10A
X39
F11
10A 15A 10A 20A
X91
2
X95
4 3 2 1
F7
F2
F3
F6
F8
F9
F
50A
X111
X103-30
X38
+50 +30
X37
M
X1
8 7 9 10 6
X36
X103
6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
FD 56a 56b 57/58 FS H + L 30
X104
1 2
40A
30 86 85 87
0.010.5302.4
0.011.3761.3 17
0.011.3606.4
GND7
0.011.3595.3
23
BATTERY
18
X64
2 1 3
X62
2 1 3 2 1
X61 GND6
19 22 21 20
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Rear left light Number plate light Rear right light Front left sidelight and direction indicator Front right sidelight and direction indicator Starter switch Hazard warning lights switch Instrument panel Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Hazard warning control unit Front worklights control switch Rear worklights control switch Front left worklight Front right worklight Rear left worklight Rear right worklight Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp) Roof wiring power relay Lights selector switch
20 21 22 23
Horn Front left lights Front right lights Starter motor
D0008870
308
Systems
Electrical system
4.6 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (PLATFORM)
8
84
2 3
2 1 0
0.011.6986.4
15
30/1
GND5 X32 X12 X11 X2
PRESA DIAGNOSTICA 2 1 2 3
X42
1 7
ISO 9141
12 4 1
1 2 Fmax 10A 15A 40A 20A 20A 3
GND +12 VCC
X71
X7
0.011.6943.4
X36
6
H
X38
3
56b
X37
+50 +30
4
56a
2
57/58
8
FD
7
L
9
FS
5
30
1
+
M +
F10
10A
F13
F5
F4
F2
BATTERY
7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Diagnostics connector Starter switch Compressor for drivers seat air suspension Outlet socket (in cab) Cigar lighter Starter motor Lights selector switch Rear lift control unit
D0008880
0.010.5303.4
30 50
309
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.7 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (STANDARD CAB)
X127
2
2 10
4
GND5
X126
2 1
0.011.6986.4
PRESA DIAGNOSTICA
15
30/1
30 50
1 2
1 2
2 1 3
30 86 85 87
8 7 6 5 4
X32 X42
1 2 3
X12
X11
X2 X103-30 X39
2 2 3
X103
2 1 7
X87
10A
Fmax
10A
10A
F13
ISO 9141
13
GND +12 VCC
X111
50A
0.011.6943.4
X36
6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
FD 56a 56b 57/58 FS H L + 30
X71
X7
X38
+50 +30
X37
X83
X74
4 3 2 1 15 30 58 1 2
0.010.5303.4
M +
0.009.7852.3
2 4 3 1
X81
GND6
11
BATTERY
10
12
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13
Diagnostics connector Starter switch Compressor for drivers seat air suspension Outlet socket (in cab) Cigar lighter Roof wiring power relay Flashing light Rotating beacon control switch Interior roof light Clock Starter motor Lights selector switch Rear lift control unit
D0008900
310
0.009.7850.4
12 4 1
1 2 3
15A
40A
20A
20A
F10
10A
F7
F5
F4
F2
10A
F6
F1
0.009.7851.4
2 1
Systems
Electrical system
4.8 ACCESSORIES - DIAGNOSTICS (HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
2
2 10
5
GND5 GND7
2 1 3
0.011.6986.4
15
30/1
30 50
1 2
1 2
2 1
7 2 3 1 8
X32
X12
X11
X2
X74
X96
PRESA DIAGNOSTICA
X42
1 2 3
2 1 7
X39
2
X91
2 3
X104
2 1
10A 10A
0.011.3606.4 8
87 85 86 30
40A
X103-30
F6 F2
14
12 4 +12 VCC 1
ISO 9141 GND
1 2 3
Fmax
F13
F10
10A
10A
15A
40A
20A
20A
10A
F7
F5
F4
5A
F1
X71
X7
50A
X111
F
0.011.6943.4
X36
6 4 3 2 8 7 9 5 1
56a 56b FD 57/58 FS 30
+50
X103 X101
4 2 3 1
X38
+30
X37
0.010.5303.4
M +
0.011.3761.3
GND6
12
1 2
X126
BATTERY
13
X83
1 3 2 4 15 30 58 1 2
X127
11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Diagnostics connector Starter switch Compressor for drivers seat air suspension Outlet socket (in cab) Cigar lighter Interior roof light Rotating beacon control switch 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp) Roof wiring power relay Flashing light Clock Starter motor Lights selector switch Rear lift control unit
10
D0008890
0.011.3596.3
311
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.9 WIPERS (STANDARD CAB)

1 0.009.7851.4
X125 X77
3 7 6 5 8
3 4
I T 31 15 53S 53M 2 1
X79
X84
X82
X80
11
1 2
0.009.7854.3
M
X75
3 2 1
10
1 2
0.010.4516.3 X88
2 3 6 1
X129
0.009.7850.4
5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1
5 6 7 8 4 3 2 1
X130
2 3 6
1 M
7.5A
GND6 X87
2
7.5A
F6
F5
X103-30
X103
30 86 85 87
8
2 10
0.009.7852.3
X111
15
30/1
30 50
X32
X39
0.010.5303.4
Fmax
40A
X38
+50 +30
X37
M +
BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 6
Rear wiper control switch Front windscreen wiper control switch Intermittent wipe timer for windscreen wiper Windscreen washer pump control switch Windscreen wiper motor Roof wiring power relay
10A
F7
50A
7 8 9 10 11
Starter motor Starter switch Rear screen washer pump Front windscreen washer pump Rear screen wiper motor
D0008910
312
X135
Systems
Electrical system
4.10 WIPERS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
1 0.011.3596.3 12
2 1
3 4
I T 31 15 53S 53M 2 3
GND6
1 3 2 6 5
X101
2
X97
X98
X82
X80
X125
M 1 2 3 2 1
X75
0.011.3606.4
2 3 1 4
1 3 2 6 5
11
X129
0.011.3597.3
2 3 1 4
7.5A
F5
7.5A
F6
0.011.3743.3
X92
X130
X135
1 M 2
X91
2
X103-30 GND7 X111
X103
30 86 85 87 1 2
40A
X104
9
2 10
0.009.7852.3
10
15
30/1
30 50
X32
X39
0.010.5303.4
Fmax
40A
X38
+50 +30
X37
M +
10A
F7
BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 6
Rear wiper control switch Front windscreen wiper control switch Intermittent wipe timer for windscreen wiper Windscreen washer pump control switch Windscreen wiper motor Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp)
50A
7 8 9 10 11 12
Roof wiring power relay Starter motor Starter switch Rear screen washer pump Front windscreen washer pump Rear screen wiper motor
D0008920
313
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.11 FRONT INSTRUMENT PANEL
Digital instrument panel

3
BASSA PRESS. OLIO MOTORE
Analogue instrument panel

4
RISERVA CARBURANTE LIVELLA CARBURANTE OLIO IDRAULICO INT. FILTRO ARIA
3
BASSA PRESS. OLIO MOTORE
4
RISERVA CARBURANTE LIVELLA CARBURANTE OLIO IDRAULICO INT. FILTRO ARIA
2
AZZERAMENTO SELEZIONE +12 VOLT DISPALY
SENS. VEL. TRASMISSIONE
2 1 0
TEMP. MOTORE
2 1 0
TEMP. MOTORE
+12 VOLT
+12 VOLT
+12 VOLT
+12 VOLT
+12 VOLT
-VCC
-VCC
-VCC
0.010.5303.4
36 35 34
32 31
15 12
5 33
15
30/1
30 50
-VCC
X52 GND4
X45
X3
X32
X3 GND4
Fmax 20A
X32
0.010.5302.4
0.010.5302.4
X1
2 3 1
X1
2 3 1
X18 X18
X55
1 2
X60
t
X54 X50
2 3
X44
7 5
X20
X19 GND5
X23
2 4 3 1
X38
+30 +50
X37
X55
1 2
X60
t
X54
2 3 7 5
X20
X19 GND5
X23
2 4 3 1
X38
+50 +30
X37
GND3
M
P
GND3
P
Fn
13
12
11
10
13
12
11
BATTERY BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
D0009010
Selection pushbutton (only digital panel) Reset button (only digital panel) Instrument panel Starter switch Starter motor Fuel level sensor Hydraulic oil filter clogging pressure switch
8 9 10 11 12 13
Hydraulic oil low pressure switch Display pushbutton (only digital panel) Transmission speed sensor (only digital panel) Coolant temperature sensor Air cleaner clogged sensor Engine oil pressure switch
D0009110
314
0.010.5303.4
36 35 34
32 31
15 12
5 33
15
30/1
30 50
Fmax
20A
40A
F6
40A
F6
Systems
Electrical system
4.12 RADIO (VERSION WITH STANDARD CAB) 4.13 RADIO (VERSION WITH HIGH-VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
1
GND6
2 4 1 3 1 2
0.011.0729.4
0.009.7850.4
0.011.3596.3
X131
X86 X101
3
X132
2 1
4
X133
2 1 3
2 1
X87
X133
2 1 3
GND6
3 0.009.7852.3
3
X111
50A
F2 5A
X132
X91
X111
F 50A
X37
+50 +30
X37
+50 +30
M +
BATTERY
BATTERY
1 2 3 4
Radio Starter motor RH speaker LH speake
1 2 3 4
Radio Starter motor RH speaker LH speake
D0007500
D0007510
0.009.7852.3
0.011.3606.4
X131
X86
2 4 1 3
2 1
F2
5A
315
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.14 HEATER (STANDARD CAB)
2 010.2123.2
X137 X139
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
C B H M L 3 2 1 0
1 2 3
1 2
X142
12
87 85 86 30 11 3 10 6 3 8 9 4 5 7 2 1
X138
11
10
X136
3 1 2 4 1 2 2 1
X140
2 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
Potentiometer adjustment heading Heating air temperature sensor Fan speed selector switch Resistor for heater fan Heater fan Roof wiring power relay Starter switch Starter motor Heating alternator Heater unit resistance Heater settings control unit Relay - alternator excitation
X141 X107 X106 X89
2 1
X108
X103-30
2
X103
30 86 85
0.009.7850.4
20A
F4
6 7
2 10
X87
87
0.009.7852.3
X111
50A
GND6
BB+
B+
1 2
B+
X109
DF D+
X39
2 15
30/1
30 50
X32
Fmax
9
X38
+50 +30
X37
M +
BATTERY
D0008930
316
0.010.5303.4
10A
40A
F7
Systems
Electrical system
4.15 HEATER (HIGH-VISIBILITY ROOF
010.2558.1
X153 X152
2 1
8
84
X150
2 1
X151
2 1
M
5 4
2 1
X149
1 2 3 4
X148
1 2 3 4
X154
I II
X146
87b
1 2 3 4 5
III IV C
87 86 85 30
X145
1 2 3 4 5
X147
30 85 86 87
87b
X137
1 2 8 9 12 6 10 3 4 5 1 2 7 11
10
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Control relay for 3rd heater fan speed Relay - alternator excitatione Fan speed selector switch Resistor for right heater fan Right heater fan Left heater fan Resistor for left heater fan Control relay for maximum fan speed Potentiometer adjustment heading Heating air temperature sensor Heater settings control unit Heater unit resistance Roof wiring power relay Starter switch Starter motor Heating alternator
30 85 86 87
87b
X157
11
12
3 1 2 4 1 2 2 1
X136 X93
F 40A
X113
X106
2 1
X103-30 X108
2
X103
30 86 85 87
0.011.3606.4
13
X91
0.011.3761.3
X111
GND6
2 10
14
X39
2 15
30/1
BB- +
B+
1 2
B+
X109
DF D+
50A
30 50
16
X38
+50 +30
Fmax 40A
X37
M +
15
BATTERY
D0008940
0.010.5303.4
X32
F7 10A
317
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.16 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (STANDARD CAB)

5
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 Heater control unit Control relay for alternator excitation Heater control potentiometer Heater air temperature sensor Control relay for air conditioning Demister thermostat Fan speed selector switch Resistor for heater fan Heater fan Heater resistance Roof wiring power relay Control relay for air conditioning fan Air conditioning fan Air conditioning pressure switch Starter switch Starter motor Air conditioning compressor Heating alternator
1 2 3
1 2
30 85 86 87
0.010.2130.1
X143 X144
1 2
X138 X142
87
X137
6
C B H M L 3 2 1 0
85 86 30 11 3 10 6 12 8 9 4 5 7 2 1
X139
1 2 3 4 5 1 2 3 4
X140
10
X136
3 1 2 4 1 2
1 2
X141
1 2 3 4
X89
2 1
X141
X107
X106
0.009.7850.4
F3 30A
F4 20A
12 13 11
M
X108
2 1
14
X103-30 X87
2 1 3
X103
30 86 85 87 30 86 85 87 2 1 3 2 1 1
X115 GND6
X119
X118 X120
0.010.5303.4
4 2 F 50A 3 1
BB+
B+
1
B+
X109
2
DF D+
X39
1 2
X76
18
X1
15
X38
+50 +30
X37
M +
X32
15
30/1
30 50
0.009.7624.4
16
X59
2 10
BATTERY
15
17
D0008950
318
0.010.5303.4
Fmax 40A
F7 10A
0.009.7853.3
X111
Systems
Electrical system
4.17 HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING (HIGH-VISIBILITY ROOF)
7
1 2 1 2
8
84
8 0.010.2562.1
X159 X150
2 1
X153
X152 X158
2 1
X151
2 1
M
2 1
9 10
X149
X148
1 2 3 4
5
I II
1 2 3 4
X154
1 2 3 4 5 30 85 86 87 30 85 86 87
87b
X146
87b
III IV C
87 86 85 30
11
X156
X145
1 2 3 4 5
12
X147 X137
1 2 8 9 12 6 10 3 4 5 1 2 7 11
13
30 85 86 87
87b
X157
14
15
3 1 2 4 1 2 3 2 1 2 1
X136 X106 X94 X93
X113
0.011.3606.4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25
Control relay for 3rd heater fan speed Control relay for alternator excitation12 Control relay for 1st fan speed and air conditioning on Fan speed selector switch Resistor for right heater fan Right heater fan Air conditioning control switch Air conditioning thermostat Left heater fan Resistor for left heater fan Control relay for maximum fan speed Heater control potentiometer Heater air temperature sensor Heater control unit Heater resistance Roof wiring power relay Air conditioning fan Control relay for air conditioning fan Control relay for supplementary air conditioning fan Air conditioning pressure switch Supplementary air conditioning fan Starter switch Starter motor Air conditioning compressor Heating alternator
7.5A
304
40A
F3
F4
X108
2 1
17
M
18
19
20 21
M
X103-30 X91 2
1 3
X103
30 86 85 87
16
2 1
30 86 85 87 87a
30 86 85 87 87a
1 2 3 4 5 6
1 2
X117a
X115
X114
X116
X117b
X111
GND6
0.011.3761.3
BB-+
B+
B+
X109
1 2
DF D+
X39
1 2
X102
10A
25
X1 X38
+50 +30
40A
F7
0.010.5302.4
15
X37
M +
X32
15
30/1
30 50
210
X59
BATTERY
23 24
22
D0008960
0.010.5303.4
Fmax
0.011.3610.3
1 2 4 5 7 8 6 3
F 50A
319
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.18 BRAKING SYSTEM - TRAILER BRAKING

4 1 2 3
PRESS. RIMORCHIO
5
2 10
FRENO A MANO
+12 VOLT
X29
X14
X26
X32
X3
Fmax
F7 10A
X5
10
1 2
X25
1
P
X24
1 2
X38
+50 +30
X37
20
40A
F6 20A
GND5
X1
M +
BATTERY
X66
1 2
GND3
6
1 2 3 4 5 6
D0008970
Rear left light Rear right light Trailer socket (For lights and auxiliary power) Starter switch Instrument panel Brake fluid level sensor
7 8 9 10
Starter motor Handbrake switch Trailer braking low pressure switch Brake pedal switch
320
0.010.5302.4
0.010.5303.4
GND4
15
30/1
30 50
13 10 32 31
-VCC
Systems
Electrical system
4.19 HML TRANSMISSION
8
84
2 1
5 2 3
GND5
1 2 1 2 4 3 2 1
OFF ON
8 6 7
OFF ON
9
2 10
30b
30b
30 15
49
30 15
49
H X72
+12 Vcc 12 GND CONFIG SPIA M 1 4 2 9 3 6 8 7 10 5
X73 X6
X9
X16
X15
X8
X32
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
EV LO COM EV LEVA LO LEVA COM. LEVA HI
X3
11 27 26 20 21 32 31
BLOCC. DIFF. MARCIA VELOCE (H) DOPPIA TRAZIONE MARCIA MEDIA (M) MARCIA LENTA (L) +12 VOLT -VCC
X38 GND4
+50 +30
Fmax 40A
EV HI 11
F6 20A
X37
M +
0.010.7972.3
10
11
BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 6
HML control unit Solenoid valve for High range control (HI) Solenoid valve for Low range control (LO) HML control pushbutton DF control switch Differential lock control solenoid valve (DF)
7 8 9 10 11
4WD control solenoid valve (DT) 4WD control switch Starter switch Starter motor Instrument panel
D0008980
0.010.5303.4
-
15
30/1
30 50
321
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4.20 ELECTRONIC LIFT

13
ISO 9141 +10 VCC MAX ALZATA MIX POSIZIONE VEL. DISCESA SFORZO EV DW EV UP GND +12 VCC POSIZIONE
14
2 10
12 5
9 10 11 8
15
30/1
30 50
UP
2
X32
12
3 1 Fmax 10A 2 40A
DW
11
2 8
3 1 5 1 2 4 3 5 1 2 4 3 3
1 Khom
10
7 3 1
X7 I
4 3 2 1
2 8
7 3 1
P1 X42 H1
3 1 2
4.7 Khom
2 1
X38 GND5
+50 +30
X37
M
4.7 Khom
3
1 Khom
7 6
2 1 3
4.7 Khom
1 Khom
16
15
2 1
BATTERY
4.7 Khom
3
1 Khom
M1
5 4
2 1 3 2 1 3 2 1 1 2
U F U
S1
P2
3
S
EV DW EV UP
2 1
1 2
0.011.6943.4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Lift UP solenoid valve Lift lowering solenoid valve Rear lift position sensor Lift draft sensor Draft/wheelslip control potentiometer Lift lowering speed potentiometer Maximum lift height potentiometer Lift position adjustment potentiometer 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Rear lift control pushbutton Rear lift control pushbutton Rear lift down control pushbutton Rear lift Up control pushbutton Rear lift control unit Starter switch Starter motor Diagnostics connector
D0008990
322
0.010.5303.4
X71
F5
Systems
Electrical system
4.21 REAR AND FRONT PTO
8
84
2 1
GND4
1 2
L OFF
3
PTO POST. SYNCRO
ON
5 4
PTO 1000 rpm PTO 540 rpm PTO POST. +12 VOLT
OFF ON
6
2 10
PTO ECO
PTO ANT.
-VCC
30b
30b
GND5
15
30 15
30 15
49
49
0.010.5302.4
X63
X35
X3
X17
X10
X32
F6 20A
14
GND3
S
4 3 2 1
X38
+50 +30
40A
X1
X37
M
11
10
BATTERY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
Front PTO solenoid valve Front PTO control switch Instrument panel Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO) Rear PTO control switch Starter switch Starter motor 540 PTO engagement sensor 1000 PTO engagement sensor 750 (ECO) PTO engagement sensor PTO engagement sensor
D0009000
0.010.5303.4
31 16 25 30 29 28 17 32
30/1
30 50
Fmax
323
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
ENGINE WIRING (1/2)
X58 X61 X60
8
84
X59 X57 X37 X62
X55
X54
X1
TO 0.010.5303.4
1 4 9 15 21 26
3 8 14 20 25 29
X63
X64
X66 X65 X41
GND3
X1 X37 X41 X54 X55 X57

D0008300
To central wiring Starter motor Fuel pomp Cooling engine sensor Engine oil pressure switch Glowplug
X58 X59 X60 X61 X62 X63
Preheating control solenoid valve Air conditioning compressor Air cleaner clogged sensor Horn Front left lights Front PTO solenoid valve
X64 X65 X66
Front right lights Alternator Brake fluid level sensor
0.010.5302.4
325
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
ENGINE WIRING (2/2)

X55 X37 X54 X57 X58 X59
R1
N 16
RN 1.5
RN 1.5
VN 1.5
N1
BN 1
M1
B1
X60
N1 N1 Z1
X61
R1
TEMPERATURE TEMPERAT. 1
ENGINE OIL PRESS.
P. OLIO MOT.
M1 N1 B1 BR 1 L1
AIR FILTER
FILTRO ARIA
RPM INDICATOR
W CONTAGIRI
V1
GENERATOR
GENERATORE
Z1
HORN AVV. ACUSTICO 6
DIPPED HEAD LIGHTS
ANABBAGL.
HN 1 V1 V1
DIPPED HEAD LIGHTS
ANABBAGL.
H1
N1
HN 1
X62
FULL BEAM HEAD LIGHTS
ABBAGLIANTI
FULL BEAM HEAD LIGHTS
ABBAGLIANTI
10
V1 RN 1.5 RN 1.5
PLUG
CANDELATTA
11
PLUG
CANDELATTA
12
BN 1
ELECKTROVALVE ELETTROVALVOLA 13
N1 MN 1 N1 N1 VN 1.5
FRONT PTO
PTO ANT.
14
COMPRESSOR
COMPRESS.
15
N1 N1 N1
H1
X64
GND3
ZN 1
BRAKES OIL OLIO FRENI 20
MB 1
+12 VOLT +12 VOLT 29
BR 1
ZN 1
N1
N 16
L1
N1
MB 1
4 9 15 21 26 29
8 14 20
X1
X66
X63
X65
D0008310
326
25
X41
N1
MN 1
AMP
0.010.5302.4
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF ENGINE WIRING CONNECTORS
8
84
1
X66 X1
X54
F0028460
X55
F0028480
3
X58
F0028450
327
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4
X60
F0028420
5
X64
X62
F0028430
X61
X63
F0028440
328
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
7
GND3
X67: conector for engine cooling fan speed with air conditioning system
F0026980
8
X41
F0028490
9
X59
F0028520
329
Systems
Electrical system
ENGINE WIRING
8
84
10
2 3
X65
4 5
F0028410
11
X37
7
F0028390
10
11
0.010.5302.4
331
Systems
Electrical system
CENTRAL WIRING (1/2)
1 5 E S X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10 X11 X12 X13 X14 X15 X16 X17 X18 X19 X20 X21 X22 X23 X24 X25 X26 X27 X28 X29 X31 X32 X33 X34 X35 X36 X37 X38 X39 X40 X41 X42 X43 X44 X45 X50 X52 X67
D0008360
8
84
1000 rpm PTO engagement sensor 540 PTO engagement sensor 750 PTO (ECO) engagement sensor PTO engagement sensor To engine wiring Cigar lighter Analogue instrument panel Connector (Platform version) To front light wiring (Version with cab) Brake pedal switch To HML wiring To electronic lift wiring Four-wheel drive control switch Diff lock control switch PTO control switch Outlet socket (in cab) Compressor for drivers seat air suspension Front right headlamp Rear right light Four-wheel drive control solenoid valve Differential lock control solenoid valve (DF) Rear PTO control solenoid valve (PTO) Connector Pressure switch for hydraulic oil filter clogging Hydraulic oil low pressure switch Connector Rear worklight (platform version) Fuel level sensor Handbrake switch Trailer braking low pressure switch Trailer socket Front left headlamp Number plate light Rear left light Start enable switch Starter switch Hazard warning lights switch Rear worklights switch (Not utilised) Front PTO control switch Lights selector switch Starter motor (+12V) Starter motor (Start) To cab wiring Hazard warning lights control unit Alarms control unit Diagnostics connector Preheating control unit Display pushbutto Engine governor reset button Transmission speed sensor Selection pushbutton Preheating control pushbutton
TO 0.011.6943.4
GND5
X8
X9
X10
X3 X40 X43
TO 0.010.5302.4
X2
X7
4 3 2 1
X11
X1
X52 X12 X45 X42 X5 X15 X67

3 2 1
X13
X14
X16 X4 GND4
TO 0.009.7852.3 0.011.3761.3 TO 0.011.7972.4
X6
X17 X18
1
X19
X39
X21
X21 X22
X20
X44
S S
X32
E 5 1
40 A
20 A
15 A
20 A
10 A
20 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
10 A
X50 X36
X24
SERVIZI
ELECT.2
STOP
X23 5 1 E
15 A
RL1
RL2 FM1
X38
X37 X25 X31 X26
X35
X34
X33
X29
X28
X27
0.010.5303.4
333
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
1 1
CENTRAL WIRING (2/2)

MN 0.8 N1 N1
7 6 3 5 4
AN1 N1
AMP AMP
X18
X52
2
7 6 5 3 4
CB1 AR0.5
1 4
2 5
3 6
X40
R1 M1 B1 BR1 L1 Z1 H1 H1 V1 V1 RN1,5 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 21 26 22 27 23 28 24 29 26
M1 B1 S1 MB1 C1 R1 GV1 BR1 N1
X43
BN1 M4 RN 1.5
5 6 3 4 1 2
N1
Z0.5
X1
15 16 9 4 10 5 17 11 6 18 12 7 19 20 13 14 13 8 14 15 17 3 2 1 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18
MG 0.5
X45
X44
AN1
AN1
AN1
AMP
X19 X20
AMP
X6
GR1
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27
RN0.5 SG1.5
B1.5
MB1 HV1 ZN1 HN1 CN1 L1 AN1 MN1 GR1 V1
9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28
R1 N1
HR1 AR1 RN0,5 AR0,5 Z0,5 HG1 ZB1 ZV1

MB1
MV1
1
MB1
GN1
MB1
1 7
HR1
RV1 MB1
S1
8 7 6 7 6
ZB1 N1 MB1
7 6 5 2
1 6 2
*ZN1 ZV1
5
5 4
2 1
HR1
X10
N1
MB MB
MB
X9
HR1
AR1
X8
GR1
MG0.5 CB1
MB1
MB1 MB1
MB1
R1 VB1 AG1 VN1

HN1 N1 C1 MB1
1 2 3
MB1
MB1
MB1.5
MB1
MB1
1 2
X23 E
M4
N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
RV1
2
X67
N1
N1
VN1.5
MN0.8
BM1 N1 B1 N1 AG1
RN1,5 MN1 BN1
VM1
RN 1.5
AR1
X3
1
HG 1 N1
5
MV 1
1 4
N1 HV1
2 1
X24
RL1
N1
85
87
X17
X16
X15
RN1 GN1 A1 N1 G1 A1.5 N1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MB1
BN1.5 A1
1 2
N1
30
VB1.5 SG1.5
A1
MB1.5
MB1
GV1.5
M1
MB1
5 3 4
M1
2 3
H1.5 G1.5 R1.5 R1.5
3 2 1
9 8 7 6
AN1.5 A1.5 B1.5 Z1

VN1.5
M1
X36
5 4
B1.5
X35
MN1 MN1
2 1
MB1
NM1
GND4
B1.5
B1.5
MB1 MB1
5 3 4
X34
2
VB1
M4
N1
7
1 2
GV1.5
GV1.5
MB1
AN1
GV1.5
N1
VM1
X33
X14 X13
M1
N1
MN1
X12
X11
AN1.5 A1.5
A1.5 A1.5 A1.5 AN1.5
M1
1 1 2
N1
N1
X22
X37
R6
X21
GN1.5 GN1 N1 RN1 G1 AN1 N1 GN1 AN1.5 N1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
GN 1
GN 1.5
X28 X29 X27
GV1.5
GV1.5
VB1.5
BM1.5
BM1.5
M0.5 M1.5
G1.5 LB1.5 GN1.5 BN1.5 G1.5 H1 H1 V1.5 MN 1.5 G1 F13
R1.5
R4
M4
R1.5
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12 VN1.5 H1
X2
20A
15A
20A
10A
20A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
10A
40A
15A
2 1
G1.5
AR1.5
AR4
H1.5
G1
FM1
F1
40A
H2,5 N1.5
87 87
L4
L4
RN1.5
LB1.5
CN1
N1
M1
N1
X38
M
L4
30 15
N1
N1
N1
N1
N1
H2,5
86
85
GV0.8
MV1
N1.5 N1.5 N1.5 N1.5 N1.5 N1.5 N1.5 N1
N1
N1
N1
AR4
86
M4
MV1
19
VN1.5 LB1
17 50
AN 1.5 N1
MV1
M4
X50 X4
2 5
5 2
X5
X25
GND5
N1 A1
3 4
AN1
2 1 6
L4
RN1
M1
RL 2
N1
30
N1 A 1.5
N1 A 1.5
X26
5 7
X32 X39
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE
V Z N S R Verde/Green Viola/Violet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red A B L G H Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Grigio/Gray Giallo/Yellow
X4
GN 1
M 0.5
1
Marrone/Brown
Arancio/Orange
HG 0.5 N1
AMP
G1
GN1 G1 AN 1.5 GN 1 N1
X42
N1
1
M 1.5
AMP
HG 0.5
X7
D0008330
0.010.5303.4
334
G1
X31
Systems
Electrical system
FRONT LIGHT WIRING (VERSION WITH CAB)
8
84
X4
TO 0.010.5303.4
X13
X27
X4 X13 X27
To central wiring Front right sidelight and direction indicator Front left sidelight and direction indicator
D0009120
0.010.5582.3
335
Systems
Electrical system
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
8
84
1
X1
GND4 X43
X67
F0028510
2
X45 X2
X67 X32
F0028750
X40
F0027610
337
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
X52
X33
F0028730
X5
F0027680
X36
X42
X44 RL1
RL2
FM1
F0028740
338
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
7
X31
F0027670
8
X38
X37
F0027820
339
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
X39
F0027550
10
X16
X17
X18
X15
F0027790
11
X20
F0027750
340
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
12
X19
F0027810
13
X50
F0027930
14
X24
F0027710
341
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
15
X23 S
F0027780
16
5 1 E
F0027760
17
X25
F0027770
342
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
18
X26
F0027740
19
X14-X29
F0027720
20
X28
F0027730
343
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
21
X11
X12
F0027700
22
X7
GND5
F0027800
23
X8 X10
X9
F0027690
344
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
24
X4
F0027580
25
X3
F0027620
26
X13-X27
F0027590
345
Systems
Electrical system
CENTRAL WIRING CAB 1
8
84
27
X21
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
19 26 2 3 4
F0028540
18 17
5 6 7
8
PLATAFORM
10
11
12
13
14
16 26
X22 26 19 19
27
0.010.5303.4 0.010.5582.3
347
Systems
Electrical system
POWERSHIFT WIRING (1/2)
8
84
X6
TO 0.010.5303.4
X72
H L M X6 X72
Solenoid valve for High range (HI) control Solenoid valve for Low range (LO) control To HML lever wiring To central wiring HML control unit
D0008340
0.011.7972.4
349
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
POWERSHIFT WIRING (2/2)

M L H
X6
1 4
2 5 6 7
3 8
ZN 1
MB 1
ZN 1
ZV 1
M V Z N S R
Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/Violet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red
C A B L G H
Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Yellow Grigio/Gray
N1
ZV 1
M 1.5
N1
Z1
X72
B1
H1
10
ZN 1
ZB 1
12
11
MB 1
N1
ZB 1
ZB 1
M1
M1
H1
H1
Z1
B1
D0008350
0.011.7972.4
350
Systems
Electrical system
CONNECTOR POSITIONS POWERSHIFT WIRING
8
84
1
M
3
L H
F0027830
2
X72
F0028530
3
1
X6
F0028550
0.011.7972.4
351
Systems
Electrical system
ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING (1/2)
1
8
84
P1
H1
M1
S
1 2
X7
TO 0.011.6955.4 0.011.6958.4
DW
UP
S1
DW UP P
1 2
3 1 2 1 2 3
X71 UP DW EV UP EV DW P2
C Rear lift control pushbutton DW Rear lift Down control pushbutton EV DWLift DOWN solenoid valve EV UPLift UP solenoid valve H1 Maximum height adjustment potentiometer
I M1 P1 P2 S1 UP
Rear lift control pushbutton Draft/wheelslip control adjustment potentiometer Lift position adjustment potentiometer Rear lift position sensor Lift draft sensor Rear lift Up control pushbutton
V X7 X71
Lift lowering speed potentiometer To central wiring Rear lift control unit
D0006640
0.011.6943.4/10
353
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING (2/2)
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS TABLE VEL.DISCESA
X71
POSIZIONE ISO 9141 +12 VCC MIX
POSIZIONE
MAX ALZATA
M V Z N S
C A B L G H
SFORZO
+10VCC
EV DW
EV UP
GND
10
11
12
AB1
AN1
BN1
BN 1
MB1
M1
HR1
N1
B1
S05
H05
L05
V05
MB1
MB1
MB1
MB1
M05
M05
M05
M05
N05
N05
N05
N05
H05
S05
V05
L05
H05
1
V05
M1
N1
MB1
2 3
VO5
HR1
H1
M1
P1
HR1
H05
S05
L05
I X7
UP
DW
BN1
AB1
N1
M1
N1
AN1
N1
S1 P2
EV UP EV DW
M1
3
N1
B1
D0006650
0.011.6943.4/10
354
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF ELECTRONIC LIFT CONNECTORS
8
84
1
V
P1
H1
M1
I
F0027440
2
C
X71
F0027420
3
X71
X7
F0027430
355
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4
UP DW
F0027410
5
P2
F0027400
EV DW EV UP
F0027380
356
Systems
Electrical system
ELECTRONIC LIFT WIRING
8
84
7
3 4
S1
2 5
F0027390
0.011.6943.4/10
357
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFY BLANK
Systems
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
8
84
X 79
1 5 2 6 3 7
X 78
4
4 8
X 80
X 81
TO 0.009.7851.4
3 2 1 4 1 3
X 77
TO 0.009.7853.3
X 76
TO 0.009.7854.3
X 75
3 2
X 82
X 74
30
H
85 86 87
X 103
1 2 3 4
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8
X 83
Interior roof light To screenwash pumps wiring To air conditioning fans wiring To worklights wiring Rear worklights switch Rear screen wiper control switch Windscreen washer pump control switch Rotating beacon control switch Intermittent wipe timer for windscreen wiper Clock Front windscreen wiper control switch Front worklights switch Radio To heater power supply wiring To windscreen wiper wiring To heater or air conditioning wiring To air conditioning wiring Relay for roof wiring power
X 85
X 84
TO 010.2153.2
X 90
TO 010.2147.2 010.2153.2
GND4
X 89
3
TO 0.010.4516.3
X 88
TO 0.010.1359.3
X 87
X 86
D0006890
0.009.7850.4/50
359
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)

X85 X78 X81 X84
A-N 1 A-N 1
1 2 5 6 3 4 7 8
X79 X80 X83

4 43 32 21
1
1 2 5 6
3 4 7 8
V1
R-N 1
G-R 1
M-G 1.5
G-N 1.5
G-V 1.5
G-N 1.5
A-N 1
V-N 1
AN1
AR1
AR1
V1
R1
A1
N1
H-N 1
M 1.5
R1.5
M 1.5
G1
G1
N1
N1
H-N 1 M 1.5 N 1.5

4 8
X77
N 2.5 G-N 1.5 G 1.5 RN1 GR1

53N I
N1
A1 H-N 1 C1
A1
AR1 A-N 2.5 N 2.5

4 2
T 53S 15 31
X82
V1 AN1
X76
V1 V1 N 1.5 N1 A-R 1 C1 N1 V1 V-N 1.5 V1 R4 N4 N1
X89
4 3
X90
X75
G-R 1 AN 1
3
X88
1 4
N1
V-N 1
V-N 1.5
R 2.5
X87
L-B 1

A-N 1 A-N 1
M V
M-G 1.5 A1 G-V 1.5 LB 1
C A B L G H
N1 N4 N1 N 2.5 N 2.5 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
R1.5
A-N-2.5
R1
Z N S R
N1
R1
R1
R1
N1
R1
R4
A1
X103
30 H 85 86 87
X86 GND6 X74

1
R 2.5
M 2.5 M 2.5
5 A RADIO
10 A
30 A
7.5 A
20 A
7.5 A
10 A
10 A
D0006900
0.009.7850.4/50
360
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF ROOF WIRING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
1
X86
F0027290
X88
F0027300
3
X74
F0027310
361
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4
X77 X75
X87
F0027320
X83
X103
F0027330
6
X76
F0027340
362
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
7
X89 X90
F0027350
X82
F0028180
GND
F0027370
363
Systems
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
10
X84
X79 X81
1 10 9 8 7 6
X78 X85 X80
2
F0028170
5 3 4
0.009.7850.4/50
365
Systems
Electrical system
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
X124
8
84
X121
TO 0.009.7850.4
X77
X122
X126
X127
X123
X125
X77 X121 X122 X123

D0006770
To roof wiring Front left worklight Rear left worklight Rear right worklight
X124 X125 X126 X127
Front right worklight Rear screen wiper motor Connector Rotating beacon
0.009.7851.4/40
367
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
GN 1.5
X122
N 1.5
N 1.5
5
GN 1.5
1
GN 1.5
N 1.5 N 1.5
7
X123
N 1.5
G 1.5
HN 1
3
G 1.5 N 1.5 N 1.5 M 1.5
X124
X77
G 1.5
X121
N 1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
X127
N 1.5
1
N 1.5
N 1.5
X125
2
HN 1
X126

M V Z N S R Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/Violet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red C A B L G H Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Yellow Grigio/Gray
D0006780
0.009.7851.4/40
368
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF WORKLIGHTS CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
X121-X122 X123-X124
F0027200
X77
F0027270
3
X126
F0027180
369
Systems
Electrical system
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
5
X127
4 3
F0027170
X125
F0027280
0.009.7851.4/40
371
Systems
Electrical system
SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
X129
1 2
X135
1 2
TO 0.009.7850.4
X75
3

2 1
C 1.5
X135
1
AR 1.5
X75
2
N 1.5
N1
1 2
X129
X75 To roof wiring X129 Front windscreen washer pump X135 Rear screen washer pump
D0006750
0.009.7854.3/10
373
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
G-R 1
M-N 1
G-R 1 (+MOT)
V-N 1 (AZZ.)
R-N 1 (+AZZ)
G-R 1 (+MOT)
R-N 1
TO 0.009.7850.4
(+AZZ)
3 2 1
X130
V-N 1 (AZZ.) M-N 1 (GND) V-N 1
X88
M-N 1 (GND) R-N 1

X88 To roof wiring X130 Windscreen wiper motor
D0006740
0.010.4516.3/1
374
Systems
Electrical system
SPEAKER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
R
X131
X132
X133
X131 Radio X132 Left speaker X133 Right speaker
D0006760
0.011.0729.4/10
375
Systems
Electrical system
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
8
84
X130
F0027120
2
X88
F0027240
X131
F0027250
377
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
WIRING FOR SCREENWASH PUMP - WINDSCREEN WIPER - SPEAKERS (STANDARD CAB)
X132-X133
F0027260
5
X135 X129
3 2 6
X129
F0027130
X75
F0028060
0.009.7854.3/10 0.010.4516.3/1 0.011.0729.4/10

379
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
8
84
X108
2 1
X108
2 1
X109
1 2
TO 010.2123.2 010.2130.1
SOLO PER 65A
X107
B+ X106
BX106
TO 0.009.7850.4
3 1 2
X87
X111
X111
50A
X37
TO 0.009.7850.4
(X103) X103-30
R6
1 2
X39
B+ Heater alternator (+) B Heater alternator () X37 Starter motor X39 To central wiring X87 To roof wiring X103-30 To roof wiring (X103) X106 Heater resistance X107 To heater or air conditioning power wiring X108 Connector X109 Heater alternator X111 Connector
D0006800
0.009.7852.3/40
381
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF HEATER POWER CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
X108
1
X108
2
L1 G-R 1 N-L 1 B1 B1 G-R 1

2
AMP
X107
G-R 1 B1
X109
L1
X106
N 16
N 16
B+

N-L 1
M Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/Violet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red C A B L G H Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Yellow Grigio/Gray
X106
N 16
N 16
B-
V Z N S R
R 2.5
3
2 1
X87
1 2
V-N 1.5 L-B 1 LB1
X39
V-N 1.5
X111
R6 R 2.5
X111
X37
X103-30
D0006790
0.009.7852.3/40
382
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF HEATING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
1
X106
F0028150
2
X106
F0027050
3
X107
X103-30
F0028160
383
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4
X87
F0027070
5
X111 X37
X39
F0026880
6
X109
X108
F0028720
384
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
1
B+ B-
X108
F0026890
7 5
0.009.7852.3/40
385

PAGINA INTENZIONALMENTE LASCIATA BIANCA
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
X141 X140 X136
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
8
84
TO 0.009.7852.3
30 85 86 87
X107
X142
TO 0.009.7850.4
X89
1 2 3
X138
X137
X139
X89 X107 X136 X137 X138

D0007780
To roof wiring To heater power wiring Heater control unit Heater air temperature sensor Heater control potentiometer
X139 X140 X141 X142
Fan speed selector switch Heater fan resistor Heater fan Relay for alternator excitation
0.010.2123.2
387
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
X136
HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
12
10
11
L1 N 0.5 GR 1 NL 1 B1
1 2 3 4
X137
N 0.5
X107
N4 C4
X89
2
H 0.5
X138
C 0.5 V 0.5
N4
X141
R4
B1 Z 0.5 C 0.5 R1
87 86 85 30
X142
M 2.5
LR 1.5
R 2.5
B 0.5
R4
C4

M 3 2 V Z N S 1 R Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/Violet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red C A B L G H Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Yellow Grigio/Gray
X140
0
D0007770
X139
0.010.2123.2
388
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF HEATING CONNECTORS (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
1
X107 X89
F0028260
X141
X140
F0028230
X138
X137 X139
F0028240
533

Systems
Electrical system
HEATER WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
4
X136 X142
F0028250
0.010.2123.2
391

Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
X90
TO 0.009.7850.4
8
84
X141
X140
X136
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
30 85 86 87
TO 0.009.7852.3
1
X107
X143
TO 0.009.7850.4
X89
30 85 86 87
1 2 3
X138
X137 X142
X144
X139
X89 X90 X107 X136 X137 X138

D0007750
To roof wiring To roof wiring To heater power wiring Heater control unit Heater air temperature sensor Heater control potentiometer
X139 X140 X141 X142 X143 X144
Fan speed selector switch Heater fan resistor Heater fan Relay for alternator excitation Air conditioner control relay Demister thermostat
0.010.2130.1
393
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
X136
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
12
10
11
L1 N 0.5 GR 1 NL 1 B1
1 2 3 4
X137
N 0.5
X107
N4 C4
X89
2
H 0.5
X138
C 0.5 V 0.5
BV 0.5 NZ 0.5 CR 1 B 0.5
1 2 3 4
X90
B 0.5 B 0.5
X144
N4
X141
R4
B1 Z 0.5 C 0.5 R1
87 86 85 30
X142
CR 1 NZ 0.5 M 2.5 BV 0.5 C1 LR 1.5
87 86
X143
85 30
R 2.5
B 0.5
R4
C4

M 3 2 V Z N S 1 R Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/Violet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red C A B L G H Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Yellow Grigio/Gray
X140
0
D0007760
X139
0.010.2130.1
394
Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
1
X107 X89
X90
F0028270
X141
X140
F0028230
3
X137 X138
X144
X139
F0028290
395

Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
4
X136 X142
1
X143
F0028280
0.010.2130.1
397

Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (1/2)
8
84
X120
X118 X115
TO 0.009.7850.4
X119 X76
3 2 1 1
BIANCO WHITE
85
87
87
86
ITALAMEC 037
30
X76 X115 X118 X119 X120

D0006620
To roof wiring Relay - heat exchanger fan Air conditioning pressure switch Air conditioning heat exchanger fan Air conditioning pressure switch
0.009.7853.3/21
399
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB) (2/2)
X120
X118
M V Z N S R Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/Violet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red C A B L G H Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White BIANCO WHITE Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Yellow Grigio/Gray
X119
X115
AN 2.5 AN 1
30
85 CB 1
87
86
CB 1
87
A 2.5
V1 N 2.5 N1
1 3 AN 2.5
X76
4
VN 1
VN 1
N1
V1
D0006630
0.009.7853.3/21
400
N 2.5
A 2.5
Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (STANDARD CAB)
8
84
2 1
X118
X120
F0028210
2
3 X115
X119
F0028220
3
X76
F0027340
0.009.7853.3/21
401
Systems
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)
TO 0.011.3595.3
8
84
X74
X95
TO 0.010.2560.0
X94
TO 0.010.2554.2 0.010.2560.0
X93 X80
GND7 X82
TO 0.011.3597.3
X96
X92 X97
TO 0.011.3743.3
X75
X98
TO 0.011.3754.3
X91
X99
Interior roof light To screenwash pumps wiring Windscreen washer pump control switch Intermittent wipe timer PTO To heater power supply wiring To windscreen wiper wiring To heater wiring To heater or air conditioning wiring To worklights wiring Rotating beacon control switch Rear screen wiper control switch Windscreen wiper control switch Rear worklights control switch Front worklights control switch To speaker and radio wiring To air conditioning fan wiring Relay for roof wiring power Roof wiring power fuse (40 Amp)
X104
X100
TO 0.011.3596.3
7.5A
10A
10A
7.5A
10A
7.5A
30A
5A
X101
FREON
RADIO
TO 0.011.3610.3
X102
X103
D0008810
0.011.3606.4/51
403
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)

X100 X99 X96 X98 X97 X80
MG 1.5 G1
GV 1.5
GN 1.5
M 1.5
M 1.5
R 1.5
GN 1
AN 1
AN 1
RN 1
VN 1
G1
HN 1
A1
A1
N1
N1
N1
X101
A1 R1 HN 1 M 1.5
G1 G1 GN 1 GN 1
X95
R1 R1
8 4
AN 1.5 V1 N 1.5 N 1.5

FREON RADIO 7.5A 10A 10A 7.5A 10A 7.5A 30A 5A
X102
AN 1.5 V1
V1
C1
AN 1
AR 1
AR 1
RN1 GR1
I
X75
AR 1 C1 N1 N1 AR1 V1 AN1 V1 V1 VN 1.5
53N T 53S 15
31
X82
FARI LAVORO FARI LAVORO POSTERIORE ANTERIORE ANTERIORI POSTERIRI LAMPEGGIANTE POMPA TERGI ANTERIORE
TERGI
N1
X94
X93
B
R6
N6 VN 1 GR 1 53
X92
N1 AN 1
R6
X91
1 3
LB 1
M V Z N
MG 1.5 R1 AN 1.5 AN 1.5 VN 1.5 GV 1.5 R 1.5 AN 1 A1 A1 LB 1
C A B L G H
R4 VN 1.5 R1
S R
X103
5
N 1.5 N 1.5
N1 N6
N1 N1
N1 N1
1 3
40A
X104
N1
R1
M 10 R4 VN 1.5 M4
GND7
D0006880
X74
TERGI
0.011.3606.4/51
404
Systems
Electrical system
POSITION OF ROOF WIRING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
X75 GND7 X103
X91
F0026770
2
X99 X97
X80 X100 X98
X96
F0026780
3
X82
X104
F0026790
405
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
X93 X94
X95
F0026800
5
X101
X102
F0026820
X74
F0026810
406
Systems
Electrical system
ROOF WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
7
2 1
4 3 1 5
3 6
X92
F0026830
0.011.3606.4/51
407
Systems
Electrical system
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
X124
8
84
X123
TO 0.011.3606.4
X95
GND7
X122

M V Z
GN 1.5
C A B L G H
N S R
X123 X121
N 1.5
GN 1.5
X122
N 1.5
X95
4 3
G 1.5
X124
N 1.5
GND7
G 1.5
X121
N 1.5
X95 X121 X122 X123 X124

D0006840
To roof wiring Front left worklight Rear left worklight Rear right worklight Front right worklight
0.011.3595.3/10
409
Systems
Electrical system
WORKLIGHTS WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
X121-X122 X123-X124
3 2 1
F0027200
2
GND7
F0027210
X95
F0027220
0.011.3595.3/10
411
Systems
Electrical system
SCREENWASH PUMP WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
X129
1 2
X135
1 2
TO 0.011.3606.4
X75

2 1
C 1.5
X135
1
AR 1.5
X75
2
N 1.5
N1
1 2
X129
X75 To roof wiring X129 Front windscreen washer pump X135 Rear screen washer pum
D0006820
0.011.3743.3
413
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
WINDSCREEN WIPER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
G-R 1
G-R 1 M-N 1 V-N 1
R-N 1 (+AZZ)
G-R 1 (+MOT)
TO 0.011.3606.4
X130
V-N 1 (AZZ.) M-N 1 (GND) V-N 1
X92
R-N 1 M-N 1 R-N 1
CORRISPONDENZA TRA CAVI CABLAGGIO E CAVI TERGI ANTERIORE

G-R (+MOT) G
CABLAGGIO WIRES
M-N
(GND)
MOTORINO TERGI Wiper
R-N
(+AZZ)
V-N
V-N
(AZZ.)
X92 To roof wiring X130 Windscreen wiper motor
D0006830
0.011.3597.3/33
414
Systems
Electrical system
CONNECTOR POSITIONS
8
84
WIRING FOR SCREENWASH PUMP & WINDSCREEN WIPER (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
1
X75
X92
F0027110
X130
F0027120
3
X135 X129
X129
F0027130
0.011.3743.3 0.011.3597.3/33
415
Systems
Electrical system
SPEAKER AND RADIO WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
1
8
84
TO 0.011.3606.4
X101
GND7
X83
4 3 2 1
R1
A1
N1
X101
M 1.5 HN 1
3 4 2 1
R1 A1 N1
X126
X83
N 1.5 N 1.5 N1
X132
X133
GND7
2xR 1
M 1.5
N 1.5
N 1.5
CN 1
BN 1
HN 1
BN 1
C1
B1
N1
B1
3 1
4 2
X86
3 1
1
2
X131 X126 X125 X86 X131 X127

M 1.5 N 1.5
X132
X133

X127
X83 Clock X86 Radio X101 To roof wiring X125 Rear screen wiper motor X126 Connector
D0006810
X127 Rotating beacon X131 Radio X132 Left speaker X133 Right speaker
C1
X125
CN 1
0.011.3596.3/30
417
Systems
Electrical system
SPEAKER AND RADIO WIRING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
1
GND7
X101
F0027140
2
X132-X133
F0027150
X125
F0027160
419
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
2
X127
3 1 1 2
F0027170
5
5 6
X126
F0027180
6
X131 X83 X86
F0027190
0.011.3596.3/30
421
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)
8
84
X108
TO 010.2558.1 010.2562.1
4 2 1
X108
2 1
X109
1 2
X113
B+
X106
B-
TO 0.011.3606.4
3 1 2
X91
X111
X111
50A
X37
TO 0.011.3606.4
R 10
X103-30
1 2
X39
B+ Heater alternator (+) B Heater alternator () X37 Starter motor X39 To central wiring X91 To heater power supply wiring X103-30 To roof wiring (X103) X106 Heater resistance X108 Connector X111 Connector X113 To heater or air conditioning wiring
D0007210
0.011.3761.3/30
423
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
B1 NL 1 GR 1 L1 GR 1
1
X108
B1
2
X108
2
G-R 1 B1
1 2
X113
X109
L1 N 16 N 16
B+
X106
NL 1 N 16 N 16
B-
R4
3
2 1
X91
1
VN 1.5 LB 1
2
LB 1
X39
VN 1.5
X111 X103-30
R 10 R4 R 10
X111
X37

D0006710
0.011.3761.3/30
424
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
1
X103-30 X91
F0026840
2
X113
F0026850
X106
F0026860
425
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4
X106
F0026870
5
X111 X37
X39
F0026880
B+ B-
X108
F0026890
426
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER POWER SUPPLY WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
7
X109
1
X108
F0028720
6 5
0.011.3761.3/30
427

Systems
Electrical system
HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)
TO 0.011.3606.4 TO 0.011.3761.3
8
84
X157
X147
X146
X93
X113 X145
85 86 30 87 87a 85 86 30 87 87b 85 86 30 87 87B A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
3 2
5 4 3
B A 1 2
2 1
X137 X150
X149
A
2 1
X150
10
X152 X152
12
X136
X151
A
11
X153
X93 X113 X136 X137 X145
To heater power supply wiring To roof wiring Heater control unit Heater air temperature sensor Heater control potentiometer
X146 X147 X148 X149 X150
Control relay for maximum fan speed Control relay for alternator excitation Resistor for left heater fan Resistor for right heater fan Connector
X151 X152 X153 X154 X157
Left heater fan Connector Right heater fan Fan speed selector switch Relay for 3rd fan speed and air conditioning on
X148
X154
D0007850
0.010.2558.1
429
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
X136 X146
X151
X148
X145
X137
8 9 12 6 10 3 4 5 1 2 7 11
M
87b 87 86 85 30
BR 2.5
B 1.5
X93
N6 GR 0.5 CB 0.5 CB 0.5 GR 0.5 LN 0.5 LN 0.5 Z 0.5 Z 0.5 H 0.5 C 0.5 V 0.5 A 0.5 Z B0 .5 H 0.5 Z 0.5 Z 0.5 A 0.5 V 0.5 L 0.5 C6
R 2.5
N 0.5
V 1.5
BR 2
AR 2
B 2.5
X150
BR 2.5
N 2.5
A1
C6
L 0.5 GR 1 LN 1 B1
X113
R 1.5
N 2.5
X152
ZB 0.5 C 1.5 N 0.5 S 1.5 B 1.5 A 1.5 R 1.5 N 2.5 C 2.5 S 1.5 LR 2 AR 2 GL 2 R1 B1 B1 V 1.5 GL 2 R2
A 1
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS T

M
C4
ABLE
Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/V iolet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red
C A B L G H
Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Y ellow Grigio/Gray
V Z
30
85
86
87
87b
30
85
86
87
87b
N S R
II
III
IV
M
X153 X149 X154 X147 X157
D0007840
0.010.2558.1
430
Systems
Electrical system
POSITIONOF HEATER CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB
8
84
1
X154 X145
F0028300
2
X146
X147 X157
F0028570
3
X113
X93
F0028330
431
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4
X148-X149
X151-X153
F0028340
X150-152
F0028350
6
X137
F0028360
432
Systems
Electrical system
HEATER WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
7
2 1
3 4
6 7
X136
F0028370
0.010.2558.1
433

Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)
TO 0.011.3606.4
8
84
X93
X157
X147
X146
X156
TO 0.011.3606.4
X94 X137
A B 85 86 30 87 87a 85 86 30 87 87b 85 86 30 87 87b 85 86 30 87 87a 1 2 3 2 1
X158
1
5 4 2 1 5 4
X148
5 6
TO 0.011.3761.3
X113 X159 X150 X149 X150
A
2 1
10
X152 X152
12
X136
X151
A
11
X153
X93 X94 X113 X136 X137 X145 X146

D0007820
To heater power supply wiring To roof wiring To roof wiring Heater control unit Heater air temperature sensor Heater control potentiometer Control relay for maximum fan speed
X147 X148 X149 X150 X151 X152 X153
Control relay for alternator excitation Resistor for left heater fan Resistor for right heater fan Connector Left heater fan Connector Right heater fan
X154 X156 X157 X158 X159
Fan speed selector switch Relay for1st fan speed and air conditioning on Relay for 3rd fan speed and air conditioning on Air conditioning control switch Air conditioning thermostat
X154
1 2
2 3 1
3 4
X145
0.010.2562.1
435
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
X136 X146
X151
X148
X145
X137
8 9 12 6 10 3 4 5 1 2 7 11
M
87b 87 86 85 30
BR 2.5
B 1.5
X93
N6 GR 0.5 CB 0.5 CB 0.5 GR 0.5 LN 0.5 LN 0.5 Z 0.5 Z 0.5 H 0.5 C 0.5 V 0.5 A 0.5 Z B0 .5 H 0.5 Z 0.5 Z 0.5 A 0.5 V 0.5 L 0.5 C6
R 2.5
N 0.5
V 1.5
BR 2
AR 2
B 2.5
X150
BR 2.5
N 2.5
A1
C6
L 0.5 GR 1 LN 1 B1
X113
R 1.5
N 2.5
GB 1 V 0.5 B 0.5
X94
X152
ZB 0.5 C 1.5 N 0.5 V 0.5 B 1.5 A 1.5 R 1.5 C 2.5 S 1.5 GB 1 C 1.5 N 0.5 S 1.5 AR 2 GL 2 VN 0.5 VN 0.5 N 2.5 LR 2 R1 B1 B1 C4 A 0.5 V 1.5 GL 2 R2
A 1
30
85
86
87
87b
30
85
86
87
87b
30
85
86
87
B 0.5
TABELLA COLORI / COLOURS T

I II III IV C
ABLE
M V
Marrone/Brown Verde/Green Viola/V iolet Nero/Black Rosa/Pink Rosso/Red
C A B L G H
Arancio/Orange Azzurro/Blue Bianco/White Blu/Dark Blue Giallo/Y ellow Grigio/Gray
M
X153 X149 X154 X147 X157 X156 X158 X159
Z N S R
D0007810
0.010.2562.1
436
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
POSITION OF AIR CONDITIONING CONNECTORS (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
1
X158
F0028310
2
X154 X145
F0028300
3
X156 X157 X146 X147
F0028320
437
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
4
X113
X93
F0028330
5
X148-X149
X151-X153
F0028340
X150-152
F0028350
438
Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
7
3 2 1
4 5
7 8
X137
F0028360
8
9
X136
F0028370
X159
F0028380
0.010.2562.1
439

Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (1/2)
8
84
X116
TO 0.011.3606.4
X102
1 5 2 6 3 7 4 8 1 4 3 2 6 A B A B
X117a X114 X115
X117b
85
87
87
85
87
87
86 ITALAMEC 037
30
86
30
ITALAMEC 037
X102 To roof wiring X114 Relay for supplementary air conditioning fan X115 Relay for air conditioning fan X116 Air conditioning pressure switch X117a Air conditioning fan X117b Supplementary air conditioning fan
D0006860
0.011.3610.3/20
441
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB) (2/2)
X117a X116
X117b
AN 1.5
AN 1.5
6
A B A B
X114
30 30
X115
1 4
85
87
86
85
87
86
C1
87
R1
CB 1
R1 N 2.5 N 1.5 A 1.5 L 1.5
87
CB 1
A 1.5
L 1.5
V1 N 1.5 N 1.5 N 1.5 N1 N 1.5

1 2 6 3 7 4 8
X102
AN 1.5
AN 1.5
AN 1.5
VN 1
R1
VN 1
N1
V1
C1
R1

D0006870
0.011.3610.3/20
442
Systems
Electrical system
AIR CONDITIONING FAN WIRING (HIGH VISIBILITY CAB)
8
84
1
X114
3 1 2
X115
F0027080
X102
F0027090
X117b X117a
X116
F0028190
0.011.3610.3/20
443
Systems
Electrical system
8
84
Electrical system AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772) General specifications
The electrical system is fully equipped for use on the road, with sidelights, main/dipped beam headlamps, direction indicators doubling as hazard warning lights, and work lights, all fully in compliance with legal requirements as embodied in the highway code. There are four essential components and assemblies: battery, alternator, starter motor, and auxiliaries. The system operates at a nominal 12 Volts (the maximum voltage in operation is 14,30,5 V). The battery charge level is indicated by a relative meter on the instrument panel.
Specifications
battery type voltage discharge capacity over 20 hours rated current
V Ah A
maintenance free 12 100 (470)
starter motor voltage nominal rated power electromagnetic control
V 12 cv 4 (3 kW) electro-magnetic with translation and rotation of pinion
alternator RECHARGE SYSTEM code
65A AA 125 R 14V 65A (MARELLI) K1-14V 65A 20 (BOSCH) AA K3563 14V 65A (ISKRA) 85A 70A V kgm AA K5114 14V 85A (ISKRA) AA5112 12V 70A (ISKRA) three-phase 12 5,5 (62 Nm)
HEATING SYSTEM code type nominal rated voltage pulley nut tightening torque
445
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
AGROPLUS 60 (under s.n. 1016) 70- (under s.n. 2772)
GENERAL SAFETY DIRECTIONS

PRECAUTIONS AGAINST DAMAGE TO ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT Disconnect any electronic equipment from the system when the tractor is placed in any environment where temperatures are likely to exceed 80 C. Remove battery connections when carrying out servicing or repair operations on the electrical system. Avoid overvoltages in the electrical system. Always remove battery and alternator connections before carrying out welding operations or when recharging the battery from the mains. Never disconnect the battery while the engine is running. In the event that the battery needs topping up, use only distilled or demineralized water; top up only when the battery is AT REST and at AMBIENT TEMPERATURE (allow time for cooling after operation and following recharge). Never carry out servicing operations on the electric heating system with the engine running. When washing the tractor, ensure that the alternator and starter motor are well protected. These components must not be sprayed or splashed directly with water.
PRECAUTIONS AGAINST ACCIDENT AND INJURY WHEN COMMENCING ANY KIND OF WORK: Turn off the main ignition switch. Disconnect the battery; remember that electric shocks discharged through the human body will damage pacemakers. The battery generates powerful and inflammable gases when recharging, which if ignited can cause the battery itself to explode. Do not make temporary or makeshift connections to the battery, as these can cause dangerous sparks. The electrolyte in the battery is a solution of dilute sulphuric acid; if splashed on the skin, wash straight away with plenty of water and sodium bicoarbonate. Seek attention immediately from a doctor if electrolyte is splashed into the eyes. Never allow the battery near a naked flame. Keep a safe distance from a recharging battery when testing or measuring, and always wear suitable eye protection. Make certain that the electrical system and all its components are inspected and serviced periodically; any faults must be eliminated without delay, and parts subject to everyday wear replaced at the recommended intervals. Ensure that trailers are fitted with regulation lights. IMPORTANT REMINDERS The maker declines all liability in respect of any damages resulting from operations performed other than in the recommended manner and/or by unskilled hands. To ensure smooth operation of the machine, use only genuine replacement parts.
446
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
JUMP START UTILIZING ANOTHER BATTERY

NB: Emergency starting with the aid of a battery charger is not recommended. PRECAUTIONS The battery may be that of another tractor, but must in any event have the same rated voltage (and therefore an identical number of cells). 1 - Make certain the two vehicles are not in contact with one another. 2 - Ensure that all auxiliary services are switched off. 3 - Make certain the flat battery is securely connected to earth, that the filler caps are properly tightened and that the electrolyte is up to the correct level. PROCEDURE: A - Connect the two batteries as indicated in figure 1 (part A). B - If the jump battery is that of another tractor, start the engine and run at approximately 1/4 of full throttle. C - Turn the ignition key to start the engine of the stranded tractor, following the procedure given in the operators handbook. D - Remove the jump leads following the sequence as indicated in figure 1 (part B ). A - connection of leads to the 2 batteries B - disconnection of leads from the 2 batteries
Separate Batteries
connected batter.
STEP 1
STEP 4
STEP 5
STEP 2
STEP 6 STEP 3 connected batteries

Fig. 1 - Diagram of battery connections and relative leads.
separate batteries
447
8
84
PRACTICAL HINTS
Systems
Electrical system
Before installing a battery, and periodically thereafter: Check over the electrical system, giving particular attention to connections; make certain there are no traces of oxidation and that there is no loss of current. Check the alternator and the voltage regulator setting. If the charging voltage is inordinately high, distilled water will be consumed at a high rate, whereas a low voltage will not charge the battery sufficiently. Check the charge level of a new battery with a density indicator or voltmeter; if the density is less than 1.25 kg/l or the no-load voltage after at least 3 - 4 hours at rest is lower than 12.5 V, proceed to recharge. Install the battery in the machine with care, utilizing the anchorages provided. When connecting the battery to the system: secure the clamp. before connecting the negative, make certain there is no sparking on contact with the corresponding terminal of the battery. Sparks are due to insulation defects that must be located and eliminated. Tighten the clamps on the terminals, smearing with petroleum jelly.
TABLE OF WIRING COLOUR CODES BK =BLACK BL=BLUE BR=BROWN DK BL= BLACK/BLUE DK GN=BLACK/GREEN GN=GREEN GY=GREY OR=ORANGE PK=PINK RD=RED VL= VIOLET WH= WHITE YL= YELLOW EXEMPLE: DK BL/WH 1 680 DK BL/WH 1 680 = = = DARK BLUE WITH WHITE LINE CROSS SECTION OF WIRE (mm) LENGTH OF WIRE (mm)
EXAMPLE OF CONNECTORS (CAN BE 4-PIN, 6-PIN OR 8-PIN)
448
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
RECHARGE SYSTEM 65A ALTERNATOR ISKRA AAK3563 14V 65A
RECHARGE SYSTEM 65A ALTERNATOR BOSCH K1-14V 65A 20
RECHARGE SYSTEM 65A ALTERNATOR ISKRA AA 125R 14V 65A
449
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
RECHARGE SYSTEM 85A ALTERNATOR ISKRA AAK5114 14V 85A
HEATING SYSTEM
70A ALTERNATOR ISKRA AAK5112 12V 70A
STARTING SYSTEM
EV 12V 3.0 JF 12V 3.1 KWKW
450
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
Fig. 2 - Check panel with digital display
Ignition switch Electtrical system deenergized - key removable (On version with electronic RPM control, the engine shuts off automatically; On versio with machanical throttle linkage, the engine is stopped by pulling the knob on the right of the instrument panel). Active electric circyit: - Lamps indicating operation of the alternator and low engine oil pressure light up on the instrument panel. A lamp indicating pre-heating lights up when ambient temperature is below 10C; wait until the lamp has gone out (approx. 55 seconds) before turning the key to the next position. If the ignition key is turned to the start position with the thermostart indicator still alight, the heater cuts out and power is supplied to the starter motor.
Engine starting
451
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
IGNITION KEY
VENTILATION CONTROL for tractors equipped with standard cab
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL
HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS
452
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL P.T.O. CLUTCH cod. 2.7659.108.0/10 DIFFERENTIAL LOCK cod. 008.1335.0 4WD COUPLER cod. 007.5945.0/20
PUSH BUTTON CONTROL cod. 2.7659.138.0 SWITCH DIGITAL DISPLAY
453
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
WARNING SWITCH cod. 2.7659.080.0
WORK LIGHTS FRONT cod. 2.7659.078.0 REAR cod. 2.7659.079.0
SCREEN WASHER SWITCH FRONT cod. 2.7659.145.0 REAR cod. 2.7659.146.0
BEACON PUSH BUTTON cod. 2.7659.126.0
454
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
RELAY cod. 2.7659.107.0
ELECTRONIC FLASHER UNIT cod. 2.8639.004.0
455
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
INTERIOR ROOF LIGHT COD. 2.8339.032.0
SWITCH CONTROLLING: differential lock - 4RM - 540 1000 rpm/min P.T.O. Economy P.T.O. - Live P.t.o. - electric starter system. cod. 2.7659.097.0
speed selector -
SWITCH FOR EMERGENCY BRAKE
cod. 2.7659.129.0
456
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
Fuse box
tractor fuse box F1 - Thermostart F2 - Side/tail lights - horn F3 - Hazard warning lights F4 - Work light - 12V socket F5 - Engine RPM control unit F6 - Thermostart/panel/HML F7 - Engine STOP F8 - Flashers F9 - Side/tail light F10 - Side/tail light F11 - Dipped beam F12 - Main beam
cab fuse box F1 - Flasher unit F2 - Radio F3 - Air conditioning F4 - Blower/heater F5 - Front wiper F6 - Rear wiper F7 - Front work lights F8 - Rear work lights
457
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Instrument panel with digital display
The basic panel is the same as described above, except that the dial is replaced by a 4-digit display showing: Lapsed time (hours) Ground speed (speedometer) P.T.O. speed Trip meter (distance in metres)
There are also 4 high brightness Leds which indicate the function currently being displayed. Any specifications not individually listed below will be the same as for the basic panel. Operation The selection and content of the functions displayed are governed by pressing buttons, denoted P1, P2 and P3. Button P1 - Red - Positioned to right of panel. Button P2 - Red - Positioned to right of panel. Button P3 - Red - Positioned near fuse box (cover must be removed to gain access).
Auxiliary electrical systems on (turn the ignition key to position displayed. Then, turn the ignition key to position (speedometer).
) the current total of working hours lapsed will be
, when the engine is started, the display sets itself to indicate ground speed
To display a function other than ground speed, simply press P1 repeatedly to select the function required.
1 - Lapsed work time indicated by 4 digits, to the nearest hour. 2 - Ground speed indicated by 3 digits, one of which after the decimal point (XX.X), in km/h. In the event that bigger or smaller rear tyres are fitted, the new size must be entered (see directions point 5 page 373).
458
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
IMPORTANT: If a function other than speedometer is currently selected, the panel will revert automatically to displaying ground speed if 20 km/h is exceeded.
3 - P.T.O. speed is indicated by 4 digits (XXX0), in revolutions per minute. 4 - The trip meter uses 4 digits (XXXX), indicating the distance covered by the tractor in metres. The trip meter can be reset; this is done by selecting the function then pressing and holding P2 for at least 3 seconds, during which time the figures will blink before returning to zero. If P2 is released before the 3 seconds have passed, there will be no reset. 5 - Entering the speed constant according to the tyre size. This operation becomes necessary only if the rear tyres are replaced with others of a different size.
With the engine at standstill and the ignition key in the off position , press and hold button P3 while turning the key
to the auxiliary position (without starting the engine), then release the button only when the tyre code appears in the display. This code will correspond to the type of rear tyre currently fitted. Now press button P1 repeatedly to view the permissible tyre sizes, which will be displayed in sequence. When the size displayed matches that of the new tyres, press P3 again to memorize. If the key is returned to the off position without completing this last step, the tyre size code will not be updated. Listed below are the tyre options specified for the tractor. Each size has a relative display code which corresponds to the number of impulses per 100 metres picked up by the speedometer sensor.
Tyre 480/65 x 28 14.9 x 32 14.9 x 28 14.9 x 30 420/70/30 16.9 x 28 480/70/28 540/65 x 28 12.4 x 36 540/65 x 30 16.9 x 30 480/70/30 13.6 x 28 380/70/28 420/70/24 14.9 x 24 13.6. X 36
Impulses for 100 metres 1100 1058 A - Button P 1, used to select the function displayed - Colour red. The 3 available functions (speedometer, P.T.O. speed, trip meter) are displayed cyclically by pressing P1 repeatedly. The function selected is indicated by a relative Led on the instrument panel.
1050 1020 1050 1153 1192 984
B - Button P 2, used to reset the function selected - Colour red Press this to select another function.
1 Diagnostics socket (on version with electronic RPM control only)

-
2 Tyre size selection button (on version with the Instrument panel with digital display)
-
459
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Operation of the broken belts alarm control unit
IMPORTANT: (for tractors equipped with air conditioning) if the engine fan belt breaks: a safety device will activate the emergency warning light on the dashboard (red triangle) and a warning buzzer will sound; (on tractors also equipped with electronic governors) with the handbrake on, the engine will also stop. This control unit allows the operator to leave the tractor with the engine running. The control unit acquires signals from the sensors and generates alarm conditions and may also stop the engine when necessary. control unit connections INPUTS - engine oil pressure - alternator d+ - broken fanbelt sensor - auxiliary input handbrake OUTPUTS - control signal for engine oil pressure warning light - engine stop control signal - buzzer Input and output operation Inputs Input D+ serves two functions: - alarms control enabling - alarms. When the engine is switched off, this signal is low to illuminate the alternator warning light. The control unit considers the signal status low when it is below 3 volts. On starting the engine, this signal goes to +12 volts. If the signal voltage remains high (+12V) for 7 seconds, the control unit is enabled to check for alarm conditions. Once the alarm check has started, this input becomes itself a potential cause of an alarm; an alarm will be generated if the +12V is absent for at least 2 seconds. If the alternator is faulty, the signal D+ will never be activated and consequently control unit operation will not be initiated. The broken fanbelt input is connected to a sensor on the cooling fan on air-cooled engines. The broken fanbelt alarm is activated when a frequency below 10 Hz ( 10 pulses/second) is detected on the input. The oil pressure input is considered activated when it is low (earth) for at least 2 seconds, and deactivated when it stays high (12V) for the same duration. The auxiliary input is considered activated when it remains low (earth) for at least 2 seconds, and deactivated when it stays high (12V) for the same duration. The handbrake input is used by the control unit to determine the type of output in the event of an alarm condition. Outputs The engine stop command output is activated when one off the alarm inputs is activated while the handbrake is on. The control unit is capable of determining if this output is connected or not. The engine oil pressure warning light is used to generate a diagnostic code if the alarm is activated when the handbrake is released. If the alarm is caused by the absence of engine pressure, the warning light will illuminate steadily. NOTE: the auxiliary input is optional. If it is not to be utilised, leave the relative contact on the control unit free. This input can be connected to a relay which connects the signal to earth in the event an alarm.
460
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
The buzzer is used to alert the operator to the status of the control unit. The buzzer emits three different signals: - two short acoustic signals (0.3 seconds) each time the handbrake is released to indicate that the control unit is in alarm signalling condition (diagnostic code on oil pressure warning light) but without generating the engine stop output. - one long acoustic signal (1 second) each time the handbrake is applied to indicate that the control unit will activate the engine stop output in the event of an alarm. - intermittent signal ( 3 Hz) to signal that the control unit has activated the engine stop output.
OPERATION The control unit only operates after the engine has been started. The control unit uses the D+ signal of the alternator to determine whether the engine is running. This signal must stay at high voltage for a duration of 7 seconds before control unit operation is initiated. If there is an alternator fault (signalled by the alternator warning light staying on when the engine is started), control unit operation will not be initiated. The start of control unit operation is signalled by an acoustic signal which will depend on the handbrake status: - two short acoustic signals (approx. 0.3 sec) id the handbrake is released. - one long signal (1 sec.) if the handbrake is on. At this point, the control unit will monitor the status of the broken fanbelt input, the oil pressure input, the auxiliary input and the D+ input. If one of these inputs is activated, the control unit will signal an alarm. There are two levels of alarm: Level 1 alarm - handbrake released. Level 1 alarm monitoring is activated when the handbrake is released, and is signalled by two short acoustic signals (0.3 seconds). If the handbrake is not on: - and the fanbelt is broken, the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 2. - and the auxiliary input is activated, the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 4. - and the D+ input voltage is low (earth), the engine oil pressure warning light will flash with diagnostic code 3. - and the oil pressure is low, the engine oil pressure warning light will illuminate steadily (controlled by the pressure switch). The warning light will stop flashing the moment the alarm condition ceases to exist. Level 2 alarm 2 - handbrake on. Level 2 alarm monitoring is activated when the handbrake is applied, and is signalled by a long acoustic signal (1 second). If the handbrake is on: - and any alarm is activated, the control unit will generate the ENGINE STOP signal. Consequently the engine oil pressure warning light will be steadily illuminated (as when the engine is stopped, the oil pressure will fall and thus the warning light will come on) unless there is no connection between the control unit and the engine stop device. The control unit will signal the ENGINE STOP condition with an intermittent acoustic signal (approx. 3 signals per second). To deactivate the ENGINE STOP, switch off and then restart the engine.
461
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
ENGINE STOP DEVICES The alarm control unit can generate an output signal to control a device which stops the engine. The alarm control unit output can be connected to an engine control unit type 2MH (manufacturers code for control unit with 26 contact connector) and is also capable of operating a relay with currents up to 250mA.
ENGINE STOP OPERATION WITH A TYPE 2MH ENGINE CONTROL UNIT The operation of the engine control unit in the presence of a STOP signal is very simple. The control unit starts to monitor the STOP signal 2 seconds after the engine has been started, i.e. when it has attained idling speed. The control unit checks for a STOP signal which remains active for at least 1 second. On detection of a STOP signal, the control unit switches off the engine. The engine control unit signals operation of the engine stop by 7 flashes of the HOLD led on the keypad. The engine control unit will ignore the STOP signal if the engine is switched off. For example, if the engine stalls (under excessive load), a STOP signal may be generated but it will be ignored. Using the ALL ROUND TESTER it is possible to check that the STOP signal is connected correctly. One of the following messages will also appear on the monitor: 1) STOP NOT CONNECTED 2) STOP CONNECTED 3) STOP ACTIVE On models equipped with STOP control units, the valid messages are nos. 2 and 3. Should message no. 1 STOP NOT CONNECTED appear, check the connection between pin 5 of the alarm control unit and pin 11 of the engine control unit. If none of the above messages appears, this means that the engine control unit does not have the correct program.
DIAGNOSTICS To enable the operator to identify the problem which caused the intervention of the engine stop, the control unit provides a diagnostic code by means of the oil pressure warning light, but only when the handbrake is released. The diagnostic code is only given after the engine has been re-started and the control unit has given the first acoustic signal, typically 7 seconds after the alternator warning light goes out. The diagnostic code consists of a series of flashes each with a duration of 0.3 seconds at 1 second intervals. The oil pressure input does not provide a diagnostic code as the illumination of the warning light is forced by the pressure switch.
462
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
Diagnostic codes Below is a list of the diagnostic codes and their meanings: flashes WARNING LIGHT 2 3 4 5 Broken fanbelt sensor Alternator signal D+ Auxiliary input Engine STOP output
example of code 2 ON OFF
Description of faults This chapter provides useful information for fault tracing. Code 2 - Broken fanbelt sensor This fault is signalled when the input signal from the fanbelt sensor fails to arrive at the control unit. If this fault occurs : - Check that the battery voltage is present between pins 1 and 2 of the sensor connector. - Check that pin 3 of the sensor connector is connected to pin 6 of the alarm control unit. Code 3 - Alternator signal D+ This fault is signalled when the alternator signal D+ is no longer present after the alarm control unit has entered into operation. If this fault occurs: - Check the alternator warning light: if on, the problem concerns the alternator itself; if off, the wire carrying the signal to the control unit may have come disconnected. Code 4 - Auxiliary input This fault is signalled when the voltage on pin 8 of the control unit falls below 12V. This input is not currently utilised, consequently if this fault is signalled, check that pin 8 of the control unit is at +12V. If necessary, remove the contact from the connector and test again. Code 5 - Engine STOP output This fault is signalled when the control unit does not detect any connection to its STOP output. If this fault occurs: - Check that pin 5 of the alarm control unit is connected to pin 11of the engine control unit.
463
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
Broken belt alarm system and diagnostic codes. (If the light stays on continuously this indicates low engine oil pressure). A - Alternator B - Engine oil pressure C - Fan pick-up D - Brake fluid level E - Handbrake F - Alarm control unit G - Engine control unit H - Electro stop I - Connection for engines with electronic governor L - Diagnostic codes M - N* of flashes 2 - Broken belt sensor 3 - Alternator signal 5 - Engine stop output
464
Systems
8
84
Electrical system
ELECTRICAL WIRING
TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM KEY TO ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM
TAV.1 -
TRACTOR WIRING
COMPLETE CENTRAL UNDERBODY WIRING COMPLETE FRONT WIRING GEARBOX WIRING BATTERY WIRING POWERSHIFT CONTROL WIRING TAV. 2 TAV. 3 TAV. 4 TAV. 5 TAV. 6
CAB WIRING CAB WIRING DIAGRAM CENTRAL WIRING CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING WORK LIGHTS - SCREEN WIPER - ROTATING LIGHTWIRING AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WIRING AIR HEATING WIRING SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING FRONT SCREEN WIPER WIRING CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING FUEL LEVEL SENDER TAV. 7 TAV. 8 TAV. 9 TAV. 10 TAV. 11 TAV. 12 TAV. 13 TAV. 14 TAV. 15 TAV. 16
465
8
84
Systems
Electrical system
466
TAV. 1 - TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
467
KEY TO FUNCTIONAL DIAGRAM OF TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
1 - PREHEATING SOLENOID VALVE 2 - STARTING ENABLING SENSOR 3 - STOP SENSOR 4 - STOP LIGHTS 5 - STOP LIGHTS 6 - GLOWPLUG 7 - GLOWPLUG WARNING LIGHT 17 - FUEL RESERVE WARNING LIGHT 18 - FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR 19 - SENSOR FOR FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR 20 - ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE INDICATOR 21 - OIL TEMPERATURE SENSOR 22 - 540 RPM REAR P.T.O. INDICATOR LIGHT 23 - 540 RPM P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT SENSOR 24 - 1000 RPM REAR P.T.O. LIGHT 25 - 1000 RPM P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT SENSOR 30 - 4WD INDICATOR LIGHT 32 - TRAILER BRAKING INDICATOR LIGHT 33 - TRAILER BRAKING SENSOR 34 - CHRONOMETER-TACHOMETER 35 - ALTERNATOR WARNING LIGHT 36 - HYDRAULIC SERVICES OIL FILTER WARNING LIGHT 37 - HYDRAULIC SERVICES OIL FILTER SENSOR 40 - AIR FILTER WARNING LIGHT 41 - AIR FILTER SENSOR 42 - BRAKE OIL LEVEL WARNING LIGHT 43 - BRAKE OIL LEVEL SENSOR 44 - REAR P.T.O. IN OPERATION WARNING LIGHT 45 - SOLENOID VALVES OIL SENSOR 46 -SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. INDICATOR LIGHT 47 - SYNCHRONISED P.T.O. SENSOR 48 - ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE WARNING LIGHT 49 - ENGINE OIL LOW PRESSURE SENSOR 50 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK INDICATOR LIGHT 51 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SWITCH 52 - DIFFERENTIAL LOCK SOLENOID VALVE 53 - 4WD ENGAGEMENT SWITCH 54 - 4WD ENGAGEMENT SOLENOID VALVE 55 - FRONT P.T.O. CONTROL SWITCH 56 - P.T.O. ENGAGEMENT INDICATOR LIGHT 57 - FRONT P.T.O. SOLENOID VALVE 59 - REAR P.T.O. SOLENOID VALVE 60 - REAR P.T.O. CONTROL SWITCH/ STARTING ENABLE
61 - ECONOMIC P.T.O. SELECTION INDICATOR LIGHT 62 - ECONOMIC P.T.O. SENSOR 63 - HANDBRAKE SENSOR 66 - SIDE LIGHTS INDICATOR LIGHT 67 - LEFT FRONT SIDE LIGHT 68 - RIGHT FRONT SIDE LIGHT 69 - RIGHT REAR SIDE LIGHT 70 - LEFT REAR SIDE LIGHT 71 - NUMBER PLATE LIGHT 72 - RIGHT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT 73 - LEFT LOW BEAM HEADLIGHT 74 - LEFT MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT 75 - RIGHT MAIN BEAM HEADLIGHT 76 - MAIN BEAM WARNING LIGHT 77 - HORN 83 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT 84 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT -1ST TRAILER 85 - DIRECTION INDICATORS WARNING LIGHT - 2ND TRAILER 86 - LEFT FRONT DIRECTION INDICATOR 87 - LEFT REAR DIRECTION INDICATOR 88- RIGHT FRONT DIRECTION INDICATOR 89 - RIGHT REAR DIRECTION INDICATOR 91 - WORK LIGHT 93 - REAR WORK LIGHTS 94 - FLASHER SOCKET A - IGNITION SWITCH B - STARTER MOTOR C - ELECTRONIC GOVERNOR D - FANBELT ALARM CONTROL UNIT E - 65A ALTERNATOR WITH SOCKET W F - LIGHTS, DIRECTION INDICATORS AND HORN CONTROL G - DIRECTION INDICATORS CONTROL UNIT H - DIRECTION INDICATORS CONTROLS I - TRAILER SOCKET N - PRE-HEATING CONTROL UNIT O - HIGH-MEAN-LOW CONTROL UNIT R1 - PRE-HEATING RELAY R2 - STARTING ENABLEMENT RELAY
TRACTOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEM DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
468
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 2 - COMPLETE CENTRAL UNDERBODY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
469
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 3 - COMPLETE FRONT WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
470
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 4 - GEARBOX WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
471
1200 3 CIL. 1300 4 CIL.
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 5 - BATTERY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
472
TRACTOR WIRING
TAV. 6 - POWERSHIFT WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
473
KEY TO COMPONENTS
1 - FLASHING SWITCHES 2 - FLASHING 3 - COURTESY LIGHT 4 - 12V RADIO SOCKET 5 - CONDITIONER RELAY 6 - CONDENSER FAN 8 - PRESSURE SWITCH 9 - COMPRESSOR (R 132A) 10 - HEATING ALTERNATOR 11 - SCREEN WIPER SWITCH 7 - HEATING AND AIR CONDITIONING UNIT 12 - FRONT SCREEN WIPER MOTOR 13 - FRONT SCREEN WASH PUMP 14 - SCREEN WASH BUTTON 15 - SCREEN WIPER SWITCH 16 - REAR WIPER MOTOR 17 - REAR SCREEN WASH PUMP 18 - FRONT WORK LIGHTS SWITCH 19 - FRONT WORK LIGHTS 20 - REAR WORK LIGHTS SWITCH 21 - REAR WORK LIGHTS A OPTIONAL CLIMATE CONTROL CONNECTOR B POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR R OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEATER CONNECTOR
CAB WIRING
TAV. 7 - CAB WIRING DIAGRAM - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
474
CAB WIRING
TAV. 8 - CAB WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
475
KEY TO CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM COMPONENTS

E N P C RA RC A P F T CO S R B A ELECTRONIC HEATING CONTROL UNIT NTC TEMPERATURE SENSOR FAN SPEED CONTROL RESISTOR FAN SPEED CONTROL SWITCH HEATING RELAY AIR CONDITIONING RELAY ELECTRIC HEATING ALTERNATOR HEATER ELEMENT POWER SUPPLY FUSE AIR CONDITIONER PRESSURE SWITCH COMPRESSOR THERMOSTAT OPTIONAL ELECTRIC HEATING CONNECTOR POWER SUPPLY CONNECTOR OPTIONAL CLIMATE CONTROL CONNECTOR
CAB WIRING
TAV. 9 - CLIMATE CONTROL SYSTEM WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
476
CAB WIRING
TAV. 10 - WORK LIGHTS - SCREEN WIPER - ROTATING LIGHTWIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
477
CAB WIRING
TAV. 11 - AIR CONDITIONING SYSTEM WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
478
CAB WIRING
TAV. 12 - AIR HEATING WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
479
CAB WIRING
TAV. 13 - SCREENWASH PUMPS WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
480
CAB WIRING
TAV. 14 - FRONT SCREEN WIPER WIRING
CAB WIRING
TAV. 15 - CAB POWER SUPPLY WIRING - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
481
CAB WIRING
TAV. 16 - FUEL LEVEL SENDER - AGROPLUS 60 (under serial number 1016) 70- (under serial number 2772)
482
APPENDIX
Appendix
Power lift tester
Power Lift Electronic Control Unit

TESTER manual
CONTENTS Functional diagram ............................................................................................................................. III Presentation screen ...........................................................................................................................LV Initialisation menu................................................................................................................................V 1 Main menu .......................................................................................................................................VI 1 Calibrations menu..........................................................................................................................VII 2 Monitor menu...................................................................................................................................X 1 Lift menu......................................................................................................................................XI 2 Draft menu................................................................................................................................. XIII 3 Position menu ...........................................................................................................................XIV 3 Tests menu ...................................................................................................................................XV 1 Sensors menu ...........................................................................................................................XVI 2 Power supply menu .................................................................................................................XVII 3 Inputs menu ............................................................................................................................XVIII 4 Alarms menu .................................................................................................................................XX
Scope The scope of this document is: - to present the diagnostic information that can be accessed through the All Round Tester (ART); - to list the alarm conditions that the electronic control unit is able to diagnose, along with the possible causes of the alarms and the relative actions of the electronic control unit.
II
Appendix
Power lift tester
PIN OUT REAR LIFT ECU

1
Vcc
2
Electrovalve UP
3
Electrovalve DOWN
4
GND
12
ISO 9141
6
Position
7
Draft
8
L. Speed
9
Max H.
10
Mix
11
Main Control
5
+Vcc Sensors
Extern up Down
1K2 Lock/Alarm
Extern down
Up
1 +
2 -
1 V
1 V
EVup
EVdown
Tester In/Out
Position Sensor
Draft Sensor
Lowering Speed
Maximum Height
Mix Draft/Pos
Main Control
Down/Up Control lever
Functional diagram of the lift ECU. 1 - Vdc 2 - UP solenoid valve 3 - DOWN solenoid valve 4 - GND 5 - Sensor Vdc 6 - Position 7 - Draft 8 - Speed limit 9 - Maximum height 10 - Mix 11 - Main control 12 - ISO 9141 A - UP solenoid valve B - DOWN solenoid valve C - Tester IN/OUT D - Position sensor E - Draft sensor F - Lowering speed G - Maximum height H - DRAFT/POSITION MIX control I - Main control L - UP/DOWN control
III
Appendix
Power lift tester
Presentation screen
The presentation screen displays preliminary information about the electronic control unit: Software version Date of software issue The screen appears as follows:
L = = = = = = i = f = t = = = = = = = =
S D
o a
f t
t e
r d
e d /
X m
. m
x /
x y
x y
P T = = [ [
a R = = C E
r A = = ] ]
a C = = C
m T = = H C
e O = = A O
t R = = N N
r x
s x = = N x = = P U
= = G T
= = E I
= = A E
= = R
= = A
= = M
= = .
Where: Version Date :
software version date of software issue
The various functions are described below: Pressing "C" displays the initialisation menu for the tractor type: - lift for tractor 10N (Golden) - lift for tractor 10S (Dorado) As described on page V Pressing "E" displays the menu described on page vi
IV
Appendix
Power lift tester
Initialisation menu
From the Initialisation menu you can configure the lift in accordance wit the type of tractor.
The menu is displayed on the ART as follows:

I C P f C P 1 2 u a o h a N r r r a r L L n a i i I r a T e m 1 g m f f I n e 0 e e t t t e f f r o o s r r 1 1 0 0 N S A t t X e r s L I S A T I O N
= [
= C
= ]
= C
= O
= N
= T
= I
= N
= U
= E
Where: Current parameters defines the configuration currently saved in memory To change and save the configuration, press "1" or "2". Press "1" to configure the lift for the 10N tractor. (Golden) Press "2" to configure the lift for the 10S tractor. (Dorado) Press "C" to pass to the main menu.
Appendix
Power lift tester
1 - Main menu
From this menu you can select the component on which diagnosis is to be performed or display the general list of alarms detected up until that point.
The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:
M 1 2 3 4 C M T A a o e l l n s a
A i i t r
I b t s m
N r o s a r
M t
E i
N o
U n s
S E
E E
L X
E I
C T
The various menus and submenus are described below.
VI
Appendix
Power lift tester
1 - Calibrations menu
From this menu you can calibrate the lift system. The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:
C 1
a -
l M
i a
b x
r .
a -
t h
i e
o i
n g
s h
M t
e -
n -
u -
P L 2
e i -
r f L
s t i
o i f
n n t
a g i
l n
i s g
s p
a e s
t e p
i d e
o e
n d
These operations are to be performed with the lift lock released. The various calibration functions are described below.
VII
Appendix
Power lift tester
Maximum height calibration:
On pressing "1" on the ART, the following screen is displayed:
1 -
M -
a -
x -
. -
H -
e -
i -
g -
h -
t -
C N
u e
r w
: :
x x
x x
x x
x x
[ [
A C
] ]
C C
a O
n N
c F
e I
l R M
Where: Current New The position value between 0 and 1000 saved in memory. The position value between 0 and 1000 read by the position sensor.
Operation: To decontrol the lifter pressing for 3 second the key of command basculante on the position UP. With the keys of controls manual, to position the lifter to the maximum desired height. To press the key [E] on the tester and the key [C] to confirm the new value.
Press: "A" to cancel the operation; "C" to save the new value in the Eeprom.
VIII
Appendix
Power lift tester
Implement lifting speed
This parameter regulates the speed at which the lift is raised when using the manual controls only. On pressing "2" on the ART, the following screen is displayed:
2 -
L -
i -
f -
t -
s -
p -
e -
e -
d -
C N
u e
r w
: :
x x
x x
x x
x x
[ [
A C
] ]
C C
a O
n N
c F
e I
l R M
Where: Current New The speed value between 300 and 400 saved in memory. The actual speed value between 300 and 400.
Press: "A" to cancel the operation; "C" to save the new value in the Eeprom.
IX
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor menu
From this menu you can display the operating parameters of the lift system. The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:
M 1 2 3 L D P
o i r o
n f a s
i t f i
t t i o n
The various functions are described below.
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor Menu
1 - Lift menu From this menu you can display the following values: Set Point Position Draft Maximum height
L P S M L M P D P L S o e a o i o r w I t
i t t x w x s a m F a
f e P . . . S i f
t n o t i h s . E t t . N i . i n e p . S o . o t i e . O n . O T . E A . X m . g e . R . . U T . I e . h d . S . . T U . T . . P S . . . U . . . x T x x x X X . . . x x x x X X t . t . . e . . . . r x . . x s x . . x x x x x x X X X -
P W M T t u E S s
POTENTIOMETERS Set Point Reference value for automatic control of the lift. On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 1000 (this operation must be performed with the lift lock released). The value modifies the positions of equilibrium during the operation in control. Max. height Lowering speed Mix Represents the maximum height to which the lift can be raised. On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 100. Represents the lowering speed as a percentage of the maximum speed. On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 100. This parameter allows you to select the type of control, passing continuously from position to draft control. On turning the potentiometer, the value displayed varies between 0 and 1000.
XI
Appendix
Power lift tester
SENSORS Position Signal read by the position sensor; values range from 0 to 100. Draft Signal read by the draft sensor; values range from 0 to 1000. PWM OUTPUT PWM Value that controls the current supplied to the proportional solenoid valves. Value ranges 290 to 600. when the lfting is in movement; 0 if the elettrovalvoles are not commanded. LIFT STATUS Status Displays the operating status of the lift system. Press the control button to view the following status information LOCK lift locked STOP lift operative awaiting command CNTRL lift operating in automatic control mode FLOAT lift in float mode
XII
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor menu
2 - Draft menu From this menu you can display the following values: Pwm Base Up PWM Base Down PWM Max Up PWM Max Down Gain Up GainDown

D r a f t -
1 2 3 4 5 6
P W M P W M
B B
a a a a
s s x x U D
e e
U D U D
p o p o n w n w n
x x x x
x x x x x x
x x x x x X
P W M M P W M M G G a a i i n n
p o w
These are the characteristic values of the electronic lift control system. The default values are as follows:
Values PWM BaseUp PWM BaseDown PWM MaxUp PWM MaxDown Gain Up Gain Down 10N 390 400 600 600 25 45 10S 360 420 600 600 18 35
XIII
Appendix
Power lift tester
2 - Monitor Menu
3 - Position Menu From this menu you can display the following values: Pwm Base Up PWM Base Down PWM Max Up PWM Max Down Gain Up GainDown The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:
P -
o -
s -
i -
t -
i -
o -
n -
1 2 3 4 5 6
P W M P W M P P G G W M W M a a i i
B B M M n n
a a a a
s s x x U D
e e
U D U D
p o p o n w N w n
p o w
These are the characteristic values of the electronic lift control system. The default values are as follows:
Values PWM BaseUp PWM BaseDown PWM MaxUp PWM MaxDown Gain Up Gain Down 10N 315 310 600 600 10 50 10S 315 320 600 600 10 50
XIV
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests Menu
From this menu you can test the operation of the: 1 - sensors 2 - actuators connected to the ECU. 3 - inputs The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:
T -
e -
s -
t -
s -
M -
e -
n -
u -
1 2 3
S P I
e o n
n w p
s e u
o r t
r s
s s u p p l y
The various functions are described.
XV
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests Menu
1 - Sensors menu
In this menu you can check the operation of the sensors. The menu displayed on the ART is as follows:
S e n s o r s -
P D
o r
s a
i f
t t
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. x
x x
x x
x x
Where: Position Draft Position sensor value ranging from 0 to 100 Draft sensor value ranging from 0 to 1000
XVI
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests Menu
2 - Power supply
In this menu you check the power supply to the ECU.
P -
o -
w -
e -
r -
S -
u -
p -
p -
l -
y -
Where: +10V represents the output voltage value in the range 0 to 1000 mV.
XVII
Appendix
Power lift tester
3 - Tests menu
3 - Inputs In this menu you can check the operation of the ECU inputs.

I P U E P S M L C u P x o e a o o s / t t t x w n h D U e P . . t r n b W P n o / t i h s o D W i n e p l o t i e t m . g e y e . h d p t . t . e. e . . . . r x x x x s x x x x x x x x x x x x p u u t t t s o n s -
Where: Up/Down rocker switch on console
XVIII
Appendix
Power lift tester
On pressing the UP side of the rocker switch with the lift lock released, the display will appear as follows:
U P / D W U P
On pressing the DOWN side of the rocker switch with the lift lock released, the display will appear as follows:
U P / D W D o w n
ExtUP/DW ground-operated pushbuttons
On pressing the button with the UP arrow when the lift lock is released, the display will appear as follows
E x t U P / D W U P
On pressing the button with the DOWN arrow when the lift lock is released, the display will appear as follows
E x t U P / D W D o w n
Set Point on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 1000 Max. height on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 100 Lowering speed on turning the potentiometer, the value varies in the range 0 to 100 CONTROL TYPE On pressing the control pushbutton, the following conditions are displayed
C o n t r o l t y p e L O C K
T RL
XIX
Appendix
Power lift tester
5 - Alarms menu
The screen displayed on the ART is as follows:

A L A R M S L O G -
C [
a E
n ]
e E
l X I
l T
XX
Appendix
Power lift tester
Tester message Possible cause of fault UP proportional solenoid valve disconnected. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity -Solenoid faulty. Check solenoid -ECU faulty. Short circuit of UP proportional solenoid valve. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - Solenoid faulty. Check solenoid. - ECU faulty. DOWN proportional solenoid valve disconnected. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - Solenoid faulty. Check solenoid. - ECU faulty. Short circuit of DOWN proportional solenoid valve. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - Solenoid faulty. Check solenoid. - ECU faulty. EPROM error. - ECU faulty. Short circuit of position sensor. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - Sensor faulty. Check sensor. - ECU faulty. ECU action N of flashes
UPSV DISCONN.
Loss of lift system function.
11
UPSV S.C.
12
DWSV DISCONN.
13
DWSV S.C.
14
EPROM CHECK
Total lockup of lift system
15
POS.SENS.S.C.
21
XXI
Appendix
Power lift tester
Tester message Possible cause of fault Position sensor disconnected. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - Sensor faulty. Check sensor. - ECU faulty. General failure of CPU. - ECU faulty. Draft sensor not connected. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - Sensor faulty. Check sensor. - ECU faulty. Draft sensor short circuit. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - Sensor faulty. Check sensor. - ECU faulty. EEPROM error. - ECU faulty No voltage at sensor. - Wiring error. Check electrical continuity. - ECU faulty. Check using Tests menu on ART. ECU action N of flashes
POS.SENS. DIS.
22
GEN.FAIL.CPU
23
DRAFT SENS. DIS.
Loss of draft control function.
41
DRAFT SENS. S.C.
Loss of draft control function.
42
EEPROM CHECK
Default values (for 10N) utilised
45
NO V. SENSOR
XXII
Der Nachdruck des Textes und der Abbildungen ist, auch auszugsweise, verboten. La reproduction du prsent ouvrage, du texte et des llustratons, mme partelle est interdite. Text and illustrations herewith enclosed may not be reproduced, not even in part and by any means. E vietata la riproduzione, anche parziale, del testo e delle illustrazioni. Se prohibe la reproduccin total o parcial del texto y de las ilustraciones. A proibida a reproduo, at mesmo parcial, do texto e das ilustraces.
Der zeitliche Unterschied zwischen der Aktualisierung der Druckschriften und der Durchfhrung technischer Vernderungen (die stndig vorgenommen werden, um immer hochwertigere Erzeugnisse auf den Markt zu bringen) erfordern aus Grnden der Korrektheit des Hinweises, dass die in dieser Ausgabe enthaltenen Daten jederzeit gendert werden knnen und deshalb unverbindlich sind. Le temps qui scoule entre la mise jour en impression et les modifications techniques (ces dernires changeant continuellement afin doffrir aux utilisateurs des produits toujours plus qualifis) nous oblige a vous signaler que les donnes de la prsente publication pourraient tre susceptibles de variations. Elles sont donnes sans engagement de notre part. Because of the possible time lag between the introduction of technical modifications (an on-going process the aim of which is to offer products which are being continually improved) and the latest update of the manual, we must point out, for the sake of correctness,that the data contained in this edition are liable to change at any time and are therefore not binding. La differenza tra i tempi di aggiornamento in stampa e i tempi delle modifiche tecniche (variando queste ultime continuamente, ci al fine di offrire prodotti sempre pi qualificati) impongono di dichiarare, per correttezza, che i dati contenuti nella presente edizione sono suscettibili di variazione in qualsiasi momento e che quindi non sono impegnativi. La diferencia entre los tiempos necesarios para poner al dia la impresin y los tiempos de las modificaciones tcnicas (las que se verifican continuamente, con el objeto de ofrecer productos cada vez ms calificados) nos imponen declarar, por correccin, que los datos contenidos en la presente edicin estn sujetos a variaciones en cualquier momento y que portanto no son obligativos. A diferena entre os tempos necessrrios para actualizar a impresso e os tempos das modificaces tcnicas (que se verificam continuamente, a fim de oferecer um produto cada vez mais qualificado), obrigam-nos a declarar, que os dados contidos neste manuel so susceptiveis de variaco em qualquer momento e que portanto no so vinculatrios.
NOTES
05 - 2003 By Personal computing
cod. 307.1064.3.6 Technical Publications Dep.
05 - 2003
307. 1064. 3. 6

Agroplus 60-70-80

Diunggah oleh

Informasi Dokumen

Judul Asli

Hak Cipta

Format Tersedia

Bagikan dokumen Ini

Bagikan atau Tanam Dokumen

Opsi Berbagi

Apakah menurut Anda dokumen ini bermanfaat?

Apakah konten ini tidak pantas?

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

Agroplus 60-70-80

Diunggah oleh

Hak Cipta:

Format Tersedia

WORKSHOP MANUAL

2RM 2RM 4RM 4RM

WITH PLATFORM WITH CAB WITH PLATFORM WITH CAB

MECHANICALLY OPERATED REAR POWER-LIFT

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

2420 2430 2595 345 2162

2420 2430 2595 345 2112

1490 1700 2360 365 2292 365 2242

2355 2550 240 200 7.50-16 14.9R30

2705 2900 240 200 250 12.4R 20 14.9R30

2555 2750 240 200 7.50-16 16.9R30

2905 3100 240 200 250 11.2R 24 16.9R30

PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS AGROPLUS 60/70/80

Part to be suppl ied

Engine AGROPLUS 60 AKROS TURBO 15W40

9.5** (2.5) 11** (2.9)

Engine AGROPLUS 70/80

Gearbox and rear axle

41 (10.8) AKROS MULTI s AKROS MULTI

Sae 10w30 Sae 20w30 UTTO API GL4 SDFG OT-1891

PRESCRIBED LUBRICANTS AND FUELS

Front PTO MAX

6 (6.3) 1.5x2 (1.6x2) 2.5 (2.6)

Sae 10w30 Sae 20w30 UTTO API GL4 SDFG OT-1891

Brakes and clutch control

AKROS MATIC AKROS GREASE T2

ATF DEXRON II D SDFG OF-1691 NLGI 2 - LITIO SDFG GR-1202 L

(*)1 replace after 50 hours (**) With filter + 1.5 litre

CONVERSION TABLE FROM

HOW TO ORDER SPARE PARTS

ENGINE TYPE AND SERIAL NUMBER

TRACTOR FRAME TYPE AND SERIAL NUMBER

Clutch and transmission

009.6924.3/20 310 6 8,5 TEXTAR T385 Benditalia 3/4" AKROS MATIC

009.9770.3 310 9,7

Spring specifications to Belleville washer for the clutch engagement

Fig. 1 - Engine rpm pickup.

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 2 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60

Fig. 3 - Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 70-80

Clutch and transmission

Clutch unit for AGROPLUS 60-70-80 (USA) 6 blades

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 4 - Components of clutch assembly

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 5 - Checking clutch disk thickness.

Fig. 9 - Installing clutch assembly through n. 5.9030.256.4/10 equipment.

Fig. 6 - Clutch assembly hydraulic operating cylinder.

Adjusting clutch control pedal

Bleeding air from the hydraulic circuit

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 10 - Clutch operating cylinder

Stripping the slave cylinder (Fig. 10)

Clutch and transmission

- Spring - Spring holder - Screw - Shoulder ring - Seal ring

M - Spacer ring N - Piston O - Seal ring P - Rod Q - Support disk

- Snap ring - Guard boot - Nut - Yoke

Stripping the master cylinder

Fig. 13 - Clutch pump control positioning. A - Locknut B - Yoke

Clutch and transmission

Fig. 15 - Section view of clutch master cylinder

Clutch and transmission

check condition of clutch disk

9.5 (2.5) 11 (2.9)